1




            A Summer Training Report
                     On
   “VITAL ROLE OF EXPORT PROCESS, EXPORT
DOCUMENTATION & EXPORT SERVICES(LOGISTICS) IN
  THE EXPORT OF FINISHED GOODS PRODUCTS”
                      Of




                     HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED
SUMMER INTERNSHIP REPORT IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE AWARD OF FULLTIME

                                    MBA
                       SESSION (2008-2010)




                               Preface
2




                              Objective of Study
The objective of study is to find answer of the some questions, which are important to clearly

understand the importance, procedure and role of export documentation for Aluminium & Aluminium

products in smooth Export working.

The main objectives of doing this project are as follows:-

    •   To study the Export Documentation Process.


    •   To understand the global aluminium industry trends in the major demand and supply center of

        the world.

    •   To understand the global marketing of Hindalco products.


    •   To understand the Export Market Plan.


    •   To study the Export Process from Order Booking to Shipment.


    •   To understand the overall process involved in the Export Management System of the Hindalco

        Industries Ltd.

    •   To understand the overall process used by the Hindalco to establish the Export Documentation

        Process.

    •   To understand the benefits and incentives given by the government to the exporter for

        boosting up the Indian Export.
3




                                                  Contents
Preface
Acknowledgements
Objective of Study

    Section 1: Introduction……………………………………………………………...
                About Aditya Birla Group………………………………………..……..9
                Group Companies ………………………………………………..…....14
                Aditya Birla Management Corporation …………………………..……19
                At A Glance ……………………………………………………..……..19
                Financial Foot Prints……………………………………………..……..20
                Hindalco At A Glance……………………………………………..……21
                Highlights Of Hindalco Industries limited………………………..……23
                Hindalco Overview ………………………………………………..……24
                Company Profile…………………………………………………..…….41
                Industry At A Glance…………………………………….………..…….42
                Aluminium ………………………………………………..……….……42
                Copper …………………………………………………...……….……..43
                Production Process……………………………………..……….……….45
                Extracdion Of Alumina From Bauxite………………………………….46
                Extraction Of aluminium From Alumina………………………………..47
                Product Profile…………………………………………………………...48
                Product Overview ……………………………………………………….49
                Aluminium ………………………………………………………………49
                Copper……………………………………………………………………49
                Primary Aluminium Product……………………………………………..49
                Integrated Operation Of Hindalco ……………………….………………51
                Production Capacity…………………………………………………….. 52
                Organizational Profile of Hindalco Industry Ltd………………...……....54
                Product and Brands of Hindalco………………………...………...……..57
                Hindalco Product Range………………………………...……...………..65

    Section 2: About Flat Rolled Product…………………………………………...….66
              Flat Rolled Products (FRPs)…………………………………………........66
              Types of FRPs (Export)……………………………………………….......67

    Section 3: About International Marketing………………………………………....68
              What is International Marketing?................................................................68
              What is Global Marketing?..........................................................................69
              Advantages and Disadvantages of Global Marketing……………………..69

    Section 4: About Export……………………………………………………………..70
              What is Export?............................................................................................70
              Types of Export……………………………………………………………70
4


               Benefits of Export…………………………………………………………70
               Risk from Export…………………………………………………………..72
               Why we should Export?...............................................................................74
               How to Export?............................................................................................75
               Advantages of Export……………………………………………………..76
               Process of Export Management…………………………………………...77
               Export Cycle………………………………………………………………78

    Section 5: Export Marketing………………………………………………………..80
               Export Marketing Plan…………………………………………………….80
               Practical Suggestion for Export Marketing Plan………………………….80
               Tips for Export Marketing………………………………………………...81
               Market Entry Strategies: Location of Importers…………………………..82

    Section 6: Developing an Export Strategy…………………….…………………....86
             Determining Product’s Export Potential………………….……………….90
             Assessing Company’s Export Readiness………………….………………90
             Developing an Export Plan……………………………….……………….90

    Section 7: Developing a Market Plan…………………………..…………………..92
               Marketing Strategy Benefits………………………..…………………….92
               Market Research………………………………….………………………92
               Method of Market Research…………………….………………………..93
               Step-by-Step Approach to Market Research….………………………….94

    Section 8: Methods/Channel of Exporting…………..…………………………….96
               Approaches of Exporting…………………..……………………………..96
               Distribution Consideration………………..………………………………97
               Indirect Exporting………………………..……………………………….98
               Direct Exporting……………………….………………………………....98

    Section 9: Preparing Product for Export………………………………………...100
               Questions to Consider…………………………………………………...100
               Product Adaptation……………………………………………………...101
               Engineering and Redesign……...……………………………………….102
               Branding, Labeling and Packaging...…………………………………....102
               Installation    ……………………………………………………………….103
               Warranties……………………...………………………………………..103
               Servicing…………………...……………………………………………103

    Section 10: Export Order…………………………………………………………......105
              Processing of an Export Order………………………………………….....105
              Terms and Conditions of an Export Order………………………………...107
              Planning for Execution of the Export Order………………………………108

    Section 11: Export Pricing, Quotation and Incoterms……………………………...109
              Pricing Consideration………………………………………………….…..109
5


               Quotations and Proforma Invoice………………………………………....112
               Difference between Proforma Invoice and a Quotation…………………..114
               Use of a Proforma Invoice………………………………………………...114
               Commercial Invoice……………………………………………………….115
               Customs and Consular Invoice……………………………………………116
               From the Proforma Invoice to the Commercial Invoice…………………..116
               Incoterms or Terms of Sale………………………………………………..119

    Section 12: Export Process…………………………………………………………...123
             Procedure for Export……………………………………………………...124

    Section 13: Logistics Process………………………………………………………....127
             Brief Description of the Flow of Logistics………………………………..128
             Flow of Logistics Process Implemented by Hindalco…………………….130

    Section 14: Export Documentation…………………………………………………..132
               Importance of Export Documentation…………………………………….132
               Set of Documents Required for Exports…………………………………..133
               Major Export Documents……………………………………………….…133
               Need for Export Documents……………………………………………....136
               Significance of Some Export Documents………………………...……….136
               Common Defects in Documentation……………………………...……….143
               Process of Getting Custom Clearance……………………………...……...144

    Section 15: Government Policies for Export………………………………………145
             EXIM Policy…………………………………………………………….145
             Main Objectives of EXIM Policy……………………………………….145

    Section 16: Export Incentives………………………………………………………146
             Process Involved in Getting Export Incentives………………………....149
             Export Finance………………………………………………………….152
             Hindalco’s Export Data (From Renukoot Plant)………………………..157

    Section 17: SWOT Analysis of Hindalco……………………………………………158
    Section 18: Findings and Recommendations…………………………………….....159
    Section 19: Bibliography………………………………………………………….....161
    Section 20: Annexure…………………………………………………………...…...162
               Specimen of Proforma Invoice…………………………………………..162
               Specimen of Packing List………………………………………………..162
               Specimen of Certificate of Origin………………………………………..163
               Specimen of Bill of Lading……………………………………………...163
               Specimen of Export Quotation Worksheet………………………………164
               Specimen of Commercial Invoice……………………………………….164
               Sample of Insurance Certificate…………………………………………164
6




    INTRODUCTION

          ABOUT ADITYA BIRLA GROUP
          ADITYA BIRLA MANAGEMENT
          CORPORATION
          GROUP COMPANIES
          AT AGLANCE
          FINANCIAL FOOT PRINT
7




                                     ABOUT

                           ADITYA BIRLA GROUP



   The ADITYA BIRLA GROUP is India’s 1st tryly multinational corporation(MNC)
    whose over 30% of revenues flow frpm its operations across tehe world.

   The group is anchored by an extra-ordinary force of 72000 employees
    belonging to over 20 different nationalities the world over.

   The ADITYA BIRLA GROUP             reaches out to the core sector in India –in
    industries integral to the nation’s growth-cement,aluminium,fertilizers,viscose
    stable   fibre,   textile,power,telecommunications,industrial   chemicals   and
    financial services.




   The ADITYA BIRLA GROUP is a dominated player in all the sectors in which
    it operates, such as viscoses stable fibre, non ferrous metal, cement viscoss,
    telecommunication and financial service.




                              Group Overviews
8


         Aditya Birla group traces it’s origin back to the Tiny village of Pilani in the
RAJASTAN desert, where late Shri Seth Shiv Narajan Birla started carton trading
operation in 1857. Then one visionary the late Shri G.D. Birla set up Indian’s first
integrated aluminium manufacturing unit at Renukoot 1962 backed by captive power
plant at Renusagar in 1967.

         It further evolved under the dynamic leadership of the late Shri Aditya Vikram
Birla a prominent figure in the Indian industries, under whose stewardship HINDALCO
attained its leadership position in aluminium. Today our group chairman Dr. Kumar
Manglam Birla has put together the building block to make Indian business a global
force.

Group Today
         The Aditya Birla Group is India’s first truly multinational corporation (MNC),
whose over 60% of revenues flow from its operations across the world.

         Over 75 units in India and overseas as well (in Thailand, Indonesia, Malaysia,
Philippines, Egypt and Canada) and international trading operations spanning several
countries including Singapore, Dubai, Russia, Vietnam, Myanmar and China make it
India’s first truly multinational conglomerate.

THE ADITYA BIRLA GROUP HAS THE FOLLOWING ACHIVEMENTS TO
ITS CREDITS:-

         •     The words no 1 in viscose fiber.
         •     The word’s largest single location palm oil producer.
         •     Asia’s largest integrated aluminum producer.
         •     The forth largest producer of insulator.
         •     The forth largest producer of carbon black.
         •     The eleven largest cement producers.
         •     Among the best energy efficient fertilizer plant.


         •     Among the word’s top 15 largest BPO company.
9


      IN INDIA , A FRONTRUNNER POSITION ARE:-

      •     A premier branded garments players.

      •     The second largest player in viscose filament yard.

      •     Among the top three BPO companies.

      •     India’s leading copper producer.

      •     The second largest in the chlor alkali sector.

      •     Among the top five mobile telephony players.

      •     A leading player in life insurance & asset management.

Group vision

      “To become a premium conglomerate with clear business focus at each
corporate level.”

      Group mission

“To deliver value for our customer, shareholders, employees and society at large.”

Group Philosophy

      Reset on four pillars

           Customize

           People-size

           Strategize

           Institutionalize

Group values

           Integrity

           Speed

           Seamlessness

           Passion
10




                                           CHAIRMAN: Shri Kumar
                                                Mangalam Birla

                                           “The winning organization
                                               will be those who
                                             regularly out perform
                                           competition They have a
                                           stable consistent strategy.
                                           A stable strategy does not
                                            means a static strategy,
                                           rather it means following
                                            a broad philosophy and
                                           continuous improvement
                                               in how strategy is
                                           manifested, incorporating
                                             the expected market
                                              requirement and the
                                               customer needs.”

                                             Kumar Mangalam Birla



                               COMPANIES
     Group companies:

         Grassim Industries Ltd.

         Hindalco Industries Ltd.

         Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.

         Ultra Tech Cement Ltd.
11


     Indian companies:

          PSI Data systems

          Aditya Birla Minacs Worldwide Ltd.

          Essel Mining & Industries Ltd.

          Shree Digvijay Cement Ltd.

          Idea Cellular Ltd.

          Aditya Birla Insulators.

          Aditya Birla Retail Limited

          Bihar Caustic and Chemicals Ltd.
     International companies:
     Thailand:

          Thai Rayon

          Indo Thai Synthetics

          Thai Acrylic Fibre

          Thai Carbon Black

          Aditya Birla Chemicals(Thailand) Ltd.

          Thai Peroxide.
     Philippines:


          Indo Phil Textile Mills.

          Indo Phil Cotton Mills.

          Indo Phil Acrylic Mfg.

          Pan Century Surfactants Inc.
     Indonesia:

          PT Indo Bharat Rayon.
12



               PT Elegant Textile Industry.

               PT Sunrise Bumi Textiles.

               PT Indo Liberty Textiles.

               PT Indo Raya Kimia.
        Egypt:

               Alexandria Fiber Company S.A.E.

               Alexandria Carbon Black Company S.A.E.
        China:

               Liaoning Birla Carbon.

               Birla Jingwei Fibres Company Ltd.

               Aditya Birla Grasun Chemicals(Fangchenggang) Ltd.
        Canada:

               AV Cell Inc.

               AV Nackawic Inc.
        Australia:

               Aditya Birla Minerals Ltd.
        Laos:

               Birla Laos Pulp and Paper Plantation Company Ltd.
        North and South America, Europe and Asia:

               Novelis Inc.



Globally
•      A metals powerhouse, among the world's most cost-efficient Aluminium and Copper producers.

     Hindalco-Novelis from its fold is a Fortune 500 company. It is the largest Aluminium rolling

     company
13


•    It ranks as No. 1 in Viscous Staple Fibre


•    The largest single location palm oil producer


•    The third largest producer of insulators


•    The third largest producer of carbon black


•    The eleventh largest producer of cement and the largest in a single geography


•    The largest single location copper smelter


•    Among the world's top 15 BPO companies and among India's top three


•    Among the best energy efficient fertilizer plants


In Asia
•    The largest integrated Aluminium producer


In India
•    A premier branded garments player

•    The second largest in the chlor-alkali sector

•    Among the top five mobile telephony companies

•    Among the top three supermarket chains in the retail business

•    Second largest player in viscous filament yarn

•    Second largest private sector insurance company and a leading assets management company.
14



               JOINT VENTURES



        Birla Sun Life Insurance

        Birla Sun Life Asset Management Company Ltd.

        Birla Sun Life Distribution Company Ltd.

        Tanfac Industries Ltd
15



              ADITYA BIRLA MANAGEMENT CORPORATION

                          BOARD OF DIRECTOR


     Mr. Kumar Mangalam Birla (chairman)

     Mr. S.Aga

     Mr. D.bhattacharya,managing director

     Mr. S.K.jain

     Mr. Santrupt misra

     Dr. Bharat singh

     Mr.S.K. mitra

     Mr. Di mittal

FINANCIAL FOOT PRINT:
     A us $28 billian corporation with a market cap of US $31.5 billian and in the
leaque of fotune 500.the A.B. group is anchored by an extra ordinary sale of 100000
employee belonging to 25 different nationalties. In India the group has been adjusted
the best employees in India and among the top 20 in asia by the Hewitt- economic
times and wall streetjournal study2007over50% of its revenues flow from overes
operations.         The     groupoperation       in       20       country:          India
thiland,indonasia,Egypt,china,Canada,Australia,U.S.A.germany,brazil,italy,Switzerland,
andmalasia.

Renukoot: A general overview

       Lying in the foothills of the vindhya range, renukoot is about 160kms from
     varanasi and 154 kms from mirzapur.
16




         There is a direct daily train named muri expressed between jammu tawl to
      tatanagar and rachi via renukoot.

         A part from above renukoot is also connected with kolkatta through direct train
      named shaktipunj express.

Location:-

Renukoot- zonal office:-

            Kolkatta

            Mumbai

            Bangalore

            delhi

Divisional office:-



            Power division

            Foil division

Guest house:-

            Delhi

            Mirzapur

            Lucknow

            Allahabad
17




                        Renukoot


                                   Renusagar
                                   (CPP)


     Silavasa                         Bauxite
     (Foils & Wheels)                 Mines
                                      (Jharkhand &
                                      Chattisgarh)
18




     INTRODUCTION

           HINDALCO AT A GLANCE
           HIGHLIGHTS OF HINDALCO
           INDUSTRIES LIMITED
           HINDALCO OVERVIEW
19




HIGHLIGHTS OF HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED
    India ‘s largest aluminium producer.

    Market share of 50 percent.

    World’s cost producer of aluminium.

    Fully integrated production facilities from bauxite mines to value added
     aluminium products.

    Fully integrated aluminium plant at renukoot,U.P.

    Aluminium wheels and foils plant at silvassa, in Dadra& NagarHaveli.

    First Indian Aluminium producer which was accorded ISO 9002 and 14001
     certified.

    Significant economies of small scale from large scale production.

    Strong market presence and wide distribution network.

HINDALCO OVERVIEW:-

     “Hindalco” was set up in collaboration with Kaiser Aluminum & Chemicals
Corporation U.S.A, in a record time of 18 months. The plant started functioning in the
year 1962 with a capacity of 20,000 tons per annum.

     The company has growth manifold and is managed by Board of Directors, with
Shri Kumar Mangalam Birla as the chairman of the Board of Directors. Day to day
affairs of the company are managed by Professional Executives headed by Shri Ratan
K Shah as the chief operation officer-Aluminium & Power.

     Hindalco is one of India’s largest producers of Aluminium. The company was in
corporated on December 15, 1958 and commenced production in 1962 with an initial
smelting capacity of 20,000 TPA.
20




      Hindalco’s integrated operation and operational efficiency have enabled the
company to be one of the world’s lowest cost producers of Aluminium.

Hindalco Today

      Aluminium has turned out to be the wonder metal of the industrialised world. No
other single metal can do so many jobs, so well, and so economically.

      Aluminium’s growth rate is the highest amongst the major basic metals today.
Hindalco ranks as the largest Aluminium producer in India, whose more than 58%
sales is in value added product and has more than 40% in total market share.
Hindalco’s integrated operations and operational efficiency have enabled the company
to be one of the world’s lowest cost producers of Aluminium.

      Hindalco also owns a large captive thermal power plant at Renusagar that meets
the power requirement of the company very effectively. Hindalco currently has primary
Aluminium capacity of 3, 75,000 MTPA.



      Hindalco is a leading domestic player in two metals business segments -
aluminium and copper. The aluminium division's product range includes alumina
chemicals, primary aluminium ingots, billets, wire rods, rolled products, extrusions, foils
and alloy wheels.

      The company has a significant market share in all the segments in which it
operates. It enjoys a domestic market share of 42 per cent in primary aluminium, 63
per cent in rolled products, 20 per cent in extrusions, 44 per cent in foils and 31 per
cent in wheels.

      As a step towards expanding the market for value-added products and services,
Hindalco has launched several brands in recent years, which include Aura for alloy
wheels, Freshwrapp for kitchen foil and Everlast for roofing sheets. Our exclusive
showroom, The Aluminium Gallery, seeks to promote Hindalco products to its
21




      customers. It is a platform for the company to showcase quality products to a
quality audience in an appropriate ambience.

      The exhibits include products like windows, doors, furniture, ladder, roofing
sheets and ceiling and cladding panels.

      Hindalco's products are well received not only in the domestic market, but also in
the international market. The company's metal is accepted for delivery under the high
grade aluminium contract on the London Metal Exchange (LME). The company exports
about 17 percent of its total sales volume of aluminium.

      The company's alumina chemical business is a leader in manufacturing and
marketing of speciality alumina and alumina hydrate products in the country. It has a
major market share in the country. These speciality products find wide usage in
diversified industries including water treatment chemicals, refractories, ceramics,
cryolite, glass, fillers and plastics, conveyor belts and cables, among others. The
company also exports these alumina chemicals to over 30 countries covering North
America, Western Europe and the Asian region.

      Birla Copper, Hindalco's copper division at Dahej in Gujarat, enjoys a leadership
position in India, having built over 40 per cent of the                   domestic
market share within three years of its commissioning. It has              also    made
successful forays into the export markets of the Middle                   East,
Southeast Asia, China, Korea and Taiwan.

      The copper plant produces world-class copper                        cathodes,
continuous cast copper rods and precious metals. Sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid, di-
ammonium phosphate, other phosphatic fertilizers and phospho-gypsum are also
produced at this plant.
22


Hindalco Vision




     “To strength our position as a premium Aluminum company, sustaining, domestic
leadership and global competitiveness through innovation quality and value added
growth.”
23


Hindalco Mission

      “To pursue the creation of value for our customers, shareholders, employees and
society at large.”

Hindalco Values

      INTEGRETY: Honesty in every action.

      COMMITMENT: Doing whatever it takes to deliver, as promised.

      PASSION: Missionary zeal arising out of an emotional engagement with work.

      SEAMLESSNESS: Thinking and working together across functional silos,
hierarchy levels, business and geographies.

      SPEED: Responding to stockholders with a sense of       urgency.

                                   Hindalco Strategy

     EFFICIENCY FOCUS: To be one of the lowest cost producers globally.
     EFFECTIVENESS FOCUS: To continue to remain the market leader
      domestically.
     GROWTH FOCUS: To pursue value adding growth opportunities.
HINDALCO’S MARKETING VISION

      “To be a premium marketing organization sustaining domestic market leadership
and establishing global presence in each product category.”

HINDALCO’S MARKETING MISSION

      “To create value for our customers and profitable markets for Aluminium,
ensuring rapid and sustained long-term growth.”

HINDALCO POLICY

QUALITY POLICY
24




      We, at Hindalco, shall aim to achieve and sustain excellence in all our activity.

        We are committed to total customer satisfaction by providing products and
      services, which meet or exceed the customer, expectations.

        Modernization of the manufacturing facilities stress on technological
      innovation and training of employee at all level shall be a continuous process of
      Hindalco.

        A motivated workforce with a sense of pride in the organization shall us
      towards total quality.

SAFETY POLICY

      We at Hindalco value as our most importance resource and hence committed to
achieve health and safety. Excellence by providing healthy and safe working
environment our objective therefore, will be

      Use appropriate technology and other resources to upgrade safety standards.

      To continuously improve the working condition leading to prevention of
      accidents.

      Not only continue to comply with all the applicable laws and regulation but also
      strive to achieve beyond and set new standards.

      To continuously monitor and control work places hazard and project employees
      and community from them.
      To creation awareness and concern for safety amongst employees through
      active involvement participation continuous training etc.
ENVIRONMENT POLICY

      We at Hindalco Industries Ltd. are committed to resources conservation and
control of environmental aspect of our activities internally relating to production of
25


Alumina. Aluminium fabricated product and power generation at Renukoot in order to
serve the cause of sustainable development our objective therefore will be to




       Innovate and improve our process equipment operations maintenance and
     other practices continuously for population prevention.
       Adopt cleaner technologies wherever techno-Economically viable.
       Conserve key input resources such as bauxite caustic soda coal, power, water
     furnance oil and other oil.
       Keep exploring the flexibility of recycling and utilization of inevitable waste
     especially of water tube oil red mud fly ash.
     We shall make this policy available to all employee and public.

TPM-WCM POLICY

     Weat hindalco shall continuosly TPM-WCM practices as a key to optimization of
resource, and recognition as a world class company constantly aspiring to exceed the
ezception of all atakeholder.

     We shall:

    Involve all our people in the pursuit of efficient production system.

    Target zero accident, Zero breakdown, and Zero defect.

    Work vigorously for elimination of losses and wastage of resource.

    Promote process capability through innovation.

      Conserve energy and ensure healthy a green environment through pollution
     prevention and control.

    Be flexible, so as to meet the challenge of change through association
     assimilation and improvisation.
26



    Be a solutions provider-delivering optimum valve to our customers.
BOARD OF DIRECTOR

Non Executive Directors



     Mr. Kumar Mangalam Birla (chairman)

     Mrs. Rajashree Birla

     Mr. A. K. Agarwala

     Mr. E. B. Desai

     Mr. S.S. Kothari

     Mr. C. M. Maniar

     Mr. M. M. Bhagat

     Mr. K. N. Bhandari

     Mr. N. J. Jhaveri

Executive Director

     Mr.D.Bhattacharya

     Managing Director

RENUKOOT UNIT

      Mr. D. K. Kohly,

     Chief Operating Officer

     Mr. Ashok Machher, Joint President(F& C)

     Mr. G.M.Pandey,Joint President (Renusagar Power)
27


Chief financial officer

      Mr. S.talukdar

      (Group executive president &CFO)



Corporate-

      Mr.R.Ram, Senior president

      (project corporate)

      Mr. Pratik roy. (Chief people officer)

Advisors

      Mr.R.K. Kasiwal

      Mr.Amit Basu.

Key executives- (aluminium business)

      Mr.Shashi k. maudgal (chief marketing officer)

      Mr.R.S.Dhulkhed president

      Mr shanker roy president

      Mr S.M. Bhatia, president

Copper business

      Mr Dilip gaur(group executive president copper)

      Mr N.M. pathaik,

      Mr j.p.paliwal,( commercial president)

      Mr B.M. sharma (chief marketing officer copper)
28


                               Joint venture companies of Hindalco

         1.   Indo-gulf Fertilizers & chemicals Corpn Ltd.
         2.   Bihar Caustic & Chemicals Ltd.


         3.   Tanfac Industries Ltd.
         4.   Mangalore Refinery & Protochemicals Ltd.
         5.   Birla AT & T Communication Ltd.
         6.   Bina Power Supply Co. Ltd.
         7.   Birla Global Finance Ltd.
         8.   Birla Capital International AMC Ltd.
         9.   Century Enka.
Recent Awards won by Hindalco in Different fields.

        National Safety Award 2003:                                              By
Minister of Labor and Employment.

        Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award 2003:                          Joint award
winner of R.G.N.Q.A. 2003 in large –scale manufacturing category. The award is
instituted by Bureau of Indian Standard, Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Government of
India.

        CIOL Dataquest Award:
         For best performance in the pioneer category for 2004-05 by CIOL, an IT portal
         along with Dataquest Magazine.

        Green Tech Gold Award 2003-04:
         By Greentech Foundation, New Delhi for organizational Health & Safety.

        Qualtech Award 2004:                                                      For
Quality Management by Quimpro college, Mumbai.

        CII National Award:
29


     For Excellence in Energy Management-2004.

    Prime Minister’s Shram Award 2004:                              Shram    Veer
award to Mr. Ram Kailash of Aluminium plant won the Excellence Case Study
Presentation Award at NCQC, Mumbai in December 2004.


    National Energy Conservation Award 2004:
     In aluminium sector – Government of India, Ministry of Power.

    Aditya Birla Planet Award 2004:
     Jt. Winner of Aditya Birla Planet Award 2004 for community initiative & Rural
     Development Works.

    Our Mines Division has been reorganized by Indian Bureau of Mines,
     Government of India for A forestation; Plantation, waste Dump Management,
     Topsoil Management, Reclamation and Rehabilitation, Dust suppression
     Arrangement, Publicity & propaganda and overall Performance.

    Training & Development (HR) Practices 2004:
     Renusager Power has declared winner of Innovation Training & Development
     (HR) Practices 2004. Award given by Indian Society for Training & Development,
     New Delhi.

    Annual Greentech Safety Gold Award:
     Hindalco own the 4th Annual Greentech Safety Gold award for the year 2004-05
     in Metallurgy Sector. The award will be presented on 11th May 2005 at
     Hyderabad.

    National Award for Excellence in Energy Management 2005:
30


     Belure Sheet Plant received the National Award for Excellence in Energy
     Management 2005 (Energy Efficient Unite) from CII –Sohrabji Godrej Green
     Business Center.

         National Safety Award 2004:
     Owned by Renukoot Plant, given by the Ministry of Labor and Employment,
     Government of India.




    Vishkarma Rashtriya Puraskar:
     Awarded to Five workmen of our smelter, Mr. Rajesh Pal, Mr. A.K. Gupta, Mr.
     R.K. Singh, Mr. H.N. Singh, & Mr. S.K. Singh, given by the Ministry of Labor and
     Employment, Government of India.

    National Energy Conservation 2005:                                    Renukoot
     plant won the 1st Prize in Aluminium sector, given by Ministry of power,
     Government of India.
         ICWAI National Award for Excellence in Cost Management-2005:
     Hindalco was awarded by Institute of Cost and Works Accountants of India.

         “National Energy Conservation Award-2006”
     Hindalco was awarded by Ministry of Power, Government of India

         National Award for Excellence in Water Management 2006
     Hindalco, Renukoot has won the National Award for Excellence in Water
     Management 2006 organised by CII

         Quality Circle Forum of India Award
31


     The quality circle teams at Hindalco, Renukoot were adjudged winners in the live
     quiz competition organised by the Quality Circle Forum of India.

         Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award 2007
     Renukoot was selected for the Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award 2007 –
     Silver Trophy, presented by the Bureau of Indian Standards, in the large scale
     manufacturing (metallurgy) category

         National Award for Excellence in Water Management 2007".


     Hindalco awarded the CII-Sorabji Green Business Centre "National Award for
     Excellence in Water Management 2007".

         “D.L. Shah National Award for Economics of Quality”
     Hindalco won the prestigious “D.L. Shah National Award for Economics of
     Quality” given by quality council of India. Chief manufacturing officer, Mr. R. P.
     Shah and Mr. Arun Kumar received the award from the President of India, H.E.
     Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam on 9 February 2007 at New Delhi

         IT Competition 2008 Award By CII:
     Hindalco Hirakud Systems ranked runners up at the state level IT Competition
     2008 organised by CII in association with the department of informational
     technology, Government of Orissa.

         Greentech Safety Gold Award 2008:
     Greentech Safety Gold Award 2008 for outstanding achievement in safety
     management in coal based power sector
32




Above Figure Shows The Sales Revenue Of Aluminium Business

               SALES REVENUE OF ALUMINIUM BUSINESS



                CHEMICAL
                  10%
          FOIL&WHEEL
              8%                  PRIMARY           PRIMARY
          EXTRUSION                 37%             ROLLED
             9%                                     EXTRUSION
                                                    FOIL&WHEEL
                                                    CHEMICAL

                   ROLLED
                    36%




               IMPORTANT MILESTONES OF PROGRESS

YEAR      ACHIEVEMENTS

1958      Date of registration

1962      Aluminium production started.capacity20,000TPA
33


       Aluminium production started.capacity40,000TPA

1964   properzi wire rod mill commissioned.

1965   Aluminium production capacity expanded to 40,000TPA.

       Renusagar pawar plant commissioned with 65.7mw capacity.

       Aluminium production capacity expanded to 60,000TPA.

       Properi mll no.2,extrusion press 2&3.

1969        Aluminium production capacity      expanded to. 80000TPA



1972   Aluminium production capacity expanded to 95,000TPA.

1981   Aluminium production capacity expanded to 120,000TPA.

       Third generater at renusagar commissioned.

1886   Alumina production capacity expanded to 300,000.

1988   Conferm extrusion press commissioned.

1990   Continuous caster installed.

1991   Aluminiumproduction capacity expanded to 150,000TPA.

1993   Dave cold rolling mill commissioned.

1994   Aluminium production capacity expanded to 350,000TPA.

1996   Continuos ingot casting machine installed. Aluminiumproduction capacity
       expanded to 210,000TPA Wag stuff slab casing machne installed.

1997   Bliss hot & cold mill revamped.

       Co-generation power plant of 37 mu commissioned.

       Wag stuff billet casing machine commissioned.
34


             6th generator commissioned At Renusagar.

1998         Aluminium production capacity expanded to 242,000TPA.

              Aluminiumproduction capacity expanded to 450,000TPA.

              Aluminium fil production commenced at silvassa.

1996         wheel plant commissioned at silvassa.2001

1997         under brown field expansion of smelter, pot line 9 commisioned and
             aluminium production capacity expanded to 275, 000TPA



2002         brown field expansion of capitive power plant completed power production
             capacity enhanced by 160 mu .

2002         brown field expansion of alumina refinery completed.

2004         co generation power plant of 40 mu commissioned.

2005         HIndalco received the ICWAI national award for excellence              in cast
             management.

2006         In   may   the   company     singed       a   mow   wih   the   government   of
             Madhya Pradesh for setting up a green field aluminium smelter and a
             captive power plant.

2007         In may novelis become a Hindalco subsidery with the completion of the
             acquisition process.

ACHIVEMENTS:-

Recent awards won by Hindalco of labour and employment:-

    National safety award 2003 by ministry of labour and employment.
    Joint award winner of Rajive Gandhi national quality award 2003 in large scale
       manufacturing category. The award I sinstotuted by bureau of Indian standerds
       ministry of consumer affairs, govt. of India.
35



    CIOL Dataquest award for best performance in the pioneer category for 2004-2005
      by CIOL an IT portal along with dataquestr magazine.
    Green tech gold awad 2003-2004 by greentech foundation new delhi for
      organization health and safety.
    Qualtech award 2004 for quality management bu quimpro college.
    CLL national award for excellence in energy management 2004.
    Prime minister’s shram awards 2004 sharam veer award to mr.Ram kailash of
      alumina plant and Sharam shree award to Mr. Suresh Prasad of alumina plant.



    Quality circle shakti of reduction plan won the excellence case study presentation
      award at NCQC Mumbai in December 2004.
    National energy congervation award 2004 in aluminium sector government of
      India, ministry of power.
    Jt.winner of Aditya Birla planed award 2004 for commity initiative & rural
      development works.
    Our mines division has been recognized by Indian bureau of mines, govt of India
      for afforestation, plantation management publicityn and propaganda and overall
      performance.
    Renusagar power has declared winner of innovation training and development
      practice 2004 award givin by Indian society for training & development new delhi.
    Hindalco won the 4th annual greentech safety gold award for the year 2004-2005 in
      metallurgy sector. The award will be presented on the 11th may 2005 at
      hydarabad.
36




     COMPANY PROFILE
            INDUSTRY AT GLANCE
            ALUMINIUM
            COPPER
37




                             COMPANY PROFILE
INDUSTRY AT GLANCE

     Hindalco industry limited, a flagship company of ADITYA BIRLA group, with a
turnover of Rs.192,010.00 crore in 2007-08, ranks

     M vmd ndnvkl among India’s top 10 companies in terms of capital market
capitalization a non ferrous metal powerhouse Hindalco’s operations are organized into
two strategic business units –Aluminium and Copper. The company is an industry
leader in both these business.

ALUMINIUM

     Hindalco is Asia’s largest integrated primary producer of aluminium and among
the most cost efficient producers globally. In India, Hindalco enjoys a leadership
position for aluminium and downstream products.

     Synergies of operations with it’s wholly – owned subsidiary Indian aluminium
company Ltd. (Indal), have enhanced the company share in value addition segments,
in which the Hindalco – Indal combine has a market share of over 50 %.

     As a step towards expanding the market for value –added products and services,
Hindalco has launched several brands in past year –“Aura”, “Freshwrapp”, Everlast”,
and, “Al plant”. The company’s product range includes primary

     aluminium ingots, billets, wire rods, rolled products, extrusions, and foils and
alloy wheels.

     To enhance its capacities, the company had under taken Brownfield expansions,
leading to smelting capacity of 1,46,000 tpa, an alumina refining capacity of 4,50, 0000
tones, and captive power generation of 167.5MW.



     The company further enhanced the smelter capacity of 4, 29,140MT and alumina
refinery to 7, 00,000 tones, by streamlining to eliminate bottlenecks and
38




      installation of balancing equipment, including another co- generation plant. This
has facilitated optimization of expand facilities and, more importantly, has been
achieved within the original budget.

      Besides being a dominant player in the Indian aluminium market, Hindalco’s
products are well accepted in international markets. The company’s metal is accepted
for delivery under the high grade aluminium contract on the LME (London Metal
Exchange). The company’s export efforts have led to its reorganization as a “Star
Trading House”.

      Hindalco is an ISO 9001 company, and has been awarded the ISO
14001certification for its entire operations at Renukoot and Silvassa, including its
power plant and mines. It has received several awards from the export promotion
council as well as the government of India. With the completition of on going
Brownfield expansion, Hindalco will further consolidate its domestic market leadership,
and reach out to international markets in larger measure.

COPPER

       Birla copper enjoys leadership position in India, having built up-------percent
domestic market share with in three years of commissioning. It has also made
successful forays into the export markets of the Middle East, South East Asia, china
Korea and Taiwan.

      Birla copper has a mega green field copper smelting and refining complex at
dahej in the bharuch district of Gujarat, India. With an investment of Rs 1,850. Crore, it
is largest of its kind in India. The plant produces world- class copper cathodes,
continues cast copper rods and precious metals. Sulphuric acids, phosphoric acid, di-
39


        ammonium phosphate, other phosphatic fertilizers and phospho- gypsum are
also produced at this plant .

        Birla copper aspires to be among the world’s foremost cost competitive
producers of cooper. To reach this goal, it had under taken a brown field expansion
raising its smelter capacity from 65,000 tones per annum to 146000 tones per annum.
The copper division is evaluating a further expansion as well, so as to rank among the
top 10percent of cost competitive producer globally.

        To make birla copper an integrated producer of copper, the company believes
that upstream expansion through ownership in mines is important for a smelter of its
size.

        As a first step in this direction, birla copper acquired the nifty copper mines in
Australia. Nifty currently has a capacity of 25000 tones per year of copper cathodes,
with a large underdeveloped copper sulphide.




                PRODUCTION PROFILE
                                PRODUCTION PROCESS
                                EXTRACTION OF ALUMINA
                                FROM BAUXITE
                                EXTRACTION ALUMINIUM
                                FROM ALUMINA
40
41




                           PRODUCTION PROCESS
      The aluminum production process can be categorized into up stream and down
stream activities. The upstream process involves meaning and refining bauxite to
alumina while the downstream process involves smelting and casting and fabricating.

      Hindalco refines bauxite primarily obtained from captive mines, to extract
alumina, which is smelted into alumina ingots or billets. Hindalco smelts its entire
production of alumina into aluminum and does not engage in alumina trade.

Production of aluminum can be categories in two stages, namely

      • From bauxite to alumina

      • From alumina to aluminum

         EXTRACTION OF ALUMINA FROM BAUXITE

      Alumina is manufactured by conventional bayers process i.e. treating bauxite
with caustic soda. Bauxite is brought to the site from mines by means of railways
wagon tippler. Primary crushing is done in cone crusher where bauxite size is reduced
form 8”- 12” to 3” - 4” and then stockpiled. Secondary crushing is done by means of
hammer mills where process liquor known as a spent liquor and 600 psig. Seam is
mixed together. This solution of alumina from bauxite into caustic solution in the form
of sodium aluminates is carried out of digesters at 240 degrees centigrade temperature
and 36-kg/sq.cm pressures. The digested slurry is placed flashed and brought to
atmosphere pressure; flashed vapors are utilized for pre heating the spent liquor and
condensed returned to boiler hose for generation of steam. Digested flashed slurry is
pumped to clarification area for removal of solid Impurities (red mud). Red mud is
separated out, in solid liquid hydrocyclon and stellar. Separated mud slurry is washed
in counter current and washing Circuit without using water. Washed mud slurry is
cauterized by treating with lime slurry to recover soda. Cauterized mud slurry is filtered
on drum filters. Filtrate liquor is taken back into the system and red mud cake is
42


disposed off by means of dumpers Settler overflow pregnant liquor is filtered in Kelly
presses to remove fine mud particles. Clear pregnant liquor is pumped to precipitators
through plate heat exchanges after exchanging heat with the spent liquor where it is
seeded with alumina trihydrate. Alumina trihydrate is separated out in thickness and
pan filter. Alumina trihydrate cake thus obtained is fed into the gas suspension calciner
where furnace oil is burnt for calcining alumina. The reduction grade alumina thus
produced is transported to smelter plant.

     Spent liquor generated and separated from precipitation circuit is fed to the
evaporation unit for increasing caustic concentration to the desired level and
recirculated to digesters through heaters for further processing of bauxite and thus the
process goes on.

         EXTRACTION OF ALUMINUM FROM ALUMINA

     Alumina from alumina plant is conveyed to the reduction plant. The reduction
plant has 11 prebaked pot – lines which have 1278 pot cells. Each pot has 24/26
carbon anodes and it is lined with carbon cathode. Alumina is converted to metallic
aluminum is these pot cells by the standard “hall heroult” process. The pot cells work at
an average 4.3-volt D. C. current of 5800/6300 amperes. Electrolysis of the alumina
takes place in molten bath of cryolte at a temperature of 955 to 960 degrees
centigrade. The molten aluminum that collects at the cathodes is siphoned into
crucibles periodically. The entire process is controlled by microprocessor system.
43




     PRODUCT PROFILE
            PRODUCT OVERVIEW
            ALUMINIUM
            COPPER
            PRIMARY ALUMINIUM
            PRODUCTS
            INTEGRATED OPERATION
            OF HINDALCO
            PRODUCTION CAPACITY
44



                              PRODUCT OVERVIEW
      Hindalco operations are organized into two strategic business units- aluminum
and copper. The company is an industry leader in both these businesses.

ALUMINUM
      Hindalco’s Aluminum business comprises primary aluminum, extrusions, rolled
products, foils and alloy wheels. In the value-added segment, hindalco, along with its
subsidiary Indal, has a 50 percent market share. In the past year, hindalco has
launched several brands – “Aura”, Freshwrapp”, “Everlast”, “Permashield”, and, Al
Planet”.

COPPER
      BIRLA copper, with an over 45 per cent market share, is India leading copper
producer in private sector. Its plant at dahej in Gujarat, produces world class copper
cathodes, continuous cast copper rods and precious metals.

      A part form copper products, euphoric acid, phosphoric acid, di-ammonium
phosphate, other phosphates fertilizers and phosphor –gypsum are also produced at
this plant.

PRIMARY ALUMINIUM PRODUCTS

          INGOTS:



          Is an LME                     (London Metal Exchange) registered brand.
      These are also known as virgin metal. These are used as raw material for
      making aluminium product.
          ROUND BILLETS:

      These are use for making                           extrusion.

             CAST SLABS:
                        Slabs are used input in Hot Rolling Mill, which is converted into
thinner sheets, plates or coils.
45


SEMI FABRICATED PRODUCTS:

     Hindalco produces 900 different rolled product items of which 40 are standard.

           HOT ROLLED PRODUCTS:
            These are the product which are used after the process of hot rolling
according to their specification and requirements, these products are as follows:
     1.       Hot rolled plates electrical application
     2.       Hot rolled wire.
                      COLD ROLLED PRODUCT.
     (plane sheets)

     (Cold rolled coil)

     3.       Circle
     4.       checkered sheet
     5.       alkaloid sheets.
EXTRUSIONS
     Hindalco extrusions offer an enormous range of                          shapes,
wide range of alloys for decorative, structural and functional
application. The present die catalogue included over one                     thousand
die for various sections and we are fuy equipped to design                   and make
new die as per exclusive requirement. Some of the common shapes are as follows:

           ROD, BAR-Flat, Square, Hexagonal
           STRUCTURAL SHAPES-Angles, Channels, Tee, I-beans, H sections etc.
           TUBES-Round, Oval, Square, Rectangular, Triangular
           MOUDINGS
     FOIL

           Cable Rape stock
           Light Gauge Foil
           Bare & Coated Fine stock
46



                    Collapsible insulation Ducts
            ALLOY WHEELS

                    12 to 18 inch diameters.
                     OTHERS: The main by products of the process included

                    VANADIUM SLUDGE
                    GALLIUM

                     INTEGRATED OPERATION OF HINDALCO


                                                  S                                           DA
                                             M INE                                         SO
                                       ITE                                         ST   IC
                              UX                                                CA
                           BA

                                                             RY
                                                       EF INA                                      INI
                                                                                                      UM
                                                     AR                                         M
                                           M    IN                                           ALU IDE
                                       ALU                                                    FLU
                                                                                                  R

                                                                     ER                                              ESS
                                                                                                                   OC
                                                                 ELT                                           NP
                                                                                                                 R
                                                               SM                                        SIO
                                                        UM                                            TRU
                                                    MINI                                           EX

                ON                              ALU
          ER ATI
     EN                                                                               T
 O-G                                                                            P LA N
C                                                                          ON
                                                                     ATI
                                                                 BRIC
                               E   R                         IFA
                          P OW                           SEM
                     AR
              SAG                                                                                                                      EL
        RENU                                                                          LL                                             HE
              NT                                                                   MI                                              W
         P LA                                                             IN     G                                            UM
                                                                      OLL                                                M INI
                                     LLS                             R
                                                                                                                      ALU T
                                 D MI                                                                                      N
                               RO                                                                                      PLA
                    R     AW
                RED
                                                                                        IL   S
                                                                                     FO
47




                       PRODUCTION CAPACITY
ALUMINA
     CAPACITY 12, 30,000TPA

           RENUKOOT    700,000TPA
           BELGAUM     350,000TPA
           MURI        180,000TPA
SMELTER (PRIMARY ALUMINIUM)

          CAPACITY 5, 59,000TPA

         RENUKOOT 375,000TPA
         HIRAKUND 1,43,000TPA
         ALPURAM  14,000TPA
         TALOJA      25000TPA
         BELGUAUM 2000TPA
48


ROLLED PRODUCTS

       CAPACITY 2, 37,000TPA

           RENUKOOT           100,000TPA
           BELUR               57,000TPA
           TALOJA              50,000TPA
           MOUDA              30,000TPA
FOIL

       CAPACITY 40,000TPA

          SILVASA 30,000TPA
          KALWA 6,000TPA
          KOLLAR 4,000TPA
       EXTRUSIONS

       CAPACITY 46,000TPA

          RENUKOOT 33,000TPA
          ALPURAM  13,000TPA
       ALLOY WHEELS

       CAPACITY 3,00,000 pcs. PA

          SILVASA 3,00,000 pcs.
       CAPATIVE POWER

            CAPACITY 1188MW

          RENUSAGAR 742MW
          RENUKOOT   78MW
          HIRAKUD   368MW
49




       Organizational Profile of Hindalco Industries Limited
Hindalco Industries Limited, a Non-ferrous Metal powerhouse, is the flagship company of the Aditya

Birla Group.

Hindalco is one of India’s producers of Aluminium. The company was incorporated on December 15,

1958 and commenced production in 1962 with an initial smelting capacity of 20,000 TPA. The

company has sales and distribution network that covers all of India and includes five sales offices

located in Mumbai, New Delhi, Bangalore, Chennai and Renukoot.

In India Hindalco enjoys a leadership position in Aluminium and Copper. All of the Hindalco’s units

are ISO 9001:2000, ISO 14001:2004 and several have attained the OHSAS 18001— the

occupational health and safety certification. On the export front, the company has been accorded a

Trading House status by the Indian government.

Both in Aluminium and Copper, Hindalco is the largest Company in India. The company’s Aluminium

product range includes Primary Aluminium Ingots, Billets, Rolling Slabs, Redraw Roads, Alloy Wire

Rods, Flat Rolled Products, Extruded Profiles, Foils and Alloy Wheels.

Hindalco is the largest manufacturer of the entire range of flat rolled products in India. Hindalco’s

domestic market share in Flat Rolled Products is nearly 60% and its rolled products are widely used

in various segments such as packaging, transportation, building and construction, electrical, defense

and general engineering applications. Hindalco is registered as a star Trading House. About 35% of

Flat Rolled Products are exported to more than 50 countries.
50


The company's commitment to quality and service along with its extensive infrastructure has made

Hindalco a prime source for best-selling brands. Continuous improvements in manufacturing,

processes, practices and systems ensure that customers' needs and expectations are fully met.

Efficiency and product quality are ensured by using state-of-the-art equipment and a strong research

and development set-up, supported by dedicated and motivated employees and the Oracle ERP

system.

Wag staff Air Slip™ slab casting technology is used to ensure consistent quality and surface finish of

stock feed, which in turn ensures quality, finished products. The company's capacity in flat rolled

products at present is 2,30,000 tonne per annum and new plans are being implemented to increase

the manufacturing capacity Of the total production of Hindalco's flat rolled products, around 40 per

cent is exported and customers in more than 50 countries are using the products.

Ever last, a Hindalco brand for aluminium-roofing sheets, offers ideal and economical solutions for all

roofing and cladding needs. Hindalco also offers colour-coated and tiled roofing profiles.

Hindalco is one of Asia's largest producers of primary aluminium and one of the most cost-efficient

producers globally. In India, Hindalco enjoys a leadership position in specialty alumina, primary

aluminium and downstream products

The company's integrated complex at Renukoot houses an alumina refinery, aluminium smelter and

facilities for production of semi-fabricated products. Power is sourced from the company's captive

power plant at Renusagar, located at a distance of about 45 km from Renukoot. It has a captive

capacity                   of      820.2 mw.

Besides the integrated complex at Renukoot, Hindalco's other manufacturing facilities are situated at

locations across the country. While the captive bauxite mines are located in western and eastern

India, the alumina refineries are located in Belgaum in southern India and Muri in eastern India.

Smelters are located at Hirakud, Orissa, with a captive power plant and coal mines, and at Alupuram,

Kerala. Rolled product manufacturing facilities are located at Belur and Taloja, and an extrusion plant
51


is situated at Alupuram. Foil plants are based in the Union Territory of Silvassa and in Kalwa,

Maharashtra. The foil plant at Kollur, Andhra Pradesh is the only remaining entity with the erstwhile

Indal after the merger of Indal with Hindalco. The wheel plant of Hindalco is also located at Silvassa.

The company has two R&D centres: the Belgaum Research and Development Centre in Belgaum,

Karnataka and Taloja Research and Development Centre in Taloja, Maharashtra. They have been

recognized by the Government of India's Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR).

Hindalco is a leading domestic player in two non-ferrous metals business segments- Aluminium and

Copper.

The Aluminium division's product range includes alumina chemicals, primary Aluminium ingots and

billets, wire rods, rolled products, extrusions, foils and alloy wheels.

The company has a significant market share in all the segments in which it operates. It enjoys a

domestic market share of 42 per cent in primary aluminium, 63 per cent in rolled products, 20 per

cent in extrusions, 44 per cent in foils and 31 per cent in wheels.

As a step towards expanding the market for value-added products and services, Hindalco has

launched several brands in recent years, which include Aura for alloy wheels, Freshwrapp for kitchen

foil and Ever last for roofing sheets. Our exclusive showroom, The Aluminium Gallery, seeks to

promote Hindalco products to its customers. It is a platform for the company to showcase quality

products to a quality audience in an appropriate ambience. The exhibits include products like

windows, doors, furniture, ladder, roofing sheets and ceiling and cladding panels.

Hindalco's products are well received not only in the domestic market, but also in the international

market. The company's metal is accepted for delivery under the high-grade aluminium contract on the

London Metal Exchange (LME). The company exports about 17% of its total sales volume of

Aluminium.

The company's alumina chemical business is a leader in manufacturing and marketing of speciality

alumina and alumina hydrate products in the country. It has a market share of 90 per cent in the
52


country. These speciality products find wide usage in diversified industries including water treatment

chemicals, refractories, ceramics, cryolite, glass, fillers and plastics, conveyor belts and cables,

among others. The company also exports these alumina chemicals to over 30 countries covering

North America, Western Europe and the Asian region.

Birla Copper, Hindalco's copper division at Dahej in Gujarat, enjoys a leadership position in India,
having built over 40 per cent of the domestic market share within three years of its commissioning. It
has also made successful forays into the export markets of the Middle East, Southeast Asia, China,
Korea and Taiwan.

The copper plant produces world-class copper cathodes, continuous cast copper rods and precious

metals. Sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid, di-ammonium phosphate, other phosphatic fertilizers and

phospho-gypsum are also produced at this plant.


                       Products and Brands of HINDALCO




        Key Products and                    Locations                    Capacities         Country
             Brands
     Hindalco Industries Ltd.

     Alumina Chemicals          Renukoot (Uttar Pradesh),                  1,160,000 tpa      India
                                Muri (Jharkhand), Belgaum
                                (Karnataka)

     Primary Aluminium          Renukoot, Hirakud (Orissa),                  489,000 tpa
                                Taloja

     Extrusions                 Renukoot, Alupuram                            27,700 tpa

     Rolled Products            Belur (West Bengal), Taloja                  200,000 tpa
                                (Maharashtra), Renukoot, Mauda
                                (Maharashtra)

     Wire Rods                  Renukoot, Alupuram (Kerala)                   64,400 tpa
53


       Aluminium Foil                   Silvassa (Dadra & Nagar Haveli),             11,000 tpa
                                        Kalwa (Maharashtra)

       Aluminium Wheels                 Silvassa (Dadra & Nagar Haveli)             300,000 pcs

       For Taloja recycling plant

       Indal (subsidiary of Hindalco)

       Foil Rolling                     Kollur (Andhra Pradesh)                        4,000 tpa




      Key Products and Brands                          Locations                      Capacities          Country
     Birla Copper (Hindalco Industries Ltd.)
     Copper Cathodes                      Dahej (Gujarat)                                   500,000 tpa       India
     Continuous Cast Copper Rods                                                             97,200 tpa
     Sulphuric Acid                                                                     1,670,000 tpa
     Phosphoric Acid                                                                        180,000 tpa
     Gold (Birla Gold)                                                                           15 mt
     Silver (Birla Silver)                                                                      150 mt
     Power                                                                                     135 mw
     DAP and Complexes (Birla                                                               400,000 tpa
     Balwan)
     Hindalco Industries Ltd. (Aditya Birla Minerals Resources Pty. Ltd.)
     Copper Cathodes                    Nifty mines                                          25,000 tpa      Australia
     Copper in concentrate                Mt. Gordon mines                                   40,000 tpa      Australia
     Power                                Mt. Gordon mines                                       28 mw       Australia




               Key Products and Brands                             Capacities                      Country

     Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd (Hi-Tech Carbon)

     Carbon Black            Birla Carbon                                   2,30,000 mtpa            India
54


     Thai Carbon Black Co. Ltd.

     Carbon Black             Birla Carbon                               220,000 mtpa         Thailand

     Alexandria Carbon Co. S.A.E

     Carbon Black             Birla Carbon                               285,000 mtpa          Egypt

     Liaoning Birla Carbon Co. Ltd.

     Carbon Black             Birla Carbon                               55,000 mtpa           China




                  Key Products and Brands                             Capacities               Country
     Grasim Industries Ltd.
     White Cement                            Birla White                        475,000 tpa      India
     Grey Cement                             UltraTech                         13.12 mn tpa
                                             Cement (formerly
                                             Birla Plus), Birla
                                             Super

     Shree Digvijay
     Grey Cement                             Kamal                              1.08 mn tpa
     UltraTech Cement Ltd.
     Ordinary Portland Cement,                                                   17 mn tpa
     Portland Blast Furnace Slag
     Cement, Portland Pozzolana
     Cement and Grey Portland
     Cement




                Key Products and Brands                           Capacities                  Country
     Indo Gulf Fertilizers Ltd.
     Urea                    Birla Shaktiman                               864,600 mt          India
     Birla Copper (Hindalco Industries Ltd.)
     DAP/NPK                 Birla Balwan                                 400,000 tpa          India
     Complexes
55




              Key Products and Brands                    Capacities              Country
     Aditya Birla Insulators
     Insulators                                                    38,800 tpa      India




                  Key Products and Brands                 Capacities             Country
     Pulp
     Grasim Industries Ltd.
     Rayon Grade Pulp                                              70,000 tpa      India
     AV Cell Inc.
     Softwood / Hardwood Pulp                                     122,500 tpa    Canada
     AV Nackawic Inc.
     Dissolving Pulp                                              189,000 tpa    Canada
     Fibre
     Grasim Industries Ltd.
     Viscose Staple Fibre        Birla Viscose                    270,100 tpa      India
     (VSF)
     Thai Rayon Public Company Ltd.
     VSF                         Birla Viscose                    110,000 tpa    Thailand
     PT Indo Bharat Rayon
     VSF                         Birla Viscose                    155,000 tpa    Indonesia
     Thai Acrylic Fibre
     Acrylic Fibre               Texlan                           100,000 tpa    Thailand
     Alexandria Fiber Company, S.A.E
     Acrylic Fibre                                                 18,000 tpa     Egypt
     Yarn
     Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.
     Viscose Filament Yarn       Ray One                           16,400 tpa      India
     Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. (Jaya Shree Textiles)
     Flax Yarns                                               15,340 spindles      India
     Worsted Yarns                                            25,548 spindles
     PT Indo Liberty Textiles
     Rayon Yarn, Polyester,                               45,120 ring spindles   Indonesia
     Blended Yarn
     PT Elegant Textile Industry
     Rayon, Polyester,                                       168,088 spindles    Indonesia
     Rayon-Polyester
     Blended Spun Yarn
     PT Sunrise Bumi Textiles
     Viscose Rayon, Polyester Viscose, Spun Polyester,        89,376 spindles    Indonesia
     Polyester Combed Cotton, Anti Pill Yarn, Sewing
     Thread, High Twist Yarn, Reverse Twist Yarn,
56


     Flame Retardant Yarn, Rayon Cotton Blended
     Yarn, Micro Denier Polyester Rayon Yarn, Rayon
     Silk Yarn, Slub Yarn, Lycra Core Spun Yarn
     Indo Phil Acrylic Manufacturing Corporation
     High Bulk Acrylic Dyed Yarn, Non-bulk Acrylic Dyed            3,700 mtpa     Philippines
     Yarn
     Indo Phil Textiles Mills Inc
     Poly Viscose Blended Yarn, Poly Cotton Blended               13,500 mtpa     Philippines
     Yarn, Polyester Yarn
     Indo Phil Cotton Mills Inc
     Cotton Yarn                                                  10,000 mtpa     Philippines
     Indo Thai Synthetics Co. Ltd.
     Synthetic Yarns                                           98,568 spindles     Thailand

     Fabrics
     Grasim Industries Ltd.
     Fabric -Polyester, Viscose, Silk and Wool Blends                146 looms       India
     Uncrushables, Ice Touch, Purista, and Clean Fab          18 million meters
     Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.
     Pure Linen and Linen        Linen Club                         107 looms        India
     Blends
     Flame Retardent Fabrics Pyroguard
     Branded apparel
     Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. (Madura Garments)
     Ready-to-wear               Louis Philippe,                                     India
     Garments                    Allen Solly
                                 Van Heusen, Peter
                                 England




              Key Products and Brands                     Capacities               Country


     Grasim Industries Ltd. (Vikram Ispat)


     Sponge Iron (HBI & DRI)                                       900,000 tpa       India




              Key Products and Brands                     Capacities               Country
57


     Essel Mining & Industries Ltd


     Iron and Manganese ore                                   15 million tons    India




              Key Products and Brands                   Capacities              Country
     Grasim Industries Ltd.
     Caustic Soda                                               258,000 tpa      India
     Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.
     Caustic Soda                                               82,125 tpa       India
     Liquid Chlorine                                            50,340 tpa
     Hydrochloric Acid                                           5,475 tpa
     Tanfac Industries Ltd.
     Aluminium Fluoride                                          17,000 tpa      India
     Hydrofluoric Acid                                           17,000 tpa
     Bihar Caustic and Chemicals Ltd.
     Caustic Soda Lye                                             92,750 mt      India
     Liquid Chlorine                                              65,785 mt
     Hydrochloric Acid                                            29,040 mt
     Sodium Hypochlorite                                           1,800 mt
     Compressed Hydrogen                                      17,42,400 nm3
     Aluminium Chloride                                           12000 tpa
     Captive Power Plant                                             30 mw
     Aditya Birla Chemicals (Thailand) Ltd.
     Sodium Triployphosphates,       Polyphos                                   Thailand
     Tetrasodium Pyrophosphate,      Epotec
     sodium Hexametaphosphate, Birlasulf-SS,
     Sodium Acid Pyrophosphate,      Birlasulf-SM,
     Monosodium Phosphate,           Birlasol 35
     Disodium Phosphate,
     Trisodium Phosphate,
     Speciality Phosphates

     Epoxy Resins (bis-a and bis-
     f), Diluents, Curing Agents
     and Allied Products

     Sodium Sulphite, Sodium
     Metabisulphite,
     Sodium Bisulphite
     Epichlorohydrin
     Caustic Soda
     Chlorine
     Thai Peroxide Co. Ltd.
     Hydrogen Peroxide, Peracetic    Encare, Ecare,            15,000 mtpa      Thailand
     Acid, Calcium Peroxide          Aqua-x,
                                     Birlox 5, Birlox
58


                                       12, Ocare
     PT. Indo Raya Kimia
     Carbon Disulfide                                                           50,000 tpa         Indonesia


                Key Products and Brands                             Capacities                    Country

     Pan Century Surfactants Inc.


     Fatty Acids                                                              55000 mtpa          Philippines

     Fatty Alcohol                                                            30000 mtpa

     Glycerin                                                                  6500 mtpa




                Key Products and Brands                               Capacities                    Country


     PSI Data Systems Ltd. (subsidiary of Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.)


     IT Solutions (Banking, Finance and Insurance)                                                    India




                Key Products and Brands                              Capacities                     Country


     Aditya Birla Minacs Worldwide Limited (subsidiary of Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.)


     BPO / ITES                                                                     9,089 seats       India
59




               Key Products and Brands                          Capacities                Country
     Birla Global Finance Company Ltd.
     Financial Services                                                                    India
     Birla Sun Life Insurance Company Ltd.
     Insurance Solutions                                                                   India
     Birla Sun Life Asset Management Company Ltd.
     Mutual Funds                                                                          India
     Birla Sun Life Distribution Company Ltd.
     Investment Planning Services                                                          India
     Birla Insurance Advisory Services Ltd.
     Non-life Insurance Advisory Services                                                  India




              Key Products and Brands                           Capacities                Country

 Idea Cellular

 Cellular Services                     Idea                  21 million subscriber base    India




              Key Products and Brands                           Capacities                Country

 Aditya Birla Retail Limited


 Multi-format Stores                          More                   170 retail outlets    India


 Sources: Through the website www.hindalco.com/www.adityabirla.com
60



                                       Hindalco Product Range
     1) -

                                                  2) -                                3) -
                                                          4) -                 5) -




Primary Aluminium     Alloy ingots                                                           Billets
                 Slab                                            Aluminium sheet
    Ingots

                                6) -                 7) -                                      8) -
9) -                   10) -




     Wire rods sheet                   Circle

             Alloy Wheel               Watch             Blister Pack

     11) -                     12) -


                                                         13) -


                                           14)-




       Ladder                                                                         Door


                                Handle

                                 Can
61



 Hindalco Products
•        Everlast aluminium roofing sheets

•        Freshwrapp aluminium foil

•        Freshpakk semi-rigid containers

•        Permashield waterproofing

•        Aluminium foil

•        Aura alloy wheels

•        Hindalco extrusions

             FLAT ROLLED PRODUCTS (FRPs) Of HINDALCO

Hindalco is the world's largest aluminium rolling company with the acquisition of Novelis, the global

leader in value-added high-end aluminium flat rolled products and

aluminium can recycling. The combined volume of sales of flat rolled

products in the world market is about 3 million tonnes and the            market
                                                                                   Hindalco is now world
       share is       more than     20     percent.                                No.1 in aluminium flat
                                                                                   rolled products
Hindalco is the largest manufacturer of the entire range of flat rolled

products in India. It enjoys nearly 60 per cent of market share and its rolled

products are widely used in various segments such as packaging, transportation, building and

construction, electrical, defence and general engineering applications.

The company's commitment to quality and service along with its extensive infrastructure has made

Hindalco a prime source for best-selling brands. Continuous improvements in manufacturing,

processes, practices and systems ensure that customers' needs and expectations are fully met.

Efficiency and product quality are ensured by using state-of-the-art equipment and a strong research

and development set-up, supported by dedicated and motivated employees and the Oracle ERP

system. Wagstaff Air Slip™ slab casting technology is used to ensure consistent quality and surface
62


finish of stock feed which in turn ensures quality finished products. The company's capacity in flat

rolled products at present is 2, 00,000 tonnes per annum and new plans are being implemented to

increase the manufacturing capacity.




Of the total production of Hindalco's flat rolled products, around 40 per cent is exported and
customers in more than 50 countries are using the products.

Everlast, a Hindalco brand for aluminium roofing sheets, offers ideal and economical solutions for all
roofing and cladding needs. Colour-coated and tiled roofing profiles are also offered by Hindalco.

                         Types of Flat Rolled Products (Export)
Basically, there are three kinds of Flat Rolled Products (FRPs) which is being exported by Hindalco
i.e.
       1. Cold rolled Coils
       2. Cold rolled Sheets
       3. Circles


Cold Rolled Coils
Hindalco's cold rolled coils are precision-finished to match international

standards. They have good shape, high tolerance, versatility and

blemish-free surfaces. They are used in commercial and general

engineering applications such as bus bodies, cladding and fan blades.

The company meets the demands of its ever-growing clientele with

continuous upgrades and process improvement.


Cold Rolled Sheets
63




    Hindalco's cold rolled sheets are precision-finished to match international standards for tight

    thickness, tolerance, flatness and dimensional accuracy. Sound metallurgical properties for further

    fabrication, anodizing characteristics and a blemish-free surface make it useful in both commercial

    and general engineering applications.


    Circles
    Hindalco offers circles, also known as flat circular sheets, in a variety of diameters and thickness to




    meet specific needs. Extensively used in the manufacture of pressure cookers, non-stick cookware,

    coated cookware, cans, etc they have earned the trust of many leading brands.

    Continuous upgrades and improvement of processes enable the company to keep pace with the

    demands of its ever-growing clientele.




•   Major Aluminium Producer Industries in India.



         Company             Ownership              Location              Capacity

         Hindalco            AB Group               Renukoot              345,000
64


                                              Alpuram            14,000

                                              Hirakud            65,000

                                              Belgaum            31,000

         NALCO             Public Sect.       Angul              345,000

         BALCO             Sterlight          Korba              350,000

         MALCO             Sterlight          Mettur             40,000




•   EXTRUSIONS CAPACITY, PRODUCTION & DEMAND 1991-2020(MT)



    Particulars   91-92        99-00      03-04         2010      2020

    Capacity      122000       190000     202000        202000    400000

    Production    61000        109000     132000        188000    370000

    Domestic      60000        105000     117000        166000    325000
    Demand

    Export        Nil          4000       15000         22000     45000

    Excess        62000        81000      70000         14000     30000
    Capacity




    • Product segment of Hindalco
65




•    World Consumption & Consumption growth%




What is International Marketing?
International marketing is simply the application of marketing principles to more than one country. However,

there is a crossover between what is commonly expressed as international marketing and global marketing,
66


which is a similar term. For the purposes of this lesson on international marketing and those that follow it,

international marketing and global marketing are interchangeable.

The intersection is the result of the process of internationalisation. Many American and European authors see

international marketing as a simple extension of exporting, whereby the marketing mix is simply adapted in

some way to take into account differences in consumers and segments. It then follows that global marketing

takes a more standardized approach to world markets and focuses upon sameness, in other words the similarities

in consumers and segments.

“At its simplest level, international marketing involves the firm in making one or more marketing mix decisions
across national boundaries. At its most complex level, it involves the firm in establishing manufacturing
facilities overseas and coordinating marketing strategies across the globe.”
                                                                                      Doole and Lowe (2001)

International Marketing is the performance of business activities that direct the flow of a company's goods and

services to consumers or users in more than one nation for a profit. International marketing is the application of

marketing orientation and marketing capabilities to international business.

If the exporting departments are becoming successful but the costs of doing business from headquarters plus

time differences, language barriers, and cultural ignorance are hindering the company’s competitiveness in the

foreign market, then offices could be built in the foreign countries. Sometimes companies buy firms in the

foreign countries to take advantage of relationships, storefronts, factories, and personnel already in place. These

offices still report to headquarters in the home market but most of the marketing mix decisions are made in the

individual countries since that staff is the most knowledgeable about the target markets. Local product

development is based on the needs of local customers. These marketers are considered polycentric because they

acknowledge that each market/country has different needs.


What is Global Marketing?
Global marketing refers to marketing activities coordinated and integrated across multiple country markets.
                                                                                    Johansson (2000)
Global/transnational marketing focuses upon leveraging a company's assets, experience and products globally

and upon adapting to what is truly unique and different in each country.
67


The Oxford University Press defines global marketing as “marketing on a worldwide scale reconciling or taking

commercial advantage of global operational differences, similarities and opportunities in order to meet global

objectives.”

When a company becomes a global marketer, it views the world as one market and creates products that will

only require weeks to fit into any regional marketplace. Marketing decisions are made by consulting with

marketers in all the countries that will be affected. The goal is to sell the same thing the same way everywhere.


             Global marketing: Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages
•    Economies of scale in production and distribution
•    Lower marketing costs
•    Power and scope
•    Consistency in brand image
•    Ability to leverage good ideas quickly and efficiently
•    Uniformity of marketing practices
•    Helps to establish relationships outside of the "political arena"
•       Helps to encourage ancillary industries to be set up to cater for the needs of the global player


Disadvantages
•    Differences in consumer needs, wants, and usage patterns for products
•    Differences in consumer response to marketing mix elements
•    Differences in brand and product development and the competitive environment
•    Differences in the legal environment, some of which may conflict with those of the home market
•    Differences in the institutions available, some of which may call for the creation
•    Differences in the institutions available, some of which may call for the creation of entirely new ones
•    Differences in administrative procedures
•    Differences in product placement.
What is Export?
Export is the provision of goods, services or knowledge across national and international boundaries.

Australia offers a wide range of goods and services to the world's markets. Export products include

manufactures, computer software, business consultancies, education services and technology transfer.

Exporting of goods from Australia is controlled by laws and government policies. Goods may not be exported

unless all the necessary export permits have been obtained from the relevant agency. The federal, state and
68


territory governments provide a wide range of services to new exporters including advice and information about

getting into exporting and assistance on the ground in foreign markets.



                                          Types of Export
Export is divided into two main types: direct and indirect exports

Direct exports
Direct exports are transactions where exporters enter into direct relationships with importers overseas and
negotiate a contract for the sale of goods and services. Alternatively, exporters may use a commission agent in
the overseas market to solicit orders and generally represent the exporter's interests. The agent is paid by means
of a commission on the value of orders obtained.

Indirect exports
Indirect exports are transactions arranged in Australia through local merchants or the Australian-based branch
of an overseas company. Sales are negotiated with a trader in the exporter's country with payment made in local
currency from the trader's office.
For example, a Japanese trading house in Victoria arranges the contract for the supply of a particular product for
the Japanese market. In such cases, payment will probably be made in Australian dollars.


                                     The Benefits of Export
The benefits of exporting products and/or services include:

Development of Additional Sales
For most companies, exporting is a logical way of expanding sales when the domestic market has been fully
developed.

Optimizing Prices
We may be able to achieve a much higher price for exported goods than is possible on the domestic market.

Maximizing Resources
Expansion into overseas markets can be an excellent way of increasing production with corresponding

economies of scale in plant utilization and raw material purchases.

Levelling Seasonal Demand
69


Marketing internationally, especially in both northern and southern hemispheres, can achieve an overall

levelling of seasonal demand for products like summer and winter clothing, sports equipment, heating and

cooling equipment etc.

Distribution of Market Risk
A company can protect itself from the risk of a downturn in any one particular market by operating in a number

of different markets, both domestic and overseas.

Increased Competitive Advantage
An improvement in product and service will usually flow from exposure to international competition. This in

turn will lead to an increased competitive advantage in both the international and domestic areas.

Improved Morale
Being part of an internationally successful company will boost staff morale, particularly if the contribution of

all staff members is recognized as an integral part of the company's international success.

Capitalization of A Unique Product or Technology
A unique product, service or technology that's difficult to sell on the domestic market may be easier to sell

overseas.

A Proactive Measure to Combat Foreign Competition
It's possible to neutralize overseas competitors in the domestic market by exporting to the overseas competitor's

market.

                                      The Risks From Export
It is not possible to eliminate risk from export transactions. The development of export markets must be

regarded as a long-term investment and companies should not expect an immediate return on the time and

capital they invest. Banks, accountants, export consultants and government agencies can advise on ways of

minimizing financial risks and exporters are encouraged to use external advice to supplement their own skill

base.

A risk management strategy developed as part of exporter export business plan will help identify risks to your

export business and provide a strategy to minimise and handle those risks should they occur.
70


There are a number of different types of risks that exporter should consider, including:
     •   Financial

     •   Intellectual property

     •   Increased insurance claims

     •   Inadequate resources


 Financial risks
A. Failure to Pay
Be aware that there's a series of international payment terms ranging from totally secure (exporter paid before

goods are dispatched) to minimum security (exporter send the goods and wait for payment). Which particular

term is used is negotiable between the buyer and seller when entering into a contract.


B. Cash Flow

Export will have a significant effect on the cash flow cycle of exporter business. It's not always possible to

negotiate payment in advance of or immediately after shipment. This may lead to a considerable delay in

receiving payment for goods and result in a cash flow problem. Alternatively, if favourable terms are available,

export can have a very positive effect on the cash flow cycle.

C. Foreign Currency Risk
If export contracts are written in foreign currencies, fluctuations in rates of exchange can result in financial loss.

This risk can be avoided by quoting in Australian dollars or, if this isn't acceptable to the overseas buyer, by

taking forward exchange cover with the bank.

D. Inadequate Working Capital
Exporters may need additional working capital to purchase the raw materials and other components they require

to produce goods for export. Access to adequate pre-shipment finance is crucial to export success. There are

risks involved in over-borrowing and firms must ensure that they can fully service the additional borrowings

export may entail.
71



 Intellectual Property
Inexperienced exporters are vulnerable to the risk of losing intellectual property. The legal systems in some

countries do not afford the same level of protection for intellectual property rights, as does the Australian

system.

The cost of patenting a product or registering a trademark internationally can be substantial, as can the defence

of patents or trademarks if they are infringed.

Exporters should also ensure that their product does not infringe the intellectual property rights of other

companies already operating in the marketplace.


 Increased Insurance Claims
Transport over long distances with repeated handling can increase the risk of cargo damage. Freight forwarders

can advise on the best methods of packing and transport to prevent damage and reduce the risk of claims.

Unethical trading partners may use spurious claims to achieve a discount on price. In such circumstances it is

advisable to obtain inspection certificates from cargo surveyors to prove quality standards at the point of

loading.

Given the increasing trend toward litigation, exporters are now more vulnerable to product liability claims in the

overseas market. Exporters must consider the difficulty of obtaining adequate product liability insurance and the

cost of such cover.

It is also important to consider the warranty, continuing technical update of products, spare parts supplies,

servicing of equipment etc that may be required to support export sales. All these factors will affect the ongoing

market acceptance of the product or service and its price in the market place.


 Inadequate Resources
A business seeking to enter the international marketplace must ensure that it has adequate resources, including

raw materials, components and human and financial resources to meet the export requirement. If these resources

aren't available and part of the export work needs to be subcontracted, the business runs the risk of losing

control of quality or of spending time and money on constant supervision.
72



Why we should Export?
There are many reasons for a country to export, some of these are:

     •   It provides valuable foreign exchange to country.

     •   It is one of the measures of country’s economic growth.

     •   To control over balance of payments.

     •   For employment generation.

     •   For poverty alleviation.

     •   It provides shield against demand fluctuations in domestic market.

     •   For import of capital goods at 0% duty.

     •   Prepares ourselves for duty free regime.

     •   For capacity utilization.

     •   To get the working capital loan at low rate of interest.

     •   In line with company’s & country’s image.


How to Export?
Golden Rule: In order to be successful in exporting one must fully research its markets. No one should
ever try to tackle every market at once. Many enthusiastic persons bitten by the export bug fail because they bite

off more than they can chew. Overseas design and product requirements must be carefully considered.

Always sell as close to the market as possible. The fewer intermediaries one has the better, because every

intermediary needs some percentage for his share in his business, which means less profit for the exporter and

higher prices for the customer. All goods for export must be efficiently produced. They must be produced with

due regard to the needs of export markets. It is no use trying to sell windows which open outwards in a country

where, traditionally, windows open inwards.


Sell Experience: If a person cannot easily export his goods, may be he can sell his experience.
Alternatively, he can concentrate on supplying goods and materials to exporters' who already have established
73


an export trade. He can concentrate on making what are termed 'own brand' products, much demanded by

buyers in overseas markets which have the manufacturing know-how or facilities.


Selling in Export: In today's competitive world, everyone has to be sold. The customer always has a
choice of suppliers. Selling is an honorable profession, and you have to be an expert salesman.


On-Time Deliveries: Late deliveries are not always an exporters fault. Dock strikes, go-slows, etc.
occur almost everywhere in the world. If one enters into export for the first time, he must ensure of fast and

efficient delivery of the promised consignment.


Communication: Communication internal and external must be comprehensive and immediate. Good
communication is vital in export. When you are in doubt, pick up the phone or email for immediate

clarification.


Testing Product: The risk of failure in export markets can be minimized by intelligent use of research.
Before committing to a large-scale operation overseas, try out on a small scale. Use the sample test, and any

mistakes can then be corrected without much harm having been done. While the test campaign may appear to

cost more initially, remember that some of the cost will be repaid by sales, so that test marketing often turns out

to be cheaper.


Approach: If possible some indication of the attitudes towards the product should be established, like any
sales operation. Even if the product is successful, to obtain reactions from the customer.



                                      Advantages of Export
     •           The income from export business is exempted to the specified extent under the Income Tax Act,

         1961.

     •           Refund of central excise and custom duty on export is also made under the Duty Drawback

         Scheme of the Government.
74


     •        There is no sales tax on products meant for exports.


     •        Duty free import of raw materials is allowed under various schemes of Ministry of Commerce.


     •        Foreign exchange regulations have been substantially liberalized for exporters.


     •        Liberal release of foreign exchange is made available for travel abroad.


     •        Norms for establishing offices abroad by the exporters have been eased.


     •        Export credit is also available to the exporters at confessional rates of interest.


     •        Transport subsidy is given for export by air as well as rail.


     •        Import policy has also been liberalized substantially for export oriented importers.


                              Process of Export Management
The process of export management is essentially the process of planning, scheduling and controlling the

complex of non-routine activities that must be completed to secure the export orders and to ensure the timely

shipment of goods. The managerial process involved in export management relates to the following three

activities:

     1. Planning

     2. Scheduling, and

     3. Controlling


                        PLANNIN                                            SCHEDULING
                           G




                                              CONTROLLING


                                      Fig 1: Process of Export Management
75



1. Planning
        Planning refers to taking various decisions involved in export business. This relates to procurement of

export orders and their timely and successful execution. Planning for export order would involve making

concerted efforts supported by proper market entry strategies to get the export order.


2. Scheduling
        Scheduling refers to deciding the logistics for execution of export order. This is primarily concerned

with implementation and monitoring of export order. This involves defining in detail the various jobs/activities,

the nature of those jobs/activities (parallel or sequential), expected time frame for completion of those

jobs/activities and fixing responsibility for completion.


3. Controlling
        It seeks to ensure whether the activities planned have been completed on time or not and whether the
                                                                ffoll Posstt
                                                                  ol o -
                                                                    low -e x
                                                                     ow e
                                                                      P
various schedules drawn up for execution of those orders have been followed or not. A system of reporting
                                                                       --u p xpor
                                                                         up por
                                                                             a tt
                                                                             acttii
                                                                              c




should be developed and implemented in every export organization to ensure proper control of various activities
                                                                                  on
                                                                                   on




involved in execution of export orders.



                                               EXPORT CYCLE
The various activities/stages involved in planning and execution of an export order are performed in a
                                                            or d Co -
                                                            or Co
                                                              diin -
                                                                 n




sequential manner. Therefore, the activities/stages are viewed as different links in the chain of a cycle called
                                                                  attii
                                                                  a
                                                                      onon




                                                                                  Plla




export cycle. The export cycle is divided into three phases:
                                                                                  Ex


                                                                                  P
                                                                                   Ex
                       M o mplle




                                                                                    a
                       M mp




                                                                                     po


                                                                                      nn
                                                                                      p


                                                                                      nn
                        on e m




                                                                                       or
                          II
                          n




                                                                                         iing
                                                                                         rtts
                           ii m




                                                                                           ng
                             ttor en t




     a. Planning for exports
                                                                                            s
                              or d g off on &
                               or g o i on
                               or ent
                                 de E
                                 iin
                                   e r Ex &
                                   n atti
                                     r




     b. Implementation and monitoring of an export order
                                                                                        ffor
                                                                                          or
                                        a
                                          xpo
                                           po




     c. Post exports follow up action.
                                              rtt
                                              r
76




                                                 Fig. 2: Export Cycle

A. Planning for Exports
Planning for exports involves the following activities namely,

     1. Understanding the international trade environment

     2. Setting up an export firm/organization structure

     3. Identification of export opportunities

     4. Procurement of export order, negotiation and confirmation.

B. Implementation and Monitoring of Export Order
This represents the second phase in the export cycle and involves the following activities:

     1. Development of logistics for execution of export order

     2. Export financing arranging pre-shipment finance

     3. Procurement of goods/supplies-domestic procurement and imports

     4. Labeling, packaging, packing and marking

     5. Pre-shipment inspection

     6. Export risks-identification, quantification and management

     7. Pre-shipment documentation

     8. Shipment of good-central excise and customs clearance and transportation
77


     9. Compliance with exchange control regulations

C. Post Export Follow-up Action
Once the shipment of goods has been sent, export manager should take the necessary follow-up action. This
would involve the following steps:
     1. Negotiation of documents with the bank to realize payment against the port shipment,

     2. Arranging post shipment finance

     3. Claiming incentives/facilities

     4. Maintaining liaison with the importer

     5. Settlement of disputes, if any.

                                      Export Marketing Plan
An export marketing plan is step-by-step guide to strategy implementation. It addresses strategic issues and
outlines the corresponding operational action to be taken. It specifies targets for each step. The plan should
answer all questions on how the export firm’s strategy is to be implemented and direct the enterprise in attaining
the strategic objective.

A typical export marketing plan focuses on the following aspects:
     •   Marketing objectives
     •   Market segmentation and positioning,
     •   Market research,
     •   Characteristics of the product line,
     •   Export pricing,
     •   Distribution channels, and
     •   Promotional strategies.

Some Practical Suggestion
     •   The exporters should innovate new product designs, strategies and promotional policies to improve the
         level of exports. This helps them to make ‘value rich offers’ that are better than the best.
     •   The exporter should aim at a Market Niche rather than at the mass market.
     •   Exporters should know the key buyers in the target market.
     •   Exporters should choose their markets carefully. The choice of market can make the difference between
         success and failure in exporting.
78


     •   Exporters should clarify their motives for exporting and set their objectives at the outset. They should
         know why they want to export and set their goals.
     •   Exporters should consider export market development a long-term investment. Sustained efforts are
         essential in export marketing.
     •   Planning and strategy development are essential for success in the long run in export trade.
     •   The export firm should have the requisite technical expertise, in addition to careful planning and suitable
         products.
     •   No enterprise should seek entry an export market until it is ready. Any attempt at exporting without
         experience in domestic marketing is bound to fail.
     •   The responsibility for the export effort should be assigned to a key staff member, usually known as
         export manager.

                                    Tips For Export Marketing
     1. Select the product and the target market on the basis of desk research even before considering exporting.
     2. Once a market has been decided upon, the entrepreneur should carry out in-depth study of the target

         market.

     3. The aim of the first visit to foreign market should not be to do business or looking for orders. Rather, the

         visit should be used to improve the preparation for entering the market.

     4. Evaluate all the information collected and then formulate a marketing strategy and develop a marketing

         plan.

     5. Gaining foothold in foreign markets can only be effective on a long term basis. Thus, the entrepreneur

         should have the strong financial base.

     6. The foreign buyers can’t afford to loose face and credibility by deterioration in quality or alternatives to

         price and/or late deliveries. It is important to understand the requirement of the foreign buyers before

         marketing commitments.

     7. In exports, consumers are quality and price conscious in a market which enjoys large and varied

         supplies. Success or failure in business will depend upon understanding this sensitivity of the foreign

         buyer. The entrepreneur should adopt a consumer oriented approach to manufacturing and selling.
79


     8. International markets are trend sensitive. Designs frequently change and products may not remain in

         demand. It is therefore, necessary to be aware of this trend and efforts should be made to keep up-to-date

         with the market trends.

     9. Foreign markets, particularly in the developed countries, are often highly segmented into different age

         and income groups. The exporter should select the right market segment and accordingly position the

         product in the market.



          Market          Entry             Strategies:           Location             of Importers
The main thrust of the market entry strategy should be to ensure long-term presence in the chosen export

market. This would be possible only if long-term approach is followed to export marketing as this is the basic

condition for success in the export business.

There are four alternative strategies to penetrate the foreign market with a view to locating the importers for the

export product(s). These strategies are as follows:

     1. Regular trade fair participation.

     2. Business promotion visits to foreign markets.

     3. Doing business through agents.

     4. Opening overseas offices.



     1. Regular Trade Fair Participation
         Participation in foreign trade fairs is one of the oldest forms of promotion of exports. Trade fairs provide

     an opportunity to the exporter to display their products to large number of buyers or their representatives

     who visit the fair. It offers tremendous facilities to bring across the message to a large number of buyers

     than perhaps any other trade promotional tool. (See Annexure)

     The objectives of trade fair participation are as follows:

      ♦ To introduce the concept of the products i.e., the basic theme of the products.
80


        ♦ To introduce the export firm in the foreign market.

        ♦ To introduce the brand of the product or increase the popularity of the existing brand.

        ♦ To conduct consumer research on the new product and test it in the market.

        ♦ To ensure customer loyalty.

        ♦ To look for prospective buyers.


2. Business Promotion Visits to Foreign Markets
           The exporter should plan for to foreign market in order to build relationships and understandings with
the foreign buyers. The planning for the business promotion trip can be divided into three stages:
(i)        Before the trip,
(ii)       During the trip, and
(iii)      After the trip

(i)- Planning        Before the Trip
An exporter should identify the valid reasons to justify his visit to the foreign country. There could be number
of reasons to visit the foreign market. Some of these are as follows:
 ♦            To study the latest trends in the market to explore the possibilities for new business opportunities.
 ♦            To find new buyers.
 ♦            To find and negotiate with market agents.
 ♦            To hold negotiations with the buyers to conclude the business deals.
 ♦            To locate new buyers.
 ♦            To launch a new product.
 ♦             To attend to the queries of the foreign buyers and solve their problems in the use of the product.
  ♦           To develop understanding the riles and regulations as regards tariff, fumigation, inspection, labeling,
          packaging, safety, public health and quality of the products.

 (ii)- During       the Business Promotion Visit
       The exporter should observe the following guidelines on his arrival in the foreign country:
 ♦        He should inform the buyers regarding his arrival and reconfirm the appointments.
 ♦        The exporter should be on time for his meeting with the prospective buyer. It is important to remember
          that the punctuality is at a premium in all the developed countries.
 ♦        The exporter should take his notes during discussion with the importer.
81


  ♦       The exporter should find time to visit the market/chamber of commerce and the economic section of the
          Embassy of India to gain first hand information about the foreign market and the business practices.

(iii)- After     the Business Promotion Visit
Once the visit is over, the exporter should take up promptly the follow up action on the various points agreed
with the buyers during the business meetings, this may relate to providing clarification, giving additional
information, sending modified samples or any other point mentioned by the importer which needs clarifications.
Time is the essence of follow up action to ensure successful conclusion of the business visit. The exporter
should also submit the bank certificate for repatriation of export proceeds and evidence regarding bringing
goods.

3. Business through Agents
          Many buyers prefer to make imports through import agents (also known as commercial agents/sales
representatives etc.) based in their own countries. It is also common among some of the large importers to make
direct imports through the intermediation of a representative firm in the exporting country. The representative
firm is known as buying house or buying agent in exporting country or indenting agent in the importing
country. The importer depends upon the buying agent for selection of the exporter to arrange for timely
supplies. Thus, the exporter can approach either of the two or both of them to promote his exports business.
These agents are classified as:
a) Import Agent or Overseas Agent
b) Buying Agent.

a) Import Agent (or Overseas Agent)
     The exporter should prefer an import agent in the following situations:
      •   When communication is a major problem, particularly in the case of traditional exporters.
      •   In certain countries like Spain, Scandinavia etc. exporters can penetrate only through agents. These
          agents ensure prompt payment. The possibilities of default or delay in payments can also be minimized.
     Functions of import agents are Marketing, Quality Control, Ensuring Payments, and Warehousing etc.

b) Buying Agents
      Buying agents are the firms in exporting countries to represent foreign buyers. Generally, foreign buyers

      who regularly import from certain countries face the difficulty in locating the reliable exporters to supply

      the goods of the desired quality. In order to overcome this problem, the large importers may appoint local

      business firms in the countries of exports to act as their indenting agents. Such firms of indenting agents are

      usually referred to as buying agents or the buying houses in the exporting countries. The main function of a
82


     buying agent is to arrange foe supplies of goods desired by the foreign buyers i.e. their principals. The

     various functions performed by buying agents are merchandising, product development, and quality control,

     placing order, payment arrangements and documentation.


4. Opening Overseas Offices

        Another strategy to enter a foreign market is to open the office in the market itself. The implication of

this strategy is that the exporter and the importer will be the same party. The exporter can utilize this route to

ensure his effective presence in the foreign market. As a consequence, the chain of distribution shall be as

follows:

        ExporterImporter (Exporter) WholesalerRetailerConsumer

In this case, the exporter with the help of his overseas office shall be in a position to effectively penetrate the

foreign market. He would have first hand information of the foreign market and the market inputs so collected

would help him plan his marketing strategy. He can secure business from the wholesalers or the sales

representative or the sales / commercial agents or the distributors.

        The distinctive feature of this strategy is that the exporter can gain the confidence of the foreign buyers

by referring to his office both in India and the foreign market. The presence of the exporter in the foreign

market will give confidence to the buyers that they are dealing with the reliable party. The exporter on his part

can provide better after sale service to the importers or attend to their queries promptly. This arrangement also

enables the exporter to ensure that there are no defaults in making payments. Better payment terms can also be

offered to the foreign buyers. As far as exporter is concerned, he would be receiving orders from his own outlet

in the foreign market. The order can be placed on D/A (Document against Acceptance) terms of payment with

the exporter by the importer which represents the Indian exporter in the foreign country. This will reduce the

risk of non payment and also obviate the need for obtaining letter of credit.

        One of the fundamental advantages of this strategy is that the exporter can increase his profitability by

being more competitive in the foreign market. The other advantage is that the exporter can bypass the traditional
83


channel used for distribution of the product and offer the product at lower prices directly to the retailers. This

would help the exporter to not only increase his sales volume but also his profits.



                              Developing an Export Strategy
Determining Products' Export Potential
There are several ways to evaluate the export potential of our products and services in overseas markets. The

most common approach is to examine the success of our products domestically. If our company succeeds at

selling in the U.S. market, there is a good chance that it will also be successful in markets abroad, at least those

where similar needs and conditions exist.

Another means to assess our company's potential in exporting is by examining the unique or important features

of our product. If those features are hard to duplicate abroad, then it is likely that we will be successful

overseas. A unique product may have little competition and demand for it might be quite high.

Finally, our product may have export potential even if there are declining sales in the U.S. market.


Assessing Company's Export Readiness
By answering these general questions about how exporting will enhance into our company's short, medium and

long-term goals will help determine our company's readiness to export:

  •   What does the company want to gain from exporting?

  •   Is exporting consistent with other company goals?

  •   What demands will exporting place on the company's key resources, management and personnel,
      production capacity, and finance and how will these demands be met?

  •   Are the expected benefits worth the costs, or would company resources be better used for developing new
      domestic business?

Developing an Export Plan
Once we decided to sell our products abroad, it is time to develop an export plan. A crucial first step in planning

is to develop broad consensus among key management on the company's goals, objectives, capabilities, and
84


constraints. In addition, all aspects of an export plan should be agreed upon by the personnel involved in the

exporting process, as they will ultimately execute the export plan.

The purposes of the export plan are (a) to assemble facts, constraints, and goals and (b) to create an action

statement that takes all of these into account.

At least the following ten questions should ultimately be addressed:

1. Which products are selected for export development? What modifications, if any, must be made to adapt

     them for overseas markets?

2. Which countries are targeted for sales development?

3. In each country, what is the basic customer profile? What marketing and distribution channels should be

     used to reach customers?

4. What special challenges pertain to each market (competition, cultural differences, import controls, etc.), and

     what strategy will be used to address them?

5. How will the product's export sale price be determined?

6. What specific operational steps must be taken and when?

7. What will be the time frame for implementing each element of the plan?

8. What personnel and company resources will be dedicated to exporting?

9. What will be the cost in time and money for each element?

10. How will results be evaluated and used to modify the plan?

The first time an export plan is developed, it should be kept simple. It need be only a few pages long, since

important market data and planning elements may not yet be available. The initial planning effort itself

gradually generates more information and insight. As the planners learn more about exporting and our

company's competitive position, the export plan will become more detailed and complete. A detailed plan is

recommended for companies that intend to export directly. Companies choosing indirect export methods may

require much simpler plans.
85



                                Developing A Marketing Plan
Once you have decided that your company is able and committed to exporting, the next step is to develop a

marketing plan.


Marketing Strategy Benefits
A clearly written marketing strategy offers six immediate benefits:
1. Because written plans display strengths and weaknesses more readily, they are a great help in formulating

     and polishing an export strategy.

2. Written plans are not easily forgotten, overlooked, or ignored by those charged with executing them. If

     deviation from the original plan occurs, it is likely to be due to a deliberate and thoughtful choice.

3. Written plans are easier to communicate to others and are less likely to be misunderstood.

4. Written plans allocate responsibilities and provide for an evaluation of results.

5. Written plans are helpful when seeking financial assistance. They indicate to lenders that you have a serious

     approach to the export venture.

6. Written plans give management a clear understanding of what will be required of them and thus help to

     ensure a commitment to exporting. Actually, a written plan signals that the decision to export has already

     been made.

Building an international business takes time. It usually takes months, sometimes even several years, before an

exporting company begins to see a return on its investment of time and money. By committing to the specifics

of a written plan, top management can make sure that the firm will finish what it begins and that the hopes that

prompted its export efforts will be fulfilled.



                                             Market Research
To successfully export our product, we should examine foreign markets through research. The purpose is to

identify marketing opportunities and constraints abroad, as well as to identify prospective buyers and

customers.
86


Market research encompasses all methods that a company can use to determine which foreign markets have the

best potential for its products. Results of this research inform the firm of: the largest markets for its product, the

fastest growing markets, market trends and outlook, market conditions and practices, and competitive firms and

products.

Firm may begin to export without conducting any market research if it receives unsolicited orders from abroad.

A firm may research a market by using either primary or secondary data resources. In conducting primary

market research, a company collects data directly from the foreign marketplace through interviews, surveys, and

other direct contact with representatives and potential buyers. Primary market research has the advantage of

being tailored to the company's needs and provides answers to specific questions, but the collection of such data

is time-consuming and expensive.

When conducting secondary market research, a company collects data from various sources, such as trade

statistics for a country or a product. Working with secondary sources is less expensive and helps the company

focus its marketing efforts. Although secondary data sources are critical to market research, they do have

limitations. Yet, even with these limitations, secondary research is a valuable and relatively easy first step for a

company to take. It may be the only step needed if the company decides to export indirectly, since the

intermediary firm may have advanced research capabilities.


                                  Methods of Market Research
Because of the expense of primary market research, most firms rely on secondary data sources. The three

following recommendations will help us obtain useful secondary information:

1.   Keep abreast of world events that influence the international marketplace, watch for announcements of
     specific projects, or simply visiting likely markets. For example, a thawing of political hostilities often
     leads to the opening of economic channels between countries.

2.   Analyze trade and economic statistics. Trade statistics are generally compiled by product category and by
     country. These statistics provide the U.S. firm with information concerning shipments of products over
     specified periods of time. Demographic and general economic statistics, such as population size and
87


      makeup, per capita income, and production levels by industry can be important indicators of the market
      potential for a company's products.

3.    Obtain advice from experts. There are several ways of obtaining this advice:
     • Contact experts at the U.S. Department of Commerce and other government agencies.

     • Attend seminars, workshops, and international trade shows.

     • Hire an international trade and marketing consultant.

     • Talk with successful exporters of similar products.

     • Contact trade and industry association staff.



                       A Step-by-Step Approach to Market Research
It involves screening potential markets, assessing the targeted markets, and drawing conclusions.

A. Screen Potential Markets
•    Step 1:- Obtain export statistics that indicate product exports to various countries. Published export

     statistics provide a reliable indicator of where U.S. exports are currently being shipped. The U.S. Census

     Bureau provides these statistics in a published format. Trade statistics also can be obtained using the

     National Trade Data Bank (NTDB).

•    Step 2:- Identify five to ten large and fast-growing markets for the firm's product. Look at them over the

     past three to five years. Has market growth been consistent year to year? Did import growth occur even

     during periods of economic recession? If not, did growth resume with economic recovery?

•    Step 3:- Identify some smaller but fast-emerging markets that may provide ground-floor opportunities. If

     the market is just beginning to open up, there may be fewer competitors than in established markets. Growth

     rates should be substantially higher in these countries to qualify as up-and-coming markets, given the lower

     starting point.

•    Step 4:- Target three to five of the most statistically promising markets for further assessment. Consult with

     a Department of Commerce Export Assistance Center, business associates, freight forwarders, and others to

     further evaluate targeted markets.

B. Assess Targeted Markets
88


•    Step 1:- Examine trends for company products as well as related products, that could influence demand.

     Calculate overall consumption of the product and the amount accounted for by imports. The National Trade

     Data Bank (NTDB) and the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) offer Industry Sector Analyses

     (ISAs), Country Commercial Guides (CCGs), and other reports that give economic backgrounds and market

     trends for each country. Demographic information (such as population and age) can be obtained from World

     Population (Census) and Statistical Yearbook (United Nations).

•    Step 2:- Ascertain the sources of competition, including the extent of domestic industry production and the

     major foreign countries the firm is competing against in each targeted market by using ISAs and competitive

     assessments. This information is available from the NTDB and the NTIS. Look at each competitor's U.S.

     market share.

•    Step 3:- Analyze factors affecting marketing and use of the product in each market, such as end-user

     sectors, channels of distribution, cultural idiosyncrasies, and business practices. Again, the ISAs and

     Customized Market Analyses (CMAs) offered by the Department of Commerce are useful.

•    Step 4:- Identify any foreign barriers (tariff or nontariff) for the product being imported into the country.

     Identify any U.S. barriers (such as export controls) that affect exports to the country.

•    Step 5:- Identify any U.S. or foreign government incentives that promote exporting of your particular

     product or service.

C. Draw Conclusions

After analyzing the data, the company may conclude that its marketing resources would be applied more

effectively to a few countries. Exporting to one or two countries will allow the company to focus its resources

without jeopardizing its domestic sales efforts. The company's internal resources should determine its level of

effort.


                              Methods/Channels of Exporting
The most common methods of exporting are indirect selling and direct selling. In indirect selling, an export

intermediary such as an export management company (EMC) or an export trading company (ETC) normally
89


assumes responsibility for finding overseas buyers, shipping products, and getting paid. In direct selling, the

U.S. producer deals directly with a foreign buyer. The paramount consideration in determining whether to

market indirectly or directly is the level of resources a company is willing to devote to its international

marketing effort. Other factors to consider when deciding whether to market indirectly or directly include:

     •   The size of firm;
     •   The nature of products;
     •   Previous export experience and expertise;
     •   Business conditions in the selected overseas markets.


                                      Approaches to Exporting
The way your company chooses to export its products can have a significant effect on its export plan and

specific marketing strategies. The basic distinction among approaches to exporting relates to the company's

level of involvement in the export process. There are at least four approaches, which may be used alone or in

combination:

1.   Passively filling orders from domestic buyers who then export the product: - These sales

     are indistinguishable from other domestic sales as far as the original seller is concerned. Someone else has

     decided that the product in question meets foreign demand. That party takes all the risk and handles all of

     the exporting details, in some cases without even the awareness of the original seller.

2.   Seeking out domestic buyers who represent foreign end users or customers: - Many U.S.

     and foreign corporations, general contractors, foreign trading companies, foreign government agencies,

     foreign distributors and retailers, and others in the United States purchase for export. These buyers are a

     large market for a wide variety of goods and services. In this case a company may know its product is being

     exported, but it is still the buyer who assumes the risk and handles the details of exporting.

3.   Exporting indirectly through intermediaries: - With this approach, a company engages the

     services of an intermediary firm capable of finding foreign markets and buyers for its products. EMCs,

     ETCs, international trade consultants, and other intermediaries can give the exporter access to well-

     established expertise and trade contacts. Yet, the exporter can still retain considerable control over the
90


     process and can realize some of the other benefits of exporting, such as learning more about foreign

     competitors, new technologies, and other market opportunities.

4.   Exporting directly: - This approach is the most ambitious and difficult, since the exporter personally

     handles every aspect of the exporting process from market research and planning to foreign distribution and

     collections. Consequently, a significant commitment of management time and attention is required to

     achieve good results. However, this approach may also be the best way to achieve maximum profits and

     long-term growth. With appropriate help and guidance from the Department of Commerce, state trade

     offices, freight forwarders, international banks, and other service groups, even small or medium-sized firms

     can export directly if they are able to commit enough staff time to the effort. For those who cannot make

     that commitment, the services of an EMC, ETC, trade consultant, or other qualified intermediary are

     indispensable.


Distribution Considerations
•    Which channels of distribution should the firm use to market its products abroad?

•    Where should the firm produce its products and how should it distribute them in the foreign market?

•    What types of representatives, brokers, wholesalers, dealers, distributors, or end-use customers, and so forth
     should the firm use?

•    What are the characteristics and capabilities of the available intermediaries?

•    Should the assistance of an EMC or ETC be obtained?

                                           Indirect Exporting
The principal advantage of indirect marketing for a smaller U.S. company is that it provides a way to penetrate

foreign markets without the complexities and risks of direct exporting. Several kinds of intermediary firms

provide a range of export services.


                                            Direct Exporting
The advantages of direct exporting for a U.S. company include more control over the export process, potentially

higher profits, and a closer relationship to the overseas buyer and marketplace.
91


When a company chooses to export directly to foreign markets, it usually makes internal organizational changes

to support more complex functions. A direct exporter normally selects the markets it wishes to penetrate,

chooses the best channels of distribution for each market, and then makes specific foreign business connections

in order to sell its product.

Once the company is organized to handle exporting, a proper channel of distribution needs to be carefully

chosen for each market. These channels include sales representatives, agents, distributors, retailers, and end

users.

Sales Representatives
Overseas, a sales representative is the equivalent of a manufacturer's representative in the United States. The
representative uses the company's product literature and samples to present the product to potential buyers. A
representative usually handles many complementary lines that do not conflict. The sales representative usually
works on a commission basis, assumes no risk or responsibility, and is under contract for a definite period of
time. The contract defines territory, terms of sale, method of compensation, reasons and procedures for
terminating the agreement, and other details. The sales representative may operate on either an exclusive or a
nonexclusive basis.
Agents
The widely misunderstood term "agent" means a representative who normally has authority, perhaps even a
power of attorney, to make commitments on behalf of the firm he or she represents. Firms in the United States
and other developed countries have stopped using the term and instead rely on the term "representative," since
agent can imply more than intended. It is important that any contract state whether the representative or agent
does or does not have legal authority to obligate the firm.
Distributors
The foreign distributor is a merchant who purchases goods from a U.S. exporter (often at a substantial discount)
and resells it for a profit. The foreign distributor generally provides support and service for the product, thus
relieving the U.S. company of these responsibilities. The distributor usually carries an inventory of products and
a sufficient supply of spare parts and also maintains adequate facilities and personnel for normal servicing
operations. Distributors typically handle a range of non-conflicting but complementary products. End users do
not usually buy from a distributor; they buy from retailers or dealers.
Foreign Retailers
A company may also sell directly to foreign retailers, although in such transactions, products are generally limited
to consumer lines. The growth of major retail chains in markets such as Canada and Japan has created new
92


opportunities for this type of direct sale. This method relies mainly on traveling sales representatives who directly
contact foreign retailers, although results might also be achieved by mailing catalogs, brochures, or other
literature. The direct mail approach has the benefits of eliminating commissions, reducing traveling expenses, and
reaching a broader audience. For optimal results, a firm that uses direct mail to reach foreign retailers should
support it with other marketing activities.
American manufacturers with ties to major domestic retailers may also be able to use them to sell abroad. Many
large American retailers maintain overseas buying offices and use these offices to sell abroad when practical.
Direct Sales to End Users
A U.S. business may sell its products or services directly to end users in foreign countries. These buyers can be
foreign governments; institutions such as hospitals, banks, and schools; or businesses. Buyers can be identified
at trade shows, through international publications, or through Commerce's Export Contact List Service.

The U.S. Company should be aware that if a product is sold in such a direct fashion, the company is responsible

     for shipping, payment collection, and product servicing unless other arrangements are made. Unless the cost

     of providing these services is built into the export price, a company could have a narrower profit than

     originally intended.


                               Preparing Product for Export
Selecting and preparing product for export requires not only product knowledge but also knowledge of the

unique characteristics of each market being targeted. Market research conducted and foreign representatives

contacts should give the U.S. company an idea of what products can be sold and where. However, before the

sale can occur, the company may need to modify a particular product to satisfy buyer tastes or needs in foreign

markets.

The extent to which the company will modify products sold in export markets is a key policy issue to be

addressed by management. Some exporters believe the domestic product can be exported without significant

changes. Others seek to consciously develop uniform products that are acceptable in all markets.

If the company manufactures more than one product or offers many models of a single product, it should start

with the one best suited to the targeted market. Ideally, the firm chooses one or two products that fit the market

without major design or engineering modifications. Doing so works best when the U.S. company:
93


•     Deals with international customers that have the same demographic characteristics or the same
      specifications for manufactured goods;
•     Supplies parts for U.S. goods that are exported to foreign countries without modifications;
•    Produces a unique product that is sold on the basis of its status or foreign appeal; or produces a product that
     has few or no distinguishing features and that is sold almost exclusively on a commodity or price basis.


                                             Questions to Consider
•     What foreign needs does the product satisfy?
•     What product should the firm offer abroad?
•    Should the firm modify its domestic-market product for sale abroad? Should it develop a new product for
     the foreign market?
•     What specific features, such as design, color, size, packaging, brand and warranty should the product have?
•     What specific services are necessary abroad at the pre-sale and post-sale stages?
•    Are the firm’s services and repair facilities adequate?


                                              Product Adaptation
To enter a foreign market successfully, a U.S. company may have to modify its product to conform to

government regulations, geographic and climatic conditions, buyer preferences, or standards of living. The

company may also need to modify its product to facilitate shipment or to compensate for possible differences in

engineering and design standards.

Foreign government product regulations are common in international trade and are expected to expand in the

future. These regulations can take the form of high tariffs or nontariff barriers, such as regulations or product

specifications. Governments impose these regulations to:

•    Protect domestic industries from foreign competition;

•    Protect the health of their citizens;

•    Force importers to comply with environmental controls;

•    Ensure that importers meet local requirements for electrical or measurement systems;

•    Restrict the flow of goods originating in or having components from certain countries; and

•    Protect their citizens from cultural influences deemed inappropriate.

It is often necessary for a company to adapt its product to account for geographic and climatic conditions as well
94


as for the availability of resources. Factors such as topography, humidity, and energy costs can affect the

performance of a product or even define its use. For example, the cost of petroleum products and the state of a

country's infrastructure may indicate the demand for energy-consuming products.

Market potential must be large enough to justify the direct and indirect costs involved in product adaptation. The

firm should assess the costs to be incurred and though it may be difficult, determine the increased revenues

expected from adaptation. The decision to adapt a product is based partly on the degree of commitment to the

specific foreign market; a firm with short-term goals will probably have a different perspective than a firm with

long-term goals.

                                    Engineering and Redesign
The exporter should be aware that even fundamental aspects of its products may require changing. For example,
electrical standards in many foreign countries differ from U.S. electrical standards. It is not unusual to find
phases, cycles, or voltages (for both residential and commercial use) that would damage or impair the operating
efficiency of equipment designed for use in the United States. These electrical standards sometimes vary even in
the same country. Knowing this requirement, the manufacturer can determine whether a special motor must be
substituted or arrange for a different drive ratio to achieve the desired operating revolutions per minute.

Similarly, many kinds of equipment must be engineered in the metric system for integration with other pieces of
equipment or for compliance with the standards of a given country. The United States is virtually alone in its
adherence to a non-metric system, and U.S. firms that compete successfully in the global market realize that
conversion to metric measurement is an important detail in selling to overseas customers. Even instruction or
maintenance manuals should take care to give dimensions in centimeters, weights in grams or kilos, and
temperatures in Celsius degrees.

                             Branding, Labeling, and Packaging
Consumers are concerned with both the product itself and the product's supplementary features, such as

packaging, warranties, and service. Branding and labeling products in foreign markets raise new considerations

for the U.S. company such as:

•    Are international brand names important to promote and distinguish a product? Conversely, should local
     brands or private labels be employed to heighten local interest?
•    Are the colors used on labels and packages offensive or attractive to the foreign buyer? For example, in
     some countries certain colors are associated with death.
95


•    Can labels be produced in official or customary languages if required by law or practice?
•    Does information on product content and country of origin have to be provided?
•    Are weights and measures stated in the local unit?
•    Must each item be labeled individually?
•    Are local tastes and knowledge considered? A dry cereal box picturing a U.S. athlete may not be as
     attractive to overseas consumers as the picture of a local sports hero.
A company may find that building international recognition for a brand is expensive. Protection for brand names
varies from one country to another. To protect its products and brand names, a company must comply with local
laws on patents, copyrights, and trademarks.

                                                  Installation
Another element of product preparation that a company should consider is the ease of installing that product
overseas. If technicians or engineers are needed overseas to assist in installation, the company should minimize
their time in the field if possible. To do so, the company may wish to preassemble or pretest the product before
shipping.

Disassembling the product for shipment and reassembling abroad may be considered by the company. This
method can save the firm shipping costs, but it may add to delay in payment if the sale is contingent on an
assembled product. The company should be careful to provide all product information, such as training manuals,
installation instructions, and parts lists - all in the local language - even relatively simple instructions.


                                                  Warranties
The company should include a warranty on the product since the buyer expects a specific level of performance
and a guarantee that it will be achieved. Levels of expectation for a warranty vary by country depending upon its
level of development, competitive practices, the activism of consumer groups, local standards of production
quality, and other factors. Product service guarantees are important since customers overseas typically have
service expectations as high as or greater than in the United States.

A company may use warranties for advertising purposes to distinguish its product from the competition. Strong
warranties may be required to break into a new market, especially if the company is an unknown supplier. In
some cases, warranties may be instrumental in making the sale and become a major element in negotiations.

                                                    Servicing
Service after the sale is critical for some products. Generally, the more complex the product's technology, the
greater the demand for pre-sale and post-sale service. Therefore, there is pressure in some firms to offer simpler,
more robust products overseas thereby reducing the need for maintenance and repairs. U.S. suppliers who rely
96


on foreign distributors or agents to provide service backup must take steps to ensure an adequate level of service.
These steps include training, periodically checking service quality, and monitoring inventories of spare parts.


                       PROCESSING OF AN EXPORT ORDER
Export Order is a document communicating decision of the foreign buyer to purchase certain item(s) from the

exporter. It specifies the description of the item(s), their quantity and quality specifications, unit price, delivery

terms, shipping marks, insurance requirements, requirements as regards labeling, packing and packaging,

payment terms, pre-shipment inspection requirements, documents required and so on. The Export Order

represents an ‘offer to sell’ made by the exporter and its ‘acceptance’ by the foreign buyer.


Process of Securing Export Order
Generally, the process of obtaining the export order follows the sequence of the steps given below:

Step 1:- The exporter locates a trade enquiry i.e., he/she comes across the details of a foreign buyer who is

willing to import the item(s). The exporter may get these details through any of the following ways:

a)    Websites of the import firms.

b)    Visit to the exporter’s website by an interested foreign buyer.

c)    Participation in a trade fair/visit to a trade fair by the exporter.

d)    Business promotion visit to a foreign country.

e)    Contact with the overseas marketing agent.

f)    Contact with a buying agent in the exporter’s country.

g)    Exporter’s own retail outlet in the foreign country.

h)    Circulation of the trade enquiry by the trade promotion body in the exporter‘s country.

Step 2:- On receipt of the trade enquiry, the exporter sends his/her company profile, product profile and the

promotional literature of his/her product range to know the interest of the buyer.

Step 3:- The buyer may like to have the details of certain product of his/her choice from the exporter.
97



Step 4:- The exporter sends the quotation in respect of the product of interest to the buyer. This quotation

contains the basic details like its FOB price, mode of payment, photograph of the item along              with its

specifications and the likely delivery time.

Step 5:- On receipt of this basic information, the foreign buyer puts forward his/her requirements as regards
the design, size, finish or other specifications of the product in view. Once the product has been identified, then
the process of negotiations of the other terms and conditions begins. It is very likely that these terms and
conditions would be negotiated only as a result of personal meeting between the exporter and the foreign buyer
particularly if the exporter happens to be a new exporter.

Step 6:- The exporter sends the proforma invoice to the foreign buyer setting out in detail the terms and
conditions negotiated between the two parties. This proforma invoice represents the ‘offer to sell’ made by the
exporter.

Step 7:- The importer conveys his/her ‘acceptance’ of the exporter on the proforma invoice originally sent by
the exporter. It is however, not essential for the offer and acceptance to be on the proforma invoice. These could
be in the form of exchange of letters as well.


                       Terms and Conditions of an Export Order
The following are the standard clauses of an export order:
1.   Product and its description

2.   Product specifications as regards its quality

3.   Price: FOB/CFR/CIF etc., as per INCOTERMS 2000

4.   Quantity

5.   Payment Terms: D/A, D/P, Letter of Credit, Advance Payment etc.

6.   Delivery Schedule: Time Period; Partial/complete dispatch

7.   Mode of Shipment: Air/Sea/Road

8.   Type of Shipment: Direct/Transhipment

9.   Inspection

10. Labeling, Packaging, Packing and Marking requirements

11. Insurance: By exporter/importer
98


 12. Documents required

 13. Escalation clause: Sharing of increase in cost

 14. Force Majeure clause: Clause providing for excuse of non-performance due to acts of God.

 15. Arbitration Clause: Clause foe settlement of dispute

 16. Fines/Penalties

 17. Applicability of Law

 The exporter and importer hold negotiations with regard to the above points to conclude the business deal.


                       Planning for Execution of the Export Order
 Planning for the execution of the export order involves the following steps:

 Step 1:- Acknowledgement of the Export Order
 First of all, the exporter should send a letter of thanks to the foreign buyer for placing the order.

 Step 2:- Constitution of Team of Executives
 The exporter should treat each export order as a separate project and constitute a team of executives drawn from

 the marketing, production, finance and accounts, shipping, quality control departments etc. to implement the

 order. One of the executives should be made the Team Leader to coordinate with all the departments and

 external agencies involved in the execution of the order.

 Step 3:- Scrutiny of the Export Order
 The careful scrutiny of the order in respect of its following aspects by the team of executive appointed to

 observe the implementation:

 i. The order has been received for the product for which quotation/offer was sent and the exporter is still in a

   position to supply the product.

ii. Sizes and specifications should be same as per the offer and quotation.

iii. Pre-shipment inspection by Export Inspection Agency is required; the buyer should be informed about the

   inspection scheme.
99


 iv. Payment terms are the same as stipulated/negotiated. If the payment is by means of an irrevocable Letter of

        Credit, it should be ensured that such an irrevocable letter of credit (L/C) has been opened and its terms &

        conditions have been clearly understood by the exporter and are also acceptable to him/her.

  v. Special packaging, labeling and marketing requirements, if any, should be noted for compliance.

 vi. Shipment and delivery date is in conformity with the exporter’s production plan and whether:

        a. Part shipment is allowed.

        b. Transhipment is permissible.

        c. Port of shipment/destination is same.

vii. Whether insurance is to be done by the exporter or the buyer, and conditions (terms) of insurance.

viii.    Documents required by the buyer. It should be examined as to whether the exporter can arrange for the

        documents required by the buyer.

   Step 4:- Confirmation of the Export Order

   The buyer requires the exporter to confirm the order to him/her. Based on this confirmation he/she can draw

   his/her own schedules for supply of goods to his/her customers or plan for production schedules.

   Step 5:- Developing Logistics for Execution of the Order

   Logistics refers to the formulation of a detailed plan of action for the implementation of the export order. This

   involves identification of the minutest possible activities/jobs that need to be performed to ensure the successful

   execution of the order as per its terms and conditions. This listing of various jobs/ activities should be done as a

   result of the brain storming sessions amongst the members of the export team. The team should thus, prepare an

   Activity Profile for the order. The Activity Profile should state the following:

    a. Name of job/activity.

    b. Nature of the activity/job whether it is to be performed sequentially or parallel to some other activity.

    c. Likely time required for the completion. It should be specified as to what would be earliest start/finish time;

          the latest start/finish time of the activity and the total time duration for its completion. This information can
100


      used to draw a network diagram to control the likely delay in the execution of the order and as consequence

      control the likely cost escalations.

d. The executive/agency responsible for its completion.


Step 6:- Contents of the Activity Profile

The contents of the Activity Profile are as follows:

      1. Determination of materials/supplies required

      2. Making arrangement for the procurement of the materials/supplies

      3. Arrangements of funds to send the shipment i.e., packing credit from the bank

      4. Labeling, packaging, packing and marking of the export consignments

      5. Arrangements for ensuring pre-shipment inspection of goods for quality

      6. Compliance with the statutory requirements as regards inspection/authentication of export products

      7. Managing the risks involved in the export shipment

      8. Appointment of the clearing and forwarding agent

      9. Preparing the pre-shipment documents for obtaining central excise and custom clearance of the export
         shipment.

      10. Compliance with the exchange control requirements

      11. Shipment of goods

      12. Negotiation of documents

      13. Arranging post shipment finance from the bank

Step 7:- Reservation of Shipping Space

The exporter should plan for reservation of the shipping space much in advance in the ship. The reason is that

there is a shortage of shipping space and their frequency is also limited. It is quite possible that exporter may

not be able to obtain the reservation for the timely shipment of the goods. As far as shipment by sea is

concerned, there is not much difficulty in booking the cargo with the airlines. The reservation can be arranged

through the clearing and forwarding agent. Thus, the exporter should appoint a clearing and forwarding agent at

the initial stages if the shipment is to be sent by sea.
101



            EXPORT PRICING, QUOTATIONS AND INCOTERMS
Proper pricing, complete and accurate quotations, choosing the terms of the sale, and selecting the payment

method are four critical elements in selling a product or service overseas. Of the four, pricing can be the most

problematic, even for an experienced exporter.


                                         Pricing Considerations
The price considerations listed below will help an exporter determine the best price for the product overseas:
      •   At what price should the firm sell its product in the foreign market?
      •   What type of market positioning (customer perception) does the company want to convey from its
          pricing structure?
      •   Does the export price reflect the product's quality?
      •   Is the price competitive?
      •   Should the firm pursue market penetration or market-skimming pricing objectives abroad?
      •   What type of discount (trade, cash, quantity) and allowances (advertising, trade-off) should the firm
          offer its foreign customers?
      •   Should prices differ by market segment?
      •   What should the firm do about product line pricing?
      •   What pricing options are available if the firm's costs increase or decrease? Is the demand in the foreign
          market elastic or inelastic?
      •   Are the prices going to be viewed by the foreign government as reasonable or exploitative?
      •   Do the foreign country's antidumping laws pose a problem?

As in the domestic market, the price at which a product or service is sold directly determines a firm's revenues.

It is essential that a firm's market research include an evaluation of all of the variables that may affect the price

range for the product or service. If a firm's price is too high, the product or service will not sell. If the price is

too low, export activities may not be sufficiently profitable or may actually create a net loss.

It is very important that the exporter take into account additional costs that are typically borne by the importer.

They include tariffs, customs fees, currency fluctuation transaction costs and value-added taxes (VATs). These

additional costs can add substantially to the final price paid by the importer.


Foreign Market Objectives
102


An important aspect of a company's pricing analysis is determining market objectives. For example, is the

company attempting to penetrate a new market, looking for long-term market growth, or looking for an outlet

for surplus production or outmoded products? Many firms view the foreign market as a secondary market and

consequently have lower expectations regarding market share and sales volume. This naturally affects pricing

decisions.

Marketing and pricing objectives may be general or tailored to particular foreign markets. For example,

marketing objectives for sales to a developing nation where per capita income may be one tenth of that in the

United States are necessarily different from the objectives for Europe or Japan.


Costs
The computation of the actual cost of producing a product and bringing it to market is the core element in

determining if exporting is financially viable. Many new exporters calculate their export price by the cost-plus

method. In the cost-plus method of calculation, the exporter starts with the domestic manufacturing cost and

adds administration, research and development, overhead, freight forwarding, distributor margins, customs

charges, and profit.

Marginal cost pricing is a more competitive method of pricing a product for market entry. This method

considers the direct, out-of-pocket expenses of producing and selling products for export as a floor beneath

which prices cannot be set without incurring a loss. For example, additional costs may occur due to product

modification for the export market that accommodates different sizes, electrical systems, or labels. On the other

hand, costs may decrease if the export products are stripped-down versions or made without increasing the fixed

costs of domestic production.

Other costs should be assessed for domestic and export products according to how much benefit each product

receives from such expenditures. Additional costs often associated with export sales include:

      •   Market research and credit checks;
      •   Business travel;
      •   International postage, cable, and telephone rates;
      •   Translation costs;
      •   Commissions, training charges, and other costs involving foreign representatives;
103


      •   Consultants and freight forwarders; and
      •   Product modification and special packaging.
After the actual cost of the export product has been calculated, the exporter should formulate an approximate

consumer price for the foreign market.




                 Factory price                                               $7.50             $7.50

                 Domestic freight                                               .70              .70




                 Final consumer price                                       $14.15            $20.30


                                     Table 1: Calculation of Final Consumer Price


Market Demand
For most consumer goods, per capita income is a good gauge of a market's ability to pay. Some products may

create such a strong demand such as popular goods like Levis, that even low per capita income will not affect

their selling price. The firm must also keep in mind that currency fluctuations may alter the affordability of its

goods. Thus, pricing should try to accommodate wild changes in the U.S. and/or foreign currency. The firm

should anticipate the type of potential customers. If the firm's primary customers in a developing country are

expatriates or belong to the upper class, a higher price might be feasible even if the average per capita income is

low.
104



Competition
In the domestic market, few companies are free to set prices without carefully evaluating their competitors'

pricing policies. This situation is true in exporting, and is further complicated by the need to evaluate the

competition's prices in each potential export market.

If there are many competitors within the foreign market, the exporter may have little choice but to match the

market price or even under price the product or service in order to establish a market share. On the other hand,

if the product or service is new to a particular foreign market, it may actually be possible to set a higher price

than in the domestic market.


Pricing Summary
The key points to remember during determining product's price are:
      •   Determine the objective in the foreign market.
      •   Compute the actual cost of the export product.
      •   Compute the final consumer price.
      •   Evaluate market demand and competition.
      •   Consider modifying the product to reduce the export price.
      •   Include "nonmarket" costs, such as tariffs and customs fees.
      •   Exclude cost elements that provide no benefit to the export function, such as domestic advertising.



                                 Quotation and Proforma Invoice
Quotations
Many export transactions, particularly initial export transactions, begin with the receipt of an inquiry from

abroad that is followed by a request for a quotation. The preferred method for export is a pro forma invoice,

which a quotation is prepared in invoice format.

A quotation describes the product, states a price for it, sets the time of shipment, and specifies the terms of the

sale and terms of the payment. Since the foreign buyer may not be familiar with the product, the description of

it in an overseas quotation usually must be more detailed than in a domestic quotation. The description should

include the following 15 points:

      1. Seller's and buyer's names and addresses.
105


      2. Buyer's reference number and date of inquiry.
      3. Listing of requested products and brief description.
      4. Price of each item (it is advisable to indicate whether items are new or used and to quote in U.S. dollars
         to reduce foreign-exchange risk).
      5. Appropriate gross and net shipping weight (in metric units where appropriate).
      6. Appropriate total cubic volume and dimensions packed for export(in metric units where appropriate).
      7. Trade discount (if applicable).
      8. Delivery point.
      9. Terms of sale.
      10. Terms of payment.
      11. Insurance and shipping costs.
      12. Validity period for quotation.
      13. Total charges to be paid by customer.
      14. Estimated shipping date from U.S. port or airport.
      15. Currency of sale.


The Proforma Invoice
A proforma invoice (sometimes written as pro forma invoice) is little more than a 'preadvice' or indication of

what will stand in the commercial invoice once negotiations have been completed. Indeed, the proforma invoice

and the commercial invoice often look exactly the same, except that it should state clearly "proforma invoice"

on this document, whereas the commercial invoice will state "invoice" or "commercial invoice". The proforma

invoice serves as a negotiating instrument. The initial proforma invoice often sets the stage for the first round of

negotiations if the exporter and importer have not yet had any real discussions.


             Difference Between a Proforma Invoice and a Quotation
In reality, there is very little difference in function between the two and the proforma invoice is really a

quotation in invoice form; in other words. The difference really comes about in terms of the structure and layout

of the proforma invoice/quotation. A typical quotation appears more like a business letter describing a written

offer, while a proforma invoice appears exactly the same as a invoice (except with the words "proforma

invoice" written on the document). The proforma invoice essentially serves as a 'quotation' that sets the road to

further negotiations. Some exporters choose to prepare an 'official' quotation, while others prefer to use the
106


proforma invoice as their quotation. In fact, the quotation can contain the same information as a proforma

invoice. Sometimes a firm may send out a written quotation and the importer may ask for a proforma invoice. It

is important to note that there is no standard format for the proforma invoice and one proforma invoice may

differ redically in layout from the next (although there is common agreement on the information that should be

included in the coument). It is a document prepared by the exporter and so will take the format/layout decided

on by the exporter.



                                       Use of a Proforma Invoice
In summary, the proforma invoice is a popular document in exporting because:

      •   It is a widely accepted form of sales offer in the global export community.

      •   It clearly outlines all of the relevant information required to enable an export purchase decision to be

          made by the importer

      •   It is a legal document, which if accepted by the importer is considered the basis of a binding agreement

      •   Banks and other financial institutions will commonly accept proforma invoices in order to establish a

          Letter of Credit on behalf of the importer

      •   The commercial invoice is almost identical to the proforma invoice (except for the title) and is thus easy

          to prepare, thus minimising the possibility of errors.

Details Pertinent to the Proforma Invoice
The following details are pertinent to the setting up of the proforma invoice and need careful attention:

      •   The document title should clearly state "Proforma Invoice"

      •   The name of the exporter (referred to as the shipper) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail),
          including physical (not postal) address

      •   The name of the importer (referred to as the consignee, meaning the person or firm to whom the goods
          are to be sent) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail), including physical (not postal) address (In
          the case of transshipment, there may be an intermediate consignee and their contact details and address
          should then also be included on the invoice.)
107


      •   If the person or firm buying the goods (the importer) is not the same as the person or firm to whom the
          goods are being sent, then you should include both their contact details and addresses in the proforma
          invoice

      •   The name of the person and company to notify once shipment has taken place and their contact details
          and physical address (here the contact details such as telephone, fax and cell number and e-mail address
          are more important than the physical address)

      •   A proforma invoice reference number

      •   An order number or similar reference to correspondence between the supplier and importer

      •   The date of issue of the proforma invoice (the 'quotation date') - quite important

      •   A complete, detailed and clear description of the goods in question, incorporating the appropriate HS
          codes and brandmarks if applicable (here the importer may ask you to remove these codes as they may
          not be the same in the importing country and may thus incur additional or higher duties to the importer's
          detriment because of their inadvertent misuse)

      •   The quantity of goods in question, including the number of units/items

      •   The packing details, including their external dimensions, cubic capacity, weight, numbers and contents
          of each package shipped, and kinds of packaging involved (pallets, boxes, bags, etc.)

      •   The grand total price of the goods for the whole consignment

      •   Where applicable, the unit prices should be indicated - the unit price multiplied by the number of
          units/items should be reflected in the line total. The various line totals (in the case where different items
          are included in the same commercial invoice, or where additional services are itemised in the invoice),
          should add up to the total price for the whole consignment (also referred to as the 'Grand Total')

      •   The currency in which the goods will be sold (e.g. US dollars or rands)

      •   The type and amount of any discount given, where applicable

      •   The likely delivery schedule and delivery terms

      •   The payment methods (for example cash in advance, documentary collection, L/C, etc.)

      •   The payment terms (for example 30 days on sight)

      •   The Incoterms to be used (Incoterms 2000 - FAS, CIF, CFR, DDP, etc.)

      •   Who is responsible for the banking fees and other related costs (insurance and freight costs are covered
          by the incoterms in question)
108


      •   What the freight and insurance charges are

      •   The exporter's banking details

      •   A declaration of the country of origin of the goods

      •   The expected country of final destination

      •   Any freight details such as the port of loading and discharge

      •   Any additional exporter-provided services that should be added to the invoice to come to the grand total

      •   Any transhipment requirements

      •   The validity of the proforma invoice - that is, when does the offer expire (leaving it open-ended could be
          very risky)

      •   Any other information relevant to the order

      •   Make sure the proforma invoice is signed, together with the signature's name written underneath, with
          initials, title and position

Pro forma invoices are not used for payment purposes. A pro forma invoice should include two statements. One

that certifies the pro forma invoice is true and correct and another that gives the country of origin of the goods.

The invoice should also be clearly marked "pro forma invoice."

Pro forma invoices are models that the buyer uses when applying for an import license, opening a letter of credit
or arranging for funds. In fact, it is a good practice to include a pro forma invoice with any international
quotation, regardless of whether it has been requested or not. When final commercial invoices are being
prepared prior to shipment, it is advisable to check with the U.S. Department of Commerce or another reliable
source for any special invoicing requirements that may be required by the importing country.



                                         The Commercial Invoice
After the pro-forma invoice is accepted by the importer, the exporter must prepare a commercial invoice. The

commercial invoice is required by both the exporter (to obtain the necessary export documents to enable the

consignment to be exported, to prove ownership and to enable payment) and importer (who requires the

commercial invoice to facilitate the import of the goods into the country in question). In exporting, the
109


commercial invoice is considered a very important document as it serves as the starting or initiating document

that underpins the rest of the export transaction.

The commercial invoice is essentially a bill (i.e. invoice) from the seller (the exporter) to the buyer (the

importer) describing the parties to the agreement, the goods to be sold, and the terms involved, as agreed

between the exporter and importer. As such, the commercial invoice is the final bill exchanged between the

seller and the buyer. The commercial invoice will normally be presented on the exporter's letterhead and will be

addressed to the importer. It should contain full details of the consignment, including price and other related

costs, in order to facilitate customs clearance. It must also be signed and dated. Freight and insurance, when

included in the selling price, should be itemised separately as these charges are not subject to duty in certain

countries. It is important that the commercial invoice clearly differentiates between the dutiable component of

the order (the market value of the order), any other typically non-dutiable charges such as freight and insurance,

and the total invoice value of the order. The commercial invoice is used by Customs authorities throughout the

world for assessing Customs duties, inspection purposes, and for the keeping of statistics.

Custom’s and Consular Invoices
Some countries, however, may require the commercial invoice to be completed on their own specified forms -

such commercial invoices are known as "Customs' invoices" and may be provided in lieu of or in addition to the

standard commercial invoices referred to above. In addition, a "consular invoice" is required by certain

countries. The consular invoice must be prepared in the language of the destination country and can be obtained

from the country's consulate, and often must be "consularised" (i.e. stamped by an authorised Consul official in

the exporting country).



From the Proforma to the Commercial Invoice
There is usually very little, if any, difference between the final proforma invoice accepted by the importer and

the commercial invoice, except that the one is titled "Proforma Invoice", while the other is titled "Commercial

Invoice". Although the proforma invoice comes before the commercial invoice, the proforma invoice really

only serves as a means of negotiating the actual contract. The proforma invoice is the 'offer' put to the importer
110


by the exporter. The importer may accept the terms specified in the proforma invoice, but a more likely scenario

is that the importer will negotiate some of these terms with the exporter. There may be some backward and

forward communication between the exporter and importer before the importer finally agrees to the transaction.

Once the importer indicates that he/she is happy with the terms of the contract as outlined in the proforma

invoice, the exporter will then be requested to provide the importer with a commercial invoice. The commercial

invoice should reflect the final (agreed-upon) profroma invoice exactly - any deviances will result in problems

executing the transaction and/or receiving payment.

Based on the terms specified in this commercial invoice, the importer will instruct his/her bank (referred to as

the issuing bank) to issue a letter of credit (L/C). This L/C (or the documentation associated with any other form

of payment) will also need to reflect the terms specified in the commercial invoice exactly, while all subsequent

documentation must reflect the terms of the L/C; there can be no exceptions. From this explanation, it is clear

that the commercial invoice plays a central role in an export transaction.

What should appear in the Commercial Invoice?
The following details should appear in the commercial invoice:
      •   The document title should clearly state "Commercial Invoice"
      •   The name of the exporter (referred to as the shipper) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail),
          including physical (not postal) address
      •   The name of the importer (referred to as the consignee, meaning the person or firm to whom the goods
          are to be sent) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail), including physical (not postal) address (In
          the case of transshipment, there may be an intermediate consignee and their contact details and address
          should then also be included on the invoice.)
      •   If the person or firm buying the goods (the importer) is not the same as the person or firm to whom the
          goods are being sent, then you should include both their contact details and addresses in the commercial
          invoice
      •   The name of the person and company to notify once shipment has taken place and their contact details
          and physical address (here the contact details such as telephone, fax and cell number and e-mail address
          are more important than the physical address)
      •   A commercial invoice reference number
      •   A purchase order number or similar reference to correspondence between the supplier and importer
      •   The date of issue of the commercial invoice
111


      •   A complete, detailed and clear description of the goods in question, incorporating the appropriate HS
          codes and brandmarks if applicable (here the importer may ask you to remove these codes as they may
          not be the same in the importing country and may thus incur additional or higher duties to the importer's
          detriment because of their inadvertent misuse)
      •   The quantity of goods in question, including the number of units/items
      •   The packing details unless provided in a separate packing list, including their external dimensions, cubic
          capacity, weight, numbers and contents of each package shipped, and kinds of packaging involved
          (pallets, boxes, bags, etc.) - if a separate packing list is used, reference should be made in the
          commercial invoice to the packing list
      •   The grand total price of the goods for the whole consignment
      •   Where applicable, the unit prices should be indicated - the unit price multipled by the number of
          units/items should be reflected in the line total. The various line totals (in the case where different items
          are included in the same commercial invoice, or where additional services are itemised in the invoice),
          should add up to the total price for the whole consignment (also referred to as the 'Grand Total')
      •   The currency in which the goods will be sold (e.g. US dollars or rands)
      •   The type and amount of any discount given, where applicable
      •   The likely delivery schedule and delivery terms
      •   The payment methods (for example cash in advance, documentary collection, L/C, etc.)
      •   The payment terms (for example 30 days on sight)
      •   The Incoterm to be used (Incoterms 2000 - FAS, CIF, CFR, DDP, etc.)
      •   Who is responsible for the banking fees and other related costs (insurance and freight costs are covered
          by the incoterm in question)
      •   What the freight and insurance charges are
      •   The exporter's banking details
      •   A declaration of the country of origin of the goods
      •   The expected country of final destination
      •   Any freight details such as the port of loading and discharge
      •   Any additional exporter-provided services that should be added to the invoice to come to the grand total
      •   Any transhipment requirements
      •   The validity of the commercial invoice - that is, when does the offer expire (leaving it open-ended could
          be very risky)
      •   Any other information relevant to the order
      •   Make sure the commercial invoice is signed, together with the signature's name written underneath, with
          initials, title and position
112



Commercial Invoices are the Basis for Assessing Duties and Statistics
Commercial invoices are often used by governments to determine the true value of goods when assessing
customs duties and recording trade statistics. Governments that use the commercial invoice to control imports
will often specify its form, content, and number of copies, language to be used, and other characteristics.

Examples of commercial invoice
•     Unzco commercial invoice
•     Meridian commercial invoice
•     BellAir commercial invoice

                                    Incoterms or Terms of Sale
In any sales agreement, it is important that there is a common understanding of the delivery terms since

confusion over their meaning can result in a lost sale or a loss on a sale. The terms in international business

transactions often sound similar to those used in domestic business, but they frequently have very different

meanings. For this reason, the exporter must know the terms before preparing a quotation or a pro forma

invoice.

There are a number of common sale or trade terms used in International Trade to express the sale price and

corresponding rights and responsibilities of the seller and the buyer. The International Chamber of Commerce

regulates these terms.

        Then the exporter and the importer agree on the terms of delivery, they legally bind themselves the four
legal aspects of the transactions, which are:
•          Which cost does the exporter and which are to be paid by the importer pay?

•          Which costs the exporter will obtain and at whose expense?

•          When the title of the goods and responsibility for them passes from the exporter to the importer?

•          Where and when the goods are delivered?

The following are a few of the more frequently used terms in international trade:

EXW-Export Works
The seller’s obligation to the deliver the goods under this term is complete when he passes the goods at the

disposal of the buyer at his own premises and other places named therein, i.e. works, factory, warehouse etc. not

cleared for export and not loaded on any collecting vehicle. This term thus enjoys the minimum for the seller.
113


The buyer has to bear all the cost and risks. This term should therefore not be used if buyer cannot carry out the

export formality himself.

FCA-Free Carrier
Here the seller’s obligation to deliver the goods is complete when he delivers to the carrier nominated by the

buyer at the named place cleared for export. If the chosen place is the exporter’s premises then the seller is

responsible for loading. If it occurs at any other place, the seller is not responsible for unloading.


FAS-Free Alongside Ship
Under this term the seller delivers the goods by placing them alongside the vessel at the named port of

shipment. The buyer bears all the cost and risk of loss of or damage to the goods from that moment. This term

can be used only of sea or inland waterway transport.


FOB-Free on Board
Under this term, the seller fulfills his obligation of delivery when goods pass the ship’s rail at the named port of
shipment. Form that point onwards buyer bears all costs and risks. The seller clears the goods for export. If the
intention is not to deliver the goods across the ship’s rail, FCA terms should be used.

CFR-Cost and Freight
In CFR also, obligation of delivery is fulfilled when the goods pass the ship’s rail at the port of shipment. The
only addition is that the seller also pays the freight necessary to bring the goods to the named port of destination
but the risk of loss of or damage to the goods and also additional costs occurring after the time of delivery are
transferred from seller to the buyer. Under this term the seller clears the goods for export. This term can be used
only for the sea or inland waterway transport. If the parties do not intend to deliver the goods across the ship’s
rail, the term should be used.

CIF-Cost, Insurance and Freight
Here again the delivery point is the goods passing the ship’s rail in the port of shipment. The seller however
paid the cost and freight necessary to the named port of destination and contracts for insurance and pays the
insurance and pays the insurance premium and the risk of loss of or damage to the goods and additional costs
occurring after the time of delivery at transferred from the seller to the buyer. The seller obtains the insurance
only for the minimum cover. If the buyer whishes to have a greater cover, he would either need to agree with
the seller expressly or to make his own extra insurance arrangements. Clearance of goods for export is the
114


responsibility of the seller under this term as well. It can be used for sea and inland waterway transport. If the
parties do not intend to deliver the goods across the ship’s rail, the CIP terms should be used.

CPT-Carriage Paid To
It denotes that seller delivers to the carrier nominated by him. If subsequent carriers are used, the risks pass
when the goods have been delivered to the first carrier. The must in addition pay the cost of carriage to bring the
goods to the named destination. The buyer bears all the risks and any cost occurring after the goods have been
so delivered. Here too, obtaining the export clearance is the responsibility of the seller. It can be used for any
mode of transport including multi-modal transport.

FAO/FOB Airport
'FOB Airport' is based on the same main principle as the ordinary FOB term. You fulfill your obligation by
delivering the goods to the air carrier at the airport of departure. Without the buyer's approval delivery at a town
terminal outside the airport is not sufficient, your obligations with respect to costs and risks do not extend to the
arrival of the goods at the destination.

CIP-Carriage and Insurance Paid To
The term corresponds to CPT except that under CIP the seller also to procure insurance against risk of loss of
or damage to the goods during the carriage. The seller therefore has to obtain the insurance and pay the
insurance premium for a minimum cover. For any additional cover, the buyer needs to either have express
arrangements with the seller or make his own arrangement. Here again if subsequent carriers are used, the risks
passes when the goods have been delivered to the first carrier and clearance of goods for export is the
responsibility of the seller. The term can be used for any mode of transport including multi-modal transport.

DAF-Delivered At Frontier
Under this term the seller delivers the goods by placing them at disposal of the buyer on arriving means of
transport not unloaded, cleared for export but not cleared for imports at the named point/place at the frontier but
before the custom border at the adjoining country. Since the term frontier includes the frontiers of the country of
export naming the point and the place in the term is of vital importance. For making the seller responsible for
the unloading of the goods and to bear the risk and cost therefore explicit working to this effect need to be
included in the contract. The term can be used for any mode of transport when goods are to be delivered at the
land frontier. When the delivery is to take place in the port of destination on board, a vessel or on the quay, the
DES or DEQ terms should be used.

DES-Delivered Ex Ship
115


This term applies that the seller delivers the goods by placing them at the disposal of the buyer on the board, the
ship not cleared for import at the named port of destination. The seller bears all the cost and the risk involved in
bringing the goods to the named port of destination before their discharge. If the parties intend the seller to bear
the cost and risk of discharging goods then the DEQ term should be used. This term can be used for sea or
inland waterways or multimode transport on a vessel in the port of destination.

DEQ-Delivered Export Quay
The point of delivery at this term moves to the quay not cleared for export at the named port of destination. The
seller bears the cost of discharging the goods in quay in addition to the cost of risk involved as per the term
DES. The term DEQ has been modified in the incoterms 2000 and is a total reversal from the previous
incoterms version. Under the modified DEQ term the buyer clears the goods for imports and pays all
formalities, duties, taxes and other charges. If the buyer still wants the seller to undertake import clearance, it
should be made clear by adding an explicit warning. This term can be used only when the goods are to be
delivered by sea or inland waterways or multimode transport on discharging from a vessel onto the port of
destination. If the parties intend to include in the seller’s obligation the risk and cost of handling of the goods
from the quay to another place (warehouse, terminal transportation station) in or outside the port, the DDU or
DDP should be used.

DDU-Delivered Duty Unpaid
This term can be used irrespective of the mode of transport, but when the delivery is to take place in the port of
destination on board, the vessel or on the quay, the DES or DEQ terms should be used. Under DDU, the seller
delivers the goods to the buyer not cleared for import, not unloaded from any arriving means of transport at the
named place of destination. The seller bears the cost and the risk involved in bringing goods there to other than,
where applicable, any duty of import in the country of destination. The term duty includes the responsibility for
and the risk in the carrying out the customs formalities, the payment of such formalities, custom duties, taxes
and other charges. Such duty has to be borne by the buyer, so also any costs and risks caused by his failure to
clear the goods for import in time. If the intention is to make the seller carry out customs formalities and bears
the risks resulting there from as well as some of the costs payable upon import of goods. This should be made
clear by adding explicit wording to this effect in the contract of sale. The responsibility, risks and costs for
unloading or reloading of the buyer or the seller.

DDP-Delivered Duty Paid
Under the term the seller delivers the goods to the buyer cleared for imports but not unloaded from any arriving
means of transport at the named place of destination. Thus all cost and risk involved in bringing the goods there
to including, wherever applicable, any duty for import in the country of destination. Thus the term represents
minimum obligation to the buyer and maximum obligation to the seller. It should, therefore not be used if the
116


seller is unable to obtain the import clearance. It the parties wish the buyer to bear all risks and costs of import
the DDU term should be used.

                                      EXPORT PROCESS
                                                  Enquiry



                                                 Quotation



                                                Order confirmation



                                                  Letter of Credit



                                               Production planning



                                              Production of material



                                                     Dispatch



                                     Preparation of Pre-shipment documents



                                                  Arrival at port



                                                     Shipment



                                     Preparation of Post-shipment documents



                                         Document negotiation with bank



                                                Payment realization
117


                                               Fig. 3: Export Process
                                 PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT
There are various steps involved for the proper procedure of export of a product. These are as follows:
•     RECEIPT OF AN ENQUIRY.
•     CHECK ON RESTRICTIONS ON FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND IMPORT IN THE IMPORTER’S
      COUNTRY.
•     SCRUITINISE THE ORDER.
•     ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THE ORDER.
•     ARRANGING FOR GOODS.
•     EXPORT LICENCE.
•     CENTRAL EXCISE CLEARANCE.
•     APPLY TO EXPORT INSPECTION COUNCIL OF INSPECTION.
•     APPLY FOR MARINE INSURANCE POLICY, IF IT IS A C.I.F. QUOTATION.
•     ISSUE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CLEARING AND FORWARDING AGENT.
•     CLEARING AND FORWARDING AGENTS ROLE FOR SHIPPING AND CUSTOMS AT PORT.
•     DOCUMENTS RETURNED BY THE FORWARDING AGENTS.
•     SHIPPING ADVICE TO IMPORTER.
•     PRESENTATION OF DOCUMENTS BY THE BANK.
•     CENTRAL EXCISE REBATE.
•     DUTY ENTITLEMENT PASSBOOK SCHEME

STEP 1:- Receipt of an Enquiry
It is not possible to attend personally to all of these enquiries, as it would not be economical to do so. The best
way to do this is to ask the enquirers themselves to supply information about their business.
If the enquirer is well established, he will be glad to give the information asked for, but if he refuses to do so
than it is fair evidence that his intensions are not good.
The exporter after having satisfied himself that the enquirer abroad is a fit person and is capable of meeting his
obligations should give him the details of his business.
STEP 2:- Check on Restrictions on Foreign Exchange and Import in                             the      Importer’s
Country
When the order is received its first decision is based upon the approval of credit. For example: War or any other
disturbances in the buyer’s country could lead to the restriction of transaction.
Therefore if the exporter is dealing with a well experienced importer, the latter will furnish full information with
reference to foreign exchange restrictions and import Licenses while placing the initial order.
STEP 3:- Scruitinise the Order
118


The exporter should carefully scrutinize and check the contents of an export before its confirmation. If should
be broadly in accordance with the ‘elements of contract’ which might have been conveyed to the overseas
buyer, received along with the duplicate copy duly signed of export contract. The export should be scrutinized
on the following aspects:
      •   Terms of payment
      •   Documents
      •   Delivery schedule
STEP 4:- Acknowledgement of Order
In this step the order is to be acknowledged. The order must be acknowledged before the exporter states that
whether he would be able to fill it or not.
The acknowledgement should contain the essential features concerning the shipment which the exporter should
know.
STEP 5:- Arranging the Goods
As soon as the export order has been confirmed or finalized, preparations are made for the production or
procurement of goods to be exported.
STEP 6:- Export License
If the item being exported requires an export License, the same should be procured by the exporter from the
Licensing authority, i.e., chief Controller of imports and Exports.
STEP 7:- Central Excise Clearance
The excisable goods can be exported outside India either under claim for rebate of excise duty or under bond.
STEP 8:- Apply to Export Inspection Council for Inspection
Exporter should apply to EIC for pre-shipment inspection. Under the EIC an inspector will carry out the quality
control and inspection for exportable products.
After carrying out inspection the consignment is found to confirm to the prescribed specification.
STEP 9:- Apply for Marine Insurance Policy, if it is A C.I.F. Quotation
As soon as the goods are ready for export, the exporter has to apply to insurance company for an insurance
cover/policy as the case may be. The policy would be for C.I.F. value plus 10% to cover expenses.
STEP 10:- Issue Instruction to the Clearing and Forwarding Agent
A detailed note is prepared for the clearing and forwarding agent, giving instructions regarding the shipment of
the consignment.
STEP 11:- Clearing    &                                      Forwarding Agents             Role For
Shipping &       Customs                at    the                      Port
The clearing and forwarding agent then prepares the shipping bill and presents them along with the above
documents to the export department of the customs house.
STEP 12:- Documents Returned by the Forwarding Agent
The master document is returned by the clearing and forwarding agent to the exporter along with:
      •   Shipping bill
119


      •   Original L/C
      •   AR-4/AR-4A form in duplicate
      •   Full set of clean-on-board of lading together with required number of non-negotiable copies.

STEP 13: Shipment Advice to Importer
Intimation is sent to the imports, indicating the date of dispatch of goods and the name of ship by which they
have been sent.

STEP 14:- Presentation of Documents by the Exporter of the Bank
The following documents are presented by the exporter for negotiation/collection.
      •   Master Document
      •   GR-1 form
      •   Full set of clean-on-board bill of lading
      •   Original L/C
      •   Bank certificate in prescribed form
      •   Marine Insurance Policy
      •   Export Contract/Order
      •   Bill of Exchange

STEP 15:- Processing of Documents by the Bank
Bank examines the documents with reference to the terms and conditions of the original order and also of the
letter of credit. The exporter’s bank screens the above documents and sends a set of the following documents to
the importer’s bank:
      •   Master Document
      •   Marine Insurance Policy
      •   Negotiable Bill of Lading
      •   Bill of Exchange
STEP 16:- Central Excise Rebate
A claim is filled by the exporter with the concerned maritime collector of Central excise for rebate on central
excise duty.

STEP 17:- Duty Entitlement Passbook Scheme
The exporter should file an application to the Licensing authority for an advance License/special License in
accordance with export/import policy of the country at point of time.

                                        LOGISTICS PROCESS
120


Logistics is the management of the flow of goods, information and other resources, including energy and

people, between the point of origin and the point of consumption in order to meet the requirements of

consumers (frequently, and originally, military organizations). Logistics involve the integration of information,

transportation and inventory, warehousing, material-handling, and packaging.

Logistics Management
Logistics management is that part of the supply chain which plans, implements and controls the efficient,

effective forward and reverse flow and storage of goods, services and related information between the point of

origin and the point of consumption in order to meet customers' requirements. A professional working in the

field of logistics management is called a logistician.

Logistics Management Software
Software is used for logistics automation which helps the supply chain industry in automating the work flow as

well as management of the system. There is very few generalized software available in the new market in the

said topology. This is because there is no rule to generalize the system as well as work flow even though the

practice is more or less the same. Most of the commercial companies do use one or the other custom solution.

But there are various software that is being used within the departments of logistics. Few departments in

Logistics are namely, Conventional Department, Container department, Warehouse, Marine Engineering,

Heavy haulage, Etc.
                                               Importer
The software that is used in these departments are:
          Conventional Department: CVT software / CTMS software
          Container Trucking: CTMS software
                                                                       Planning Dept.
       Warehouse: WMS  Expor
                           t
Note: In Hindalco, all the departments are interconnected with computer network system and the
                        Office
                                             Export
software on which these department works is on the Oracle 11i platform. This software is connected with
                                            Control
Internet and the working in any department in any region of Hindalco will make effect in all over India.
                                              Head

                 A Brief Description of the Flow of Logistics Process
                                                          Production
          Finished Goods                                                         Production
            Warehouse                                                             Process




                                                Packaging
121




                              Fig. 4: Flow of Logistics Process in Brief


First of all Customer or Importer place their order to the company. This is done in the following two ways:
      1. Through Export Office
      2. Directly to Planning Office

1. Through Export Office
For placing their order, Customer or Importer contacts to their respective Export Office. There must be one

Export Control Head who can deal with that order. Export Control Head sends the information about the order

to the Planning department. Planning dept. can make a plan to execute that order and sends the information

about the amount of production to the Production Plant. After production, the product is being sent for

packaging. There packaging should be done according to the demand of the customer. When the product is

being packed, it is being sent to the Finished Goods Warehouse for storage. When the finished product reaches

to the warehouse, it can be informed to the Export Control Head that the product is ready for the delivery to the

customer. From warehouse the product reaches to the Export office and from there it reaches to the respective

Importer’s destination.


2. Directly to Planning Office
122


The second option for the customer to place their order is that they can place their order directly to the planning

office of the company. Rest all the process after planning till warehousing is same as through Export office

process. In this process the product is being delivered to the importer from the Finished Goods Warehouse

directly.


                                      Confirmation of the Export Order
                                                Logistics

                                         Container Indenting Process
                    Warehouse              Inland Transportation           Sea Transportation

             Arrange empty Containers at ICD, Kanpur/Kolkata port based on Export Order

      Storage of                       Stuffing of                                              By Sea
                                By Air in advance based on Production Schedule
                        Indent Container
  Finished Goods                 Finished Goods


            Inform Finished Goods Warehouse for segregating of material as per container load
                           By Roadways                     By Railways

                       Inform Finished Goods Warehouse with details of the Order
                       Fig. 5: Diagram Shows the Sub-Division of Export Logistics Process

               Pre-shipment Export Documentation & stuffing of materials in containers
            Flow of Export Logistics Process Implemented by Hindalco
                   Excise Clearance (Filling ARE-1 form & Excise Invoice, Verification of
                           exporting consignment by Excise Clearance Authority)


                                    Arrival of consignment at Dry Port


                                            Custom Clearance


                                                 Shipment


                                       Post-shipment Documentation


                                          Document Negotiation


                                           Payment Realization
123




                                     Fig. 6: Flow of Export Logistics in Hindalco

Step 1:- First of all, order is being confirmed.

Step 2:- Container Indenting Process
         •      Order for the container is given to the Shipping Line according to the Production schedule.
         •      Container comes via ICD, Kanpur in case of Mumbai Shipment and directly via roadways or
                railways in case of Kolkata Shipment.
         •      A particular number is being allotted in the ICD or Kolkata port before sending it to the factory.
         •      Information is being sent to the warehouse about the availability of containers for the stuffing of
                containers.

Step 3:- According to the information, materials is being segregated as per container load in the Warehouse.

Step 4:- Stuffing of material in the containers is being done as well as Pre-shipment documents is being made
in this step.
124


Step 5:- After the stuffing of material, Excise Clearance office is being informed to do the Excise clearance
process. In this stage ARE-1 form and Excise Invoice is being filled by the exporter.

Step 6:- After the completion of Excise clearance process, stuffed containers is being sent to the respective
port according to their destination.

Step 7:- After the arrival of export consignment at the port, Custom Clearance process is being done by the
Custom clearing authority.

Step 8:- Shipment is being done after the Custom process is cleared.

Step 9:- Post-Shipment documents is being made by the exporter after the shipment of the consignments.

Step 10:- When the post-shipment documents are made, these documents are being sent to the bank for the
negotiation.

Step 11:- After negotiation, the documents are cleared for making payments which exporter receives. This
stage is called Payment Realization stage.



                             EXPORT DOCUMENTATION
Any export shipment involves a number of documents required mainly by the customs or port authorities.

According to the Customs Act, the person Incharge of a conveyance-vessel, vehicle aircraft etc. cannot permit

loading of export cargo at the customs stations unless & until the formal permission given by proper customs

office is presented.

An improved system of documentation for exports announced by the government of India on 31st March, 1991

is fine and should be adopted by the exporters as far as possible. Export documentation work constitute heavy

on our export activity. It’s complex, cumbersome and costly. Some of the procedures that must be followed

when an exporter has marketed his goods and received an order. These procedures often involve a good deal of

documentation. This documentation is one of the major differences between trading in the home country as well

as in foreign country. The document materials to an export sales contract are not many in number.

The documents used differed in size and layout, despite the fact that most of the information requirements are

common to a number of them. Therefore they have to be completed individually.
125



 Importance of Export Documentation
Once the goods are ready, an exporter has to prepare and execute various documents at different stages of

sending the shipment of goods to the importer. These documents are important for two reasons:

      •   As an evidence of shipment and title of goods


      •   For obtaining payment


The various documents are therefore of vital interest to the exporter and the bank which is the usual media of

payment. The documentary requirements are both regulatory and operational in nature and have to comply with

the rules and regulations of the Indian Government as well as the importing country for different type of

products. These requirements are different for different type of products.

Accuracy and completeness are a prime necessity in documents covering export shipments. Any alteration or

addition made by an Authority issuing the documents must be endorsed properly, with the signature of person

issuing the signature of person issuing the documents only. If the documents are not the correct ones, the

importer may not be able to get the goods when the ship arrives.

One of the major purposes of documentation is to provide a specific and complete description of the goods, so

that they can be correctly assessed for import duty. But documentation also plays an important role in transport

arrangements, in payment and credit procedures and in relation to cargo insurance and claims.


 Set of Documents Required For Exports
The following documents are generally required for export of products:

1.        Invoice-in 4 copies plus 10 copies for certification.

2.        Packing List in4 copies.

3.        Mill’s Certificate in 3 copies.

4.        Insurance Certificate in duplicate.

5.        Certificate of Origin in 3 copies.

6.        Bill of Exchange-in duplicate.
126


7.        B/L-full set plus 2 non-negotiable copies.

8.        Material Safety Data Sheets/Analysis Report in 3 copies.

9.        SDF Form & Custom certified Invoice both in original.

10.      Above mentioned L/C in original.


 The Major Documents
Export documentation plays a vital role in international marketing as it facilitates the smooth flow of physical

goods and payments thereof across national frontiers. Export documentation is however complex as the number

concerned authorities to whom the relevant documents are to be submitted.

On the basis of the function to be performed export documents can be classified under four categories:


A. Trade Documents/Commercial Documents
The commercial documents are those by which customs of trade are required for effecting physical transfer of

goods and their title from the exporter to the importer. On an average there are 16 commercial documents. The

following 16 commercial documents are involved in the pre-shipment stage:

       Pro-forma invoice

       Commercial invoice

       Packing list

       Shipping instruction

       Intimation inspection

       Certificate of inspection

       Insurance declaration

       Certificate of insurance

       Shipping order

       Mate’s receipt
127


       Bill of lading

       Application for certificate of origin

       Certificate of origin

       Bill of exchange

       Shipping Advice

       Letter to the bank for collection

Out of 16 documents 14 have been standardized and aligned to one another. Two documents viz; Shipping

Order and Bill of Exchange could not be standardized.


B. Regulatory Documents
These are the documents which are required for complying with the rules and regulations governing export

trade transactions such as foreign exchange regulations, customs formalities, export inspection etc.   The

regulatory documents associated with the pre-shipment stage of an export transaction are as follows:

                Gate Pass-1/gate Pass-2

                AR-4 form

                Shipping bill/bill of export

                Export application/dock Challan/Port trust copy of shipping bill

                Receipt for payment of port charges

                Vehicle chit

                Exchange Control declaration (GR/PP) Forms

                Freight Payment Certificate

                Insurance premium payment certificate

Out of the above 9 regulatory documents, 4 have been standardized.


C. Export assistance documents
128


These are the documents which are required for claiming assistance under the various export assistance

measures or may be in operation from time to time. Presently these refer to import replenishment licenses, cash

compensatory support scheme drawback of central excise & custom duties & packing credit facilities.


D. Foreign documentation
These are the documents which are required by the importer in order to satisfy the requirements of his

governments. These include:

       Certificate of origin

       Consular invoice

       Quality control certificate etc.

Export documents can be classified into two categories depending upon the specific requirements:
      •   Regulatory

      •   Operational



 Need for Export Documents
Export documents have to be prepared for various purposes:
      •    Declaration of exports as per exchange control regulation of the country.

      •    Transport of the goods.

      •    Customs clearance of the goods

      •    Other purposes.



 Significance of Some Export Documents
Some of the principal documents are discussed as follows:
      •   Letter of credit

      •   Export invoice

      •   Packing list

      •   Certificate of origin
129


      •   Bill of lading

      •   Shipping order/mate’s receipt

      •   Shipping bill

      •   Marine insurance policy


     Letter of Credit
Letter of credit is an undertaking by the importer’s bank that if the exporter exports the goods and produces

documents as stipulated in the letter, the bank would make payment to the exporter. “Letter of credit” is the

most important single document in international trade. It forms the basis of very large volume of world trade.

Letter of credit provides great security to the exporter. “It is an arrangement by means of which (issuing bank)

acting at the request of a customer (Applicant), undertakes to pay to a third party (Beneficiary) a predetermined

amount by a given date according agreed stipulation and against presentation of stipulated documents.”


• Salient Features
♦ It is an undertaking by the bank.

♦ It is an undertaking to make payment.

♦ It is an undertaking to make on behalf of the person.

♦ It is an undertaking given to the third party.

♦ It is an undertaking given to the third person. (A person other than the one on whose behalf it is given)

♦ It is a conditional undertaking, payment being subjected to compliance with some conditions.


• Parties to A Letter of Credit
A documentary credit has got four parties, namely:
•     APPLICANT (opener)

•     ISSUING BANK

•     BENIFICIARY
130


•     ADVISING BANK


• Mechanism of L/C
•     Is to make payment to the order of a third party (the beneficiary), or is to accept and pay bills of exchange

      drawn by the beneficiary; or

•     Authorizes another bank to effect such payment or to accept and pay such bill of exchange; or

•     Authorizes another bank to negotiate, against stipulated documents, provided that the terms and conditions

      of the credit are complied with.




• Types of a Letter of Credit
•     Revocable Letter of Credit: - It is a credit which can be revoked. A revocable L/C is the one which

      can be cancelled or amended by the issuing bank at any time without prior notice to the beneficiary.

      Revocable credits indicate the nature by a specific clause addressed to the advising bank.

•     Irrevocable Letter of Credit: - It is a firm undertaking on the part of issuing bank and cannot be

      cancelled or amended without the consent of the parties to L/C, particularly the beneficiary. An irrevocable

      credit constitutes a definite undertaking of the issuing bank to accept or pay bills drawn on another bank or

      make payment.

•     Payment Credit: - It is a credit which will be paid at sight basis against presentation of requisite

      documents to the designated paying bank. In a payment credit, beneficiary may or may not be called upon

      to draw a draft.

•     Deferred Payment Credit: - It is a usance credit where payment will be made by designated bank, on
      respective due dates.

•     Acceptance Credit: - It is similarly to defer payment credit except for the fact that in this credit

      drawing of a usance draft is a must. Under this credit, drafts must. Under this credit, drafts must be drawn

      on the specified bank.
131


•     With recourse without recourse credit
•     Revolving letter of credit
•     Confirmed letter of credit
•     Transferable credit
•     Revolving credit
•     Transit credit
•     Bank to back credit
•     The sight credit
•     Usance credit
•     The deferred payment credit.

 Export Invoice
•     Commercial Invoice
It is one of the most important documents issued by the seller in the standardized format. The invoice is usually
made out of the full realizable amount of the Trader term. The invoice should be strictly as per the contract of
sale and must be signed by the seller or the person on his behalf.

•     Consular Invoice
A consular invoice is required to be prepared in a prescribed format and it should be signed/certified by the

council of the importing country located in the country of export. The main purpose of consular invoice is to

enable the importer’s country to collect accurate and authenticated information about the value, volume, quality,

source etc of the import for assessing Import duties and for other statistical purposes. It helps the importer to

get cleared the goods through the customs without any undue delay. This document is required mainly by the

Latin American countries like Kenya, Tanzania, Nigeria, Mauritius, New Zealand etc.


 Packing List
Packing list may be shown on invoice or separately and should contain item by item, the contents of cases or

containers or of a shipment with its weight and description set forth in such a manner as to permit checks of the

contents by the customs on arrival at the port of destination.

         The packing list is a relatively simpler document and the whole of the information can be reproduced

from the master by masking information not desired on the packing list. Special information, if any can be
132


given in the blank space in the lower third position of the document. It is a list showing the details of goods

contained in each Parcel shipment. Packing list has to be prepared in the Aligned document from.

 Bill of Lading
A Bill of lading is a document issued by the sipping company or its agent, acknowledging the receipt of goods
for carriage which are deliverable to the consignee or his assignee in the same condition as they were received.
A bill of lading serves the following purposes:
      •     It is a receipt of goods received by the shipment company.
      •      A Contract with the carrier: it contains the terms of contract between the shipper and the shipping
          company, between stated points at a specific charge.
      •     Evidence of title: It is a certificate of ownership or title to the goods.

• Contents of Bill of lading
The usual form of a bill of lading includes the following information:
      •   Name of the shipping company.
      •   Name of the shipper.
      •   Name and address of the importer.
      •   Name and address of the party to be notified on the arrival of shipment.
      •   Name of the carrying vessel.
      •   Name of the ports of loading and discharge.
      •   Whether freight is payable or whether freight has been paid.
      •   Number of originals in the set of bill of lading documents.
      •   Marks and number identifying goods.
      •   Brief description of the goods (including weights and dimensions).
      •   Number of packages.
      •   Signature of ship’s master or his agent.
      •   Date on which goods were received for shipment.
      •   Signature of the exporter (or his agent) and his designation applicable.

• Importance of Bill of Lading
      •     It is a contract between the shipper and the shipping company for the carriage of goods to the port of
          destination.
      •     It is an acknowledgement indicating that the goods mentioned in the document have been received on
          the board for the purpose of shipment.
133


      •    It issue for claiming incentives offered by the government to exporters.

 Marine Insurance Policy
The safe conduct of the goods from the time it leaves the exporter’s godowns and till it reaches the warehouse

of the importer is what all the parties in the transaction pray for. It depends upon the safety of the goods during

the voyage and safety of the vessel that carries the goods. Marine insurance Policy offers the desired cover

against the loss or damage of the goods during the transit. It allows a free flow of international trade. In India

Marine insurance is governed by the marine Insurance act’ 1963. Section 3 of the act defines a contract of

marine insurance as “as agreement in which the insurer undertakes to indemnify the assured in the manner and

to the extent thereby agreed”.

•     Nature of Marine Cargo Insurance
      •   Parties

      •   Insurable interest

      •   Utmost good faith

      •   Indemnity

      •   Assignment


 Certificate of Origin
This certificate certifies the place of origin of the merchandise’ Besides the federation of Indian Chamber of

Commerce and Industry, EPC’s and various other trade associations have been authorized government of India

to issue certificate of origin. These certificates are important in case of shipments to countries which have

preferential rates of tariff for Indian goods.

Certificates of origin are issued by Chamber of commerce on their own printed forms differing in sizes and

layout.   The standard documents in respect of certificate of origin are included in the series of aligned

documents.

A Certificate of origin declares the place of actual manufacture or growth of the goods. A country may place

restrictions on imports from certain countries.
134



 Shipping Order/Mate’s Receipt
When a cargo is loaded on the ship the commanding officer of the ship will issue a receipt called the mate’s

receipt for the goods. The mate receipt is first handed over the port trust authorities so that all the port dues are

paid by the exporter to the port trust.

The bill of lading is prepared by the shipping agent only after the male receipt has been obtained.

The aligned shipping order and the mate’s receipt have been prepared after examining the forms of the two

documents issued by the different shipping companies. The information required in these documents can be

reproduced with great ease from the master. The issuance of these documents in the standard from will also

facilitate the processing of documents at various stages.


 Shipping Bill
Shipping bill is required by the customs. It is only after the shipping bill is stamped by the customs that cargo is

allowed to be carted to the docks. The aligned shipping bill has been prepared after taking into consideration

the requirement of custom’s public notice no. 39 which suggests a uniform shipping bill for different categories

of exports. Basically shipping bill is of four types:

      •   Export duty/cess
      •   Free of duty/cess
      •   Entitlement to duty drawback
      •   Re-export of imported goods.
The format presented for shipping bill is as under:
      •   White shipping bill.
      •   Green shipping bill.
      •   Yellow shipping bill.
      •   Pink shipping bill.
Where goods are to be cleared by the Land customs, Bill of export is prepared instead of shipping bill.


 Bill of Exchange
A bill of exchange is an instruction by the exporter (drawer) to the (importer) or the importer’s bank to make

payment of the amount mentioned in it. A bill of exchange is a negotiable instrument and is governed by the
135


Negotiable Instruments Act in India and by similar enactments in other countries. The Negotiable Instruments

Act defines a bill of exchange as “an instrument in writing containing an unconditional order, signed by the

maker directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to or order of a certain person or to the

bearer of instrument”. A bill of exchange is also called as draft contains an order from the credit to the debtor to

pay a specified amount to a person mentioned therein.

There are three parties to B/E.
       •     The Drawer (exporter):- The person who executes the B/E.
       •    The Drawee (importer):- The person on whom the B/E is drawn and who is required to meet the terms
           of the document.
       •     The Payee (the exporter’s bank):- The party to receive the payment.

• Types of Bill of Exchange
       •     Sight and usance bills.
       •     D/A and D/P bills.
       •     Inland and foreign bill.


 GR Form
The RBI to ensure that the foreign exchange receipts in respect of exports are repatriated to India has prescribed

this form. This has to be prepared in duplicate. The original copy has to be submitted to the customs authorities

at the port of shipment. This is sent to the RBI directly by the customs authorities. The duplicate copy is

submitted to the negotiating bank along with the other documents after shipment of goods. The negotiating bank

sends the duplicate copy to the RBI.



 Common Defects in Documentation
The bank making payment on behalf of its foreign correspondent must verify that all documents & drafts

conform precisely to the terms & conditions of the L/C. to avoid payment delays, the beneficiary should prepare

& examine all documents carefully before presenting them to the paying bank. Paying banks find that the

following discrepancies between the documents & the letter of credit occur most frequently:

  i.         Drafts are presented after L/C has expired or after time for shipment has expired.
 ii.         Invoice value or draft exceeds amount available under L/C.
136


  iii.       Charges included in the invoice are not authorized in the L/C.
   iv.       Amount of insurance coverage is inadequate or coverage does not include risks required by the L/C.
   v.        Insurance document is not endorsed and/or countersigned.
   vi.       Date of insurance policy or certificate is later than the date on bill of lading.
  vii.      Bills of lading are not “clean” that is, they bear notations that qualify good order & condition of
         merchandise of its packing.
 viii.       Bills of lading are not marked “On Board” when so required by L/C.
   ix.     “On Board” endorsement or charges on bills of lading are not signed by carrier or its agent or initialed by
         party who signed bills of lading.
   x.        “On Board” endorsement is not dated.
   xi.       Bills of lading are not endorsed.
  xii.     Bills of lading are made out “to order” (Shipper’s order, Blank endorsed) where L/C stipulates “Straight”
         (direct to consignee bills of lading or vice versa.
 xiii.       Bills of lading do not indicate, “Freight prepaid” as stipulated in the L/C.
 xiv.        B/L are not marked “Freight prepaid” when freight charges are included in invoice.
  xv. Descriptions, marks & nos. of merchandise are not same on all documents presented or are not as required
         by L/C.
 xvi.        Not all documents required by L/C are presented.
xvii.      Invoice states “used”, “Second hand” or “rebuilt” merchandise when L/C does not authorize such
         condition.
xviii.      Invoice does not specify shipment terms (C & F, CIF, FOB, etc) as stated in L/C.
 xix.       Invoice is not signed as L/C requires.



                            Process of Getting Custom Clearance
137




                                 Fig. 7: Process of Getting Custom Clearance
                 GOVERNMENT POLICIES FOR EXPORT
EXIM Policy
The EXIM Policy was announced by the government on 1st April, 1992 which is effective for a period of 5

years upto March, 1997 co-terminus with the 8th Five year Plan. This is the first time that an EXIM Policy for a

Five Year Plan was announced against earlier policies for 3 years or one year duration. This was done in

response to the appeal made by the trade that frequent and radical changes in the EXIM policy had adversely

affected country’s export efforts and the credibility of the Indian exporters abroad.

The changes in the present EXIM Policy announced on 31st March, 1995 are a result of the intense interaction

between trade and industry. One of the highlights of revised policy is the widening of the scope of the Export

Promotion Capital Goods (EPCG) scheme to provide for zero duty import of capital goods of a value of at least

Rs. 20 crores.

Exports and imports in India are governed by the EXIM policy published by the Director General of Foreign

trade (DGFT).
138


The EXIM policy allows imports and exports from/to any country in the world except Fiji, Iraq, Yugoslavia

(Serbia and Montenegro).


 Main Objectives of EXIM Policy
      •   Globalization of India’s foreign trade.

      •   Augmenting exports by facilitating access to imported inputs.

      •   Promoting efficient and internationally competitive import substitution.

      •   Encouraging high and internationally accepted standards of quality.

      •   Transparency in the export-import policies, minimization of quantitative restriction/licensing and other

          discretionary controls.

      •   Strengthening and stimulating the country’s research and development capabilities.

      •   Simplifying and streamlining procedures governing imports and exports.


                                     EXPORT INCENTIVES
The Government of India has framed several schemes to promote exports and to obtain foreign exchange. These

schemes grants incentive and other benefits. The few important export incentives, from the point of view of

indirect taxes are briefed below:


Free Trade Zones (FTZ)
Several FTZs have been established at various places in India like Kandla, Noida, Cochin, etc. No excise duties

are payable on goods manufactured in these zones provided they are made for export purpose. Goods being

brought in these zones from different parts of the country are brought without the payment of any excise duty.

Moreover, no customs duties are payable on imported raw material and components used in the manufacture of

such goods being exported. If entire production is not sold outside the country, the unit has the provision of

selling 25% of their production in India. On such sale, the excise duty is payable at 50% of basic plus additional

customs or normal excise duty payable if the goods were produced elsewhere in India, whichever is higher.


Electronic Hardware Technology Park / Software Technology Parks
139


This scheme is just like FTZ scheme, but it is restricted to units in the electronics and computer hardware and

          software         sector.


Advance License/                     Duty Exemption              Entitlement           Scheme       (DEEC)
In this scheme advance license, either quantity based (Qbal) or value based (Vabal), is given to an exporter

against which the raw materials and other components may be imported without payment of customs duty

provided the manufactured goods are exported. These licenses are transferable in the open market            at

          a       price.


Export            Promotion              Capital          Goods         Scheme         (EPCG)
According to this scheme, a domestic manufacturer can import machinery and plant without paying customs

duty or settling at a concessional rate of customs duty. But his undertakings should be as mentioned below:

                   Customs Duty Rate                                 Export Obligation               Time

      10%                                                4 times exports (on FOB basis) of CIF      5 years
                                                         value of machinery.

      Nil in case CIF value is Rs200mn or more.          6 times exports (on FOB basis) of CIF      8 years
                                                         value of machinery or 5 times exports on
                                                         (NFE) basis of CIF value of machinery.

      Nil in case CIF value is Rs50mn or more for        6 times exports (on FOB basis) of CIF      8 years
      agriculture, aquaculture, animal husbandry,        value of machinery or 5 times exports on
      floriculture, horticulture, poultry and            (NFE) basis of CIF value of machinery.
      sericulture.



                                          Table 2: Undertaking of EPCG

Note:-
      •   NFE stands for net foreign earnings.
      •   CIF stands for cost plus insurance plus freight cost of the machinery.
      •   FOB stands for Free on Board i.e. export value excluding cost of freight and insurance.


Deemed            Exports
The Indian suppliers are entitled for the following benefits in respect of deemed exports:
      •   Refund of excise duty paid on final products
140


      •   Duty drawback
      •   Imports under DEEC scheme
      •   Special import licenses based on value of deemed exports

The following categories are treated as deemed exports for seller if the goods are manufactured in India:

      •   Supply of goods against duty free licenses under DEEC scheme
      •   Supply of goods to a 100 % EOU or a unit in a free trade zone or a unit in a software technology park or
          a unit in a hardware technology park
      •   Supply of goods to holders of license under the EPCG scheme
      •   Supply of goods to projects financed by multilateral or bilateral agencies or funds notified by the
          Finance Ministry under international competitive bidding or under limited tender systems in accordance
          with the procedures of those agencies or funds where legal agreements provide for tender evaluation
          without including customs duty
      •   Supply of capital goods and spares upto 10% of the FOR value to fertilizer plants under international
          competitive bidding
      •   Supply of goods to any project or purpose in respect of which the Ministry of Finance permits by
          notification the import of goods at zero customs duty along with benefits of deemed exports to domestic
          supplies
      •   Supply of goods to power, oil and gas sectors in respect of which the Ministry of Finance permits by
          notification benefits of deemed exports to domestic supplies

Manufacture               under         Bond
This scheme furnishes a bond with the manufacturer of adequate amount to undertake the export of his

production. Against this the manufacturer is allowed to import goods without paying any customs duty, even if

he obtains it from the domestic market without excise duty. The production is made under the supervision

          of      customs        or     excise authority.


Duty Drawback
It means the rebate of duty chargeable on imported material or excisable material used in the manufacturing of

goods in and is exported. The exporter may claim drawback or refund of excise and customs duties being paid

by his suppliers. The final exporter can claim the drawback on material used for the manufacture of export

products. In case of re-import of goods the drawback can be claimed.
141


The following are Drawbacks:
      •   Customs paid on imported inputs plus excise duty paid on indigenous imports.
      •   Duty paid on packing material.

Drawback is not allowed on inputs obtained without payment of customs or excise duty. In part payment of

customs and excise duty, rebate or refund can be claimed only on the paid part.

In case of re-export of goods, it should be done within 2 years from the date of payment of duty when they were

imported. 98% of the duty is allowable as drawback, only after inspection. If the goods imported are used

before its re-export, the drawback will be allowed as at reduced per cent.
142



      Process Involved in Getting Export Incentives

             Shipping Bill for Export of Goods under claim
               for DEPB Scheme is made after shipment


                BRC is prepared for claiming the export
                              incentives


               A bunch of 20-25 Shipping Bills and their
                respective BRCs has been made for one
                             application


             Various data regarding export made are feeded
              in the Excel system for the purpose of online
                       feeding on the DGFT Site


             Necessary application fee in the form of EFT is
                         made through system


                 The application is digitally signed and
              submitted to Jt. DGFT, Varanasi through the
                               Internet Site


             Hard copy of Application form along with E.P.
              copy of Shipping Bills & original BRCs has
              been sent to Jt. DGFT, Varanasi for issuing
                             DEPB License


            After receipt of DEPB license, this license along
             with respective DEPB copy of shipping bills &
            duplicate copy of BRCs & a statement showing
            comprehensive details of claims has been sent to
             respective customs house through the clearing
                         agents for verification




               Fig. 8: Process of Getting Export   Incentives
143




Step 1: – First of all, Shipping Bill has been made for claiming the Export Incentives. It is made as SHIPPING
BILL FOR EXPORT OF GOODS UNDER CLAIM FOR DUTY ENTITLEMENT PASS BOOK (DEPB)
SCHEME. Under this the main things which have been covered are:--
           1. Invoice No. & Date
           2. Custom House agent’s Description
           3. Nature of Contract
           4. Exchange Rate
           5. Currency of Invoice
           6. Statistical Code & Description of Goods & Exim Scheme code where applicable.
           7. Analysis of Export Value
           8. Amount
           9. DEPB Rate
           10. Rate List Sr. No.
           11. Product Group
           12. DEPB No.
           13. LET Export date Passed for Shipment
There are two copies of this document. 1st one is export promotion copy & the 2nd one is DEPB copy. These
document having the stamp of Custom & Excise and the signature & seal of Custom Inspector.

Step 2: – When Shipping Bill has been prepared, after that Bank Realization Certificate (BRC) has been made
for negotiation process in claiming the Export Incentives. This document has two parts; the 1st part contains 17
columns named Invoice no. & date, Shipping Bill no. & date, Description of goods, Bill of Ladings’ no. & date,
Destination, Bill amount, Freight amount, Insurance amount Commission Paid, FOB value, Date of realization
of export proceeds and No., date & category of applicable Licence which has been filled by the exporter. Under
these columns Place, Date, Seal & Signature of the exporter have been mentioned. The 2nd part of this document
contains Bank’s Certificate which has to be filled by the Banker with their authorization seal & signature.
When the exporter gets this BRC, it means that exporter had got the exported amount in his bank account.

Step 3: – After getting the BRC from the bank, one application have been prepared for a bunch of 20-25
Shipping bills and their respective BRCs. This application is in favor of the Jt. Director General of Foreign
Trade (DGFT). Description of application for issue of DEPB license, description of EFT towards the
application fee, description of Export Promotion Copy of Shipping Bills & the description of self-addressed
envelop with a relevant amount of stamp fixed on it have been mentioned in this application.
144


Step 4: – On the DGFT site, there is application software for filling the data regarding export made. For this
purpose various data regarding export made are feeded in the Excel system.

Step 5: – After filling the necessary information regarding export made in the DGFT site, relevant application
fee in the EFT form is made through system.

Step 6: – After that application is digitally signed & submitted to DGFT through the Internet.

Step 7: – A hard copy of application form has been made and along with Export Promotion Copy of Shipping
Bills & original BRCs, it has been sent to Jt. DGFT, Varanasi for issuing DEPB License.

Step 8: – After getting the DEPB license from DGFT, this license along with respective DEPB copy of
shipping bills & original BRCs & a statement showing comprehensive details of claims, it has been sent to
respective customs house through the clearing agents for verification.
The DEPB license from DGFT which an exporter receives after the verification of application regarding export
made under DEPB scheme contains the following:
 1. Authorization Forwarding Letter
 2. DEPB License
 3. Details of the exported items
 4. Application Submission Details
 5. DEPB E-Commerce Version, under this-
      ♦ IEC Details
      ♦ Application Firm Details
      ♦ Nature of Concern
      ♦ Type of Exporter
      ♦ Industrial Registration Details
      ♦ Service Tax Registration Details
      ♦ RCMC Registration Details
      ♦ Status House Details
      ♦ Excise Details
      ♦ VAT Details
      ♦ Past Turnover (Rs. Lakhs)
      ♦ Name & Address of the exporter
      ♦ Payment Details
      ♦ FOB value of Exports
145


      ♦ DEPB Claimed
      ♦ DEPB Applied for
      ♦ DEPB Entitlement for 100%
      ♦ DEPB Entitlement after cut
      ♦ Shipping Bills Details
      ♦ Declaration/Undertaking
      ♦ Signature & Description of the applicant
      ♦ Sign of DGFT
is being covered.


                                       EXPORT FINANCE
Financial assistance to the exporters are generally provided by Commercial Banks, before shipment as well as

after shipment of the said goods. The assistance provided before shipment of goods is known as per-shipment

finance and that provided after the shipment of goods is known as post-shipment finance. Pre-shipment finance

is given for working capital for purchase of raw-material, processing, packing, transportation, ware-housing etc.

of the goods meant for export. Post-shipment finance is provided for bridging the gap between the shipment of

goods and realization of export proceeds. The later is done by the Banks by purchasing or negotiating the export

documents or by extending advance against export bills accepted on collection basis. While doing so, the Banks

adjust the pre-shipment advance, if any, already granted to the exporter.


     Pre-Shipment Finance
An application for pre-shipment advance should be made by you to your banker along with the following
documents:
      •    Confirmed export order/contract or L/C etc. in original. Where it is not available, an undertaking to the
          effect that the same will be produced to the bank within a reasonable time for verification and
          endorsement should be given. An undertaking that the advance will be utilised for the specific purpose
          of procuring/manufacturing/shipping etc., of the goods meant for export only, as stated in the relative
          confirmed export order or the L/C. If you are a sub-supplier and want to supply the goods to the
          Export/Trading/Star Trading House or Merchant Exporter, an undertaking from the Merchant.
146


      •        Exporter or Export/Trading/Star Trading House stating that they have not/will p 7 3 not avail
           themselves of packing credit facility against the same transaction for the same purpose till the original
           packing credit is liquidated. Copies of Income Tax/Wealth Tax assessment Order for the last 2-3 years
           in the case of sole proprietary and partnership firm. Copy of Exporter's Code Number (CNX). Copy of a
           valid RCMC (Registration-cum-Membership Certificate) held by you and/or the Export/Trading/Star
           Trading House Certificate. Appropriate policy/guarantee of the ECGC.
      •      Any other document required by the Bank. For encouraging exports, R.B.I. has instructed the banks to
           grant pre-shipment advance at a concessional rate of interest. The present rate of interest is 10% p.a. for
           pre-shipment advance upto an initial period of 180 days. Pre-shipment advance for a further period of 90
           days is given at the concessional rate of 13% p.a. Banks are free to determine the interest rate for
           advances beyond 270 days and upto 360 days.
Following special schemes are also available in respect of pre-shipment finance:

 •          Exim Bank's scheme for grant of foreign currency pre-shipment credit to exporters for financing cost of
          imported inputs for manufacture of export products.
 •         Scheme of export packing credit to sub-suppliers from export order.
 •         Packing credit for deemed exports.
 •          Pre-shipment Credit in Foreign Currency (PCFC). For further details refer to Nabhi's "How to Borrow
          from Financial and Banking Institutions".


     Post Shipment Finance
Post-shipment finance is the finance provided against shipping documents. It is also provided against duty
drawback claims. It is provided in the following forms:

              Purchase of Export Documents drawn under Export Order: - Purchase or discount
           facilities in respect of export bills drawn under confirmed export order are generally granted to the
           customers who are enjoying Bill Purchase/Discounting limits from the Bank. As in case of purchase or
           discounting of export documents drawn under export order, the security offered under L/C by way of
           substitution of credit-worthiness of the buyer by the issuing bank is not available, the bank financing is
           totally dependent upon the credit worthiness of the buyer, i.e. the importer, as well as that of the exporter
           or the beneficiary. The documents dawn on DP basis are parted with through foreign correspondent only
           when payment is received while in case of DA bills documents (including that of title to the goods) are
           passed on to the overseas importer against the acceptance of the draft to make payment on maturity. DA
           bills are thus unsecured. The bank financing against export bills is open to the risk of non-payment.
           Banks, in order to enhance security, generally opt for ECGC policies and guarantees which are issued in
147


          favor of the exporter/banks to protect their interest on percentage basis in case of non-payment or
          delayed payment which is not on account of mischief, mistake or negligence on the part of exporter.
          Within the total limit of policy issued to the customer, Drawee-wise limits are generally fixed for
          individual customers. At the time of purchasing the bill bank has to ascertain that this Drawee limit is
          not exceeded so as to make the bank ineligible for claim in case of non-payment.

           Advances against Export Bills Sent on Collection: - It may sometimes be possible to avail
          advance against export bills sent on collection. In such cases the export bills are sent by the bank on
          collection basis as against their purchase/discounting by the bank. Advance against such bills is granted
          by way of a 'separate loan' usually termed as 'post-shipment loan'. This facility is, in fact, another form
          of post- shipment advance and is sanctioned by the bank on the same terms and conditions as applicable
          to the facility of Negotiation/Purchase/Discount of export bills. A margin of 10 to 25% is, however,
          stipulated in such cases. The rates of interest etc., chargeable on this facility are also governed by the
          same rules. This type of facility is, however, not very popular and most of the advances against export
          bills are made by the bank by way of negotiation/purchase/discount.

            Advance against Goods Sent on Consignment Basis: - When the goods are exported on
          consignment basis at the risk of the exporter for sale and eventual remittance of sale proceeds to him by
          the agent/consignee, bank may finance against such transaction subject to the customer enjoying specific
          limit to that effect. However, the bank should ensure while forwarding shipping documents to its
          overseas branch/correspondent to instruct the latter to deliver the document only against Trust
          Receipt/Undertaking to deliver the sale proceeds by specified date, which should be within the
          prescribed date even if according to the practice in certain trades a bill for part of the estimated value is
          drawn in advance against the exports.

           Advance against Undrawn Balance: - In certain lines of export it is the trade practice that bills
          are not to be drawn for the full invoice value of the goods but to leave small part undrawn for payment
          after adjustment due to difference in rates, weight, quality etc. to be ascertained after approval and
          inspection of the goods. Banks do finance against the undrawn balance if undrawn balance is in
          conformity with the normal level of balance left undrawn in the particular line of export subject to a
          maximum of 10% of the value of export and an undertaking is obtained from the exporter that he will,
          within 6 months from due date of payment or the date of shipment of the goods, whichever is earlier
          surrender balance proceeds of the shipment. Against the specific prior approval from Reserve Bank of
          India the percentage of undrawn balance can be enhanced by the exporter and the finance can be made
          available accordingly at higher rate. Since the actual amount to be realised out of the undrawn balance,
          may be less than the undrawn balance, it is necessary to keep a margin on such advance.
148


             Advance against Retention Money: - Banks also grant advances against retention money,
          which is payable within one year from the date of shipment, at a concessional rate of interest up to 90
          days. If such advances extend beyond one year, they are treated as deferred payment advances which are
          also eligible for concessional rate of interest.

             Advances against Claims of Duty Drawback: - Duty Drawback is permitted against exports
          of different categories of goods under the 'Customs and Central Excise Duty Drawback Rules, 1995'.
          Drawback in relation to goods manufactured in India and exported means a rebate of duties chargeable
          on any imported materials or excisable materials used in manufacture of such goods in India or rebate on
          excise duty chargeable under Central Excises Act, 1944 on certain specified goods. The Duty Drawback
          Scheme is administered by Directorate of Duty Drawback in the Ministry of Finance. The claims of duty
          drawback are settled by Custom House at the rates determined and notified by the Directorate. As per
          the present procedure, no separate claim of duty drawback is to be filed by the exporter. A copy of the
          shipping bill presented by the exporter at the time of making shipment of goods serves the purpose of
          claim of duty drawback as well. This claim is provisionally accepted by the customs at the time of
          shipment and the shipping bill is duly verified. The claim is settled by customs office later. As a further
          incentive to exporters, Customs Houses at Delhi, Mumbai, Calcutta, Chennai, Chandigarh, and
          Hyderabad have evolved a simplified procedure under which claims of duty drawback are settled
          immediately after shipment and no funds of exporter are blocked.

          However, where settlement is not possible under the simplified procedure exporters may obtain
          advances against claims of duty drawback as provisionally certified by customs.
             Negotiation of Export documents Drawn under L/C: - This aspect has been discussed in
          the chapter on Special Care for negotiation of Export Documents under Letter of Credit.
             Rates       of      Interest:        -The rate of interest depends on the nature of the Bills, i.e.,
          whether it is a demand bill or usance bill. Like pre-shipment, post-shipment finance is also available at
          concessional rate of interest.
          The Present Rates of interest are as under:
          •     Demand Bills for transit period Not exceeding (as specified by FEDAI) 10% p.a.
          •     Usance Bills (for total period comprising usance period of ex-port bills, transit period as specified
               by FED     AI and grace period, wherever applicable:
          •     Upto 90 days 10% p.a.
          •     Beyond 90 days and upto six 12% p.a. months from the date of shipment.
          •     Beyond six months from the 20% date of Shipment (Minimum)
149


           Normal Transit Period: - Foreign Exchange Dealers Association of India (FEDAI) has fixed
          transit period for export bills drawn on different countries in the world. The concept of this transit period
          is that an export bill should normally be realised within that period. The transit period so fixed by
          FEDAI is known as 'Normal Transit Period' and mainly depends on geographical location of a particular
          country.

          Direct and Indirect Bill: - If the currency of the bill is the same as the currency of the country on
          which it is drawn, it is termed as direct bill, e.g. an export bill in US $ drawn on a place in U.S.A.
          However, if the currency of the bill in which it is drawn is different than the currency of the country on
          which it is drawn, it is termed as indirect bill, e.g. an export bill in US $ drawn on a place in Japan. The
          normal transit period fixed for indirect bill is on higher side as compared to transit period fixed for direct
          bills.

          Notional Due Date: - To determine the due date of an export bill we have to consider the following
          3 components: - (1) Normal transit period as fixed by FEDAI, (2) Usance period of the bill and (3)
          Grace period if applicable in the country on which the bill is drawn. Grace period is applicable only in
          the case of Usance bills. The notional due date of an export bill may thus be calculated after adding all
          the above 3 components the concessional rate of interest is chargeable upto the notional due date subject
          to a maximum of 90 days.

          Forfeiting Finance by Authorised Dealers: - Reserve Bank has now permitted the authorised
          dealers (Banks) to arrange forfeiting of medium term export receivables p 7 3 on the same lines as per
          the scheme of EXIM Bank and many International forfeiting agencies have now become active in Indian
          market. Forfeiting may be usefully employed as an additional window of export finance particularly for
          exports to those countries for which normal exports credit is not intended by the commercial banks. It
          must be noted that charges of forfeiting are eventually to be passed on to the ultimate buyer and should,
          therefore, be so declared on relative export declaration forms.

           External Commercial Borrowings: - Proposals for raising foreign currency loans/credits viz.,
          Buyer's Credits, Supplier's Credits or Lines of Credits by firms/companies/lending institutions, banks,
          etc. for financing cost of import of goods, technology or for any other purposes, other than short-term
          loans/credits maturing within one year should first be submitted to government of India, Ministry of
          Finance (Department Economic Affairs), ECB Division, New Delhi for necessary clearance. The
          proposals are considered by the government on merits of each case and in the light of prevailing
          Government policy.

            EXIM Bank Finance: - Besides commercial banks, export finance is also made available by the
          EXIM bank. The EXIM bank provides financial assistance to promote Indian exports through direct
150


       financial assistance, overseas investment finance, term finance for export production and export
       development, pre-shipment credit, lines of credit, re-lending facility, export bills re-discounting,
       refinance to commercial banks, finance for computer software exports, finance for export marketing and
       bulk import finance to commercial banks. The EXIM Bank also extends non-funded facility to Indian
       exports in the form of guarantees. The diversified lending programmed of the EXIM Bank now covers
       various stages of exports, i.e. from the development export markets to expansion of production capacity
       for exports, production for export and post shipment financing. The EXIM Bank's focus is on export of
       manufactured goods, project exports, exports of technology, services and export of computer software.


Hindalco Export Data (From Renukoot Plant)
Although, EXIM bank is assisting finance to the exporters but Hindalco is not availing this facility provided by
the EXIM bank.
                                        HINDALCO’S EXPORTS
                                            (From Renukoot Plant)
                           YEAR                                  QTY. (MT)
                          2003-04                                   20393
                          2004-05                                   32828
                          2005-06                                   36559
                          2006-07                                   35477
                          2007-08                                   39317
                          2008-09                                   34282

                           Table 3: Hindalco’s Export in terms of Quantity (MT)
151




                          SWOT ANALYSIS OF HINDALCO

 STRENGTH
      •   A global leader in value-added high-end aluminium flat rolled products and aluminium can recycle.
      •   It is the largest manufacturer of the entire range of flat rolled products in India & enjoys nearly 60 per
          cent of market share.
      •   The company exports about 17 per cent of its total sales volume of aluminium.
      •   The company has been accorded the Five Star Trading House status in India.
      •   The company's metal is accepted for delivery under the high grade aluminium contract on the London
          Metal Exchange (LME).


 WEAKNESS
      Since I had done my project in Renukoot plant then the only weakness which I found here in Renukoot plant
      is that Marketing process is very difficult from here due to its remote location and it is also very far from
      ports.


 OPPORTUITIES
      • Takeover of Indal is taking Hindalco to the way of increased production to meet the Importer’s
          requirements without any delay in time and it also giving the opportunities to export marketing
          department to secure as much export order due to increased capacity of production.

      • Acquisition of Novelis giving the opportunities to the Hindalco to expand more its global market, since,
          Novelis has the unrivaled capability to provide its customers with a regional supply of technologically
          sophisticated rolled aluminium products throughout Asia, Europe, North America and South America.


 THREATS
      Due to high International Inflation rate, price of the Aluminium is increasing in the International Metal
      Market. As a result, the Aluminium, which was said as the product of poor peoples, now it has been gone far
      from the hands of a middle class people. Now, it becomes a product of high class society. So, poor and
      middle class peoples are searching and getting the alternatives of the Aluminium metal i.e. Iron and Steel
      which is low in cost as comparison to Aluminium now-a-days.
152




                          FINDINGS & RECOMMENDATIONS

 Findings
      •      Hindalco is the leading exporter of Aluminium Semi-Finished products in India.

      •         FIEO (Federation of Indian Export Organisation) has awarded Hindalco as a Five Star Trading

           Houses on their export achievements.

      •       Hindalco is following all the norms as per Central Excise & Customs and other government rules &

           regulations in the export process.

      •      Hindalco is following positive and proactive approach towards export.

      •      Hindalco is exporting from Kolkata and Mumbai port both.

      •      Hindalco is exporting all over the world, from underdeveloped countries to advance countries.

 Recommendations
Hindalco is a reputed Aluminium industry in the world and its products are well accepted in the market but as

we know that there is always a scope of improvement.

Following are the recommendations in all the three areas i.e. Export Process, Export Documentations and

Export Logistics:

 •          Sometimes 3-4% execution of export order has been delayed due to rejection of partial quantity of the

          product due to quality problems and manufacturing defects. So, it is recommended that Hindalco should

          have to keep advance stock or backup products in their warehouse to overcome this problem and to

          execute the order on time.

 •          Some of the Caster product order is being delayed due to limited capacity of the Caster Plant. So, it is

          recommended that Hindalco should have to increase the capacity of their Caster Plant.
153


 •       Hindalco is using Oracle 11i & IVL software system for making export documents. The working of

      this software is from Order management to Shipment. This process is time taking due to partly adoption of

      the software system. So, it is recommended that this software should have been start from Enquiry

      management to Shipment. It would ease in making documents in faster way manual interruption will be

      minimized.

 •      Sometimes there is unavailability of containers for any particular destination occurs. This problem have

      been overcome by helding a meeting and making a successful negotiation process from the shipping line

      companies for the arrangement of empty containers.

 •       Unavailability of tailors due to non-uniformity of production occurs. This problem should have been

      solved by the proper working collaboration of the Marketing & Production department.

 •        Movement of export consignment tailors disturbs due to creation of problems by the Naxalieds in

      Jharkhand and Bihar. This problem will be overcome by the Indian Government only, company have not

      any solution of this problem.

Some other recommendations are:

 •     Company should focus on small-scale industries.

 •     Improved and advanced technologies should be used for better Quality and more Quantity.

 •     Company should focus on CRM (Customers Relationship Management).
154




                                           BIBLIOGRAPHY
Books:
          Khurana P. K., Export Management, 4th Edition, Galgotia Publication Company.
           Philip R. Cateora and John L. Graham, International Marketing, 11th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill
          Publication Company Limited.
          Francis Cherunilam, International Trade and Export Management, 15th Edition, Himalaya Publication
          House.
          Rothor B.S. & J.S. Rathor, Export Management, 6th Edition, Himalaya Publication House.


Magazines:
          Aluminium International Today
          Aluminium Times
          APT – Aluminium Process and Product Technology
          Induction Manual


Internet:
         http://www.unzco.com/basicguide
         http://www.fieo.org
         http://www.wikipedia.com/trade_policy/export_procedures
         http://www.google.co.in
         http://www.altavista.com
         http://www.hindalco.com
         http://www.novelis.com
         http://www.adityabirla.com
         http://www.bxa.doc.gov
155




                  SPECIMEN OF PROFORMA INVOICE

      Exporter                                   Invoice no.   Exporter’s Ref
                                                 & date
                                                 Buyer’s order no. & date
                                                 Other references
      Consignee                                  Buyer
                                                 Country of origin of       Country of
                                                 goods                      Final
                                                                            destination
                                                 Terms of delivery and payment
      Pre-carriage by Place of Receipt by Pre-
                      carrier
      Vessel/Flight   Port of lading
      No.
      Port of         Final destination
      discharge
      Marks and no.   No. and     Description    Quality       Rate         Amount
      of containers   kind of     of goods
                      Pkgs.




                                                                    Signature & date
156




                          SPECIMEN OF PACKING LIST

      Exporter                                    Invoice No. Date
                                                  Buyer’s order no. & date
                                                  Other reference(s)
      Consignee                                   Buyer



                                                  Country of origin of       Country of
                                                  goods                      Final
                                                                             destination




      Pre-carriage by     Place of Receipt by
                          Pre-carrier
      Vessel/Flight       Port of lading
      No.
      Port of discharge   Place of delivery
      Marks & No.s/       No. and kind of Pkgs.   Description    Quality     Remarks
      containers no.                              of goods




                                                                         Signature &
                                                                         date
157



                           SPECIMEN OF CERTIFICATE OF ORIGIN
  Exporter


                                                                                       NAME OF THE
                                                                               CHAMBER OF COMMERCE
  Consignee




  Pre-carriage by                  Place of receipt of Pre-
                                   Carrier
  Vessel                           Port of loading
  Port of discharge                Final destination
                                   No. and kind of packages :
                                                                 Gross weight (kg)
                                   Description of goods
                                                                 Measurement




  Certification :                                                Declaration by Exporter :
  It is hereby certified that this declaration was made before   We hereby declared that the above mentioned goods were
  me and that to the best of my knowledge and believe the        produced in the Indian Union and are shipped to
  above mentioned goods are of Indian origin.
                                                                 Name of the authorized Signatory




                                                                 Place and date of issue

  Place & date of issue

  Signature           Secretary
                                                                 Signature
158



                              SPECIMEN OF BILL OF LADING

      Shipper
                                                                          B/L NO.



      Consignee                                                      NAME AND LOGO
                                                                            OF
                                                                      SHIPPING LINE


      Notify Party




      Local Vessel                    From
      Ocean Vessel                    Port of Lading
      Port of Discharge               Final Destination (if on
                                      carriage)
      Marks & Numbers No. & Kind of Packages; Gross weight(kg) Measurement
                          Description of goods




      Freight details, charges, etc
                                      Shipped on board in apparent good order……………


                                      Freight Payable at              Place & date of time
                                      No. of Original B/L             Signature
      Applicable only when document used as through Bill of Lading
159




      SPECIMEN OF EXPORT QUOTATION WORKSHEET
160
161



             SPECIMEN OF COMMERCIAL INVOICE


                                     1. EXPORTER
                                     2. CONSIGNEE
                                          INTERMEDIATE
                                          CONSIGNEE
                                     3. FORWARDING
                                       AGENT
                                     4. COMMERCIAL
                                       INVOICE
                                          NO.
                                                       5.
                                          CUSTOMER
                                             PURCHASE
                                             ORDER NO.
                                          6. B/L, AWB NO.
                                     a.    COUNTRY    OF
           ORIGIN
      b. DATE OF EXPORT

      c.   TERMS OF PAYMENT
      d. EXPORT REFERENCES
      e. AIR/OCEAN     PORT OF
      f. EMBARKATION

      g.   EXPORTING
162



      h. CARRIER/ROUTE




      i. PACKAGES
      j. QUANTITY
      k. NET WEIGHT/GROSS WEIGHT


      l. DESCRIPTION    OF MERCHANDISE UNIT
      m.      PRICE/TOTAL   VALUE
      n. PACKAGE MARKS
      o. MISC. CHARGES
      p.   CERTIFICATIONS
163




      SAMPLE OF INSURANCE CERTIFICATE
164

Export project var

  • 1.
    1 A Summer Training Report On “VITAL ROLE OF EXPORT PROCESS, EXPORT DOCUMENTATION & EXPORT SERVICES(LOGISTICS) IN THE EXPORT OF FINISHED GOODS PRODUCTS” Of HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED SUMMER INTERNSHIP REPORT IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE AWARD OF FULLTIME MBA SESSION (2008-2010) Preface
  • 2.
    2 Objective of Study The objective of study is to find answer of the some questions, which are important to clearly understand the importance, procedure and role of export documentation for Aluminium & Aluminium products in smooth Export working. The main objectives of doing this project are as follows:- • To study the Export Documentation Process. • To understand the global aluminium industry trends in the major demand and supply center of the world. • To understand the global marketing of Hindalco products. • To understand the Export Market Plan. • To study the Export Process from Order Booking to Shipment. • To understand the overall process involved in the Export Management System of the Hindalco Industries Ltd. • To understand the overall process used by the Hindalco to establish the Export Documentation Process. • To understand the benefits and incentives given by the government to the exporter for boosting up the Indian Export.
  • 3.
    3 Contents Preface Acknowledgements Objective of Study Section 1: Introduction……………………………………………………………...  About Aditya Birla Group………………………………………..……..9  Group Companies ………………………………………………..…....14  Aditya Birla Management Corporation …………………………..……19  At A Glance ……………………………………………………..……..19  Financial Foot Prints……………………………………………..……..20  Hindalco At A Glance……………………………………………..……21  Highlights Of Hindalco Industries limited………………………..……23  Hindalco Overview ………………………………………………..……24  Company Profile…………………………………………………..…….41  Industry At A Glance…………………………………….………..…….42  Aluminium ………………………………………………..……….……42  Copper …………………………………………………...……….……..43  Production Process……………………………………..……….……….45  Extracdion Of Alumina From Bauxite………………………………….46  Extraction Of aluminium From Alumina………………………………..47  Product Profile…………………………………………………………...48  Product Overview ……………………………………………………….49  Aluminium ………………………………………………………………49  Copper……………………………………………………………………49  Primary Aluminium Product……………………………………………..49  Integrated Operation Of Hindalco ……………………….………………51  Production Capacity…………………………………………………….. 52  Organizational Profile of Hindalco Industry Ltd………………...……....54  Product and Brands of Hindalco………………………...………...……..57  Hindalco Product Range………………………………...……...………..65 Section 2: About Flat Rolled Product…………………………………………...….66  Flat Rolled Products (FRPs)…………………………………………........66  Types of FRPs (Export)……………………………………………….......67 Section 3: About International Marketing………………………………………....68  What is International Marketing?................................................................68  What is Global Marketing?..........................................................................69  Advantages and Disadvantages of Global Marketing……………………..69 Section 4: About Export……………………………………………………………..70  What is Export?............................................................................................70  Types of Export……………………………………………………………70
  • 4.
    4  Benefits of Export…………………………………………………………70  Risk from Export…………………………………………………………..72  Why we should Export?...............................................................................74  How to Export?............................................................................................75  Advantages of Export……………………………………………………..76  Process of Export Management…………………………………………...77  Export Cycle………………………………………………………………78 Section 5: Export Marketing………………………………………………………..80  Export Marketing Plan…………………………………………………….80  Practical Suggestion for Export Marketing Plan………………………….80  Tips for Export Marketing………………………………………………...81  Market Entry Strategies: Location of Importers…………………………..82 Section 6: Developing an Export Strategy…………………….…………………....86  Determining Product’s Export Potential………………….……………….90  Assessing Company’s Export Readiness………………….………………90  Developing an Export Plan……………………………….……………….90 Section 7: Developing a Market Plan…………………………..…………………..92  Marketing Strategy Benefits………………………..…………………….92  Market Research………………………………….………………………92  Method of Market Research…………………….………………………..93  Step-by-Step Approach to Market Research….………………………….94 Section 8: Methods/Channel of Exporting…………..…………………………….96  Approaches of Exporting…………………..……………………………..96  Distribution Consideration………………..………………………………97  Indirect Exporting………………………..……………………………….98  Direct Exporting……………………….………………………………....98 Section 9: Preparing Product for Export………………………………………...100  Questions to Consider…………………………………………………...100  Product Adaptation……………………………………………………...101  Engineering and Redesign……...……………………………………….102  Branding, Labeling and Packaging...…………………………………....102  Installation ……………………………………………………………….103  Warranties……………………...………………………………………..103  Servicing…………………...……………………………………………103 Section 10: Export Order…………………………………………………………......105  Processing of an Export Order………………………………………….....105  Terms and Conditions of an Export Order………………………………...107  Planning for Execution of the Export Order………………………………108 Section 11: Export Pricing, Quotation and Incoterms……………………………...109  Pricing Consideration………………………………………………….…..109
  • 5.
    5  Quotations and Proforma Invoice………………………………………....112  Difference between Proforma Invoice and a Quotation…………………..114  Use of a Proforma Invoice………………………………………………...114  Commercial Invoice……………………………………………………….115  Customs and Consular Invoice……………………………………………116  From the Proforma Invoice to the Commercial Invoice…………………..116  Incoterms or Terms of Sale………………………………………………..119 Section 12: Export Process…………………………………………………………...123  Procedure for Export……………………………………………………...124 Section 13: Logistics Process………………………………………………………....127  Brief Description of the Flow of Logistics………………………………..128  Flow of Logistics Process Implemented by Hindalco…………………….130 Section 14: Export Documentation…………………………………………………..132  Importance of Export Documentation…………………………………….132  Set of Documents Required for Exports…………………………………..133  Major Export Documents……………………………………………….…133  Need for Export Documents……………………………………………....136  Significance of Some Export Documents………………………...……….136  Common Defects in Documentation……………………………...……….143  Process of Getting Custom Clearance……………………………...……...144 Section 15: Government Policies for Export………………………………………145  EXIM Policy…………………………………………………………….145  Main Objectives of EXIM Policy……………………………………….145 Section 16: Export Incentives………………………………………………………146  Process Involved in Getting Export Incentives………………………....149  Export Finance………………………………………………………….152  Hindalco’s Export Data (From Renukoot Plant)………………………..157 Section 17: SWOT Analysis of Hindalco……………………………………………158 Section 18: Findings and Recommendations…………………………………….....159 Section 19: Bibliography………………………………………………………….....161 Section 20: Annexure…………………………………………………………...…...162  Specimen of Proforma Invoice…………………………………………..162  Specimen of Packing List………………………………………………..162  Specimen of Certificate of Origin………………………………………..163  Specimen of Bill of Lading……………………………………………...163  Specimen of Export Quotation Worksheet………………………………164  Specimen of Commercial Invoice……………………………………….164  Sample of Insurance Certificate…………………………………………164
  • 6.
    6 INTRODUCTION ABOUT ADITYA BIRLA GROUP ADITYA BIRLA MANAGEMENT CORPORATION GROUP COMPANIES AT AGLANCE FINANCIAL FOOT PRINT
  • 7.
    7 ABOUT ADITYA BIRLA GROUP  The ADITYA BIRLA GROUP is India’s 1st tryly multinational corporation(MNC) whose over 30% of revenues flow frpm its operations across tehe world.  The group is anchored by an extra-ordinary force of 72000 employees belonging to over 20 different nationalities the world over.  The ADITYA BIRLA GROUP reaches out to the core sector in India –in industries integral to the nation’s growth-cement,aluminium,fertilizers,viscose stable fibre, textile,power,telecommunications,industrial chemicals and financial services.  The ADITYA BIRLA GROUP is a dominated player in all the sectors in which it operates, such as viscoses stable fibre, non ferrous metal, cement viscoss, telecommunication and financial service. Group Overviews
  • 8.
    8 Aditya Birla group traces it’s origin back to the Tiny village of Pilani in the RAJASTAN desert, where late Shri Seth Shiv Narajan Birla started carton trading operation in 1857. Then one visionary the late Shri G.D. Birla set up Indian’s first integrated aluminium manufacturing unit at Renukoot 1962 backed by captive power plant at Renusagar in 1967. It further evolved under the dynamic leadership of the late Shri Aditya Vikram Birla a prominent figure in the Indian industries, under whose stewardship HINDALCO attained its leadership position in aluminium. Today our group chairman Dr. Kumar Manglam Birla has put together the building block to make Indian business a global force. Group Today The Aditya Birla Group is India’s first truly multinational corporation (MNC), whose over 60% of revenues flow from its operations across the world. Over 75 units in India and overseas as well (in Thailand, Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines, Egypt and Canada) and international trading operations spanning several countries including Singapore, Dubai, Russia, Vietnam, Myanmar and China make it India’s first truly multinational conglomerate. THE ADITYA BIRLA GROUP HAS THE FOLLOWING ACHIVEMENTS TO ITS CREDITS:- • The words no 1 in viscose fiber. • The word’s largest single location palm oil producer. • Asia’s largest integrated aluminum producer. • The forth largest producer of insulator. • The forth largest producer of carbon black. • The eleven largest cement producers. • Among the best energy efficient fertilizer plant. • Among the word’s top 15 largest BPO company.
  • 9.
    9 IN INDIA , A FRONTRUNNER POSITION ARE:- • A premier branded garments players. • The second largest player in viscose filament yard. • Among the top three BPO companies. • India’s leading copper producer. • The second largest in the chlor alkali sector. • Among the top five mobile telephony players. • A leading player in life insurance & asset management. Group vision “To become a premium conglomerate with clear business focus at each corporate level.” Group mission “To deliver value for our customer, shareholders, employees and society at large.” Group Philosophy Reset on four pillars  Customize  People-size  Strategize  Institutionalize Group values  Integrity  Speed  Seamlessness  Passion
  • 10.
    10 CHAIRMAN: Shri Kumar Mangalam Birla “The winning organization will be those who regularly out perform competition They have a stable consistent strategy. A stable strategy does not means a static strategy, rather it means following a broad philosophy and continuous improvement in how strategy is manifested, incorporating the expected market requirement and the customer needs.” Kumar Mangalam Birla COMPANIES Group companies:  Grassim Industries Ltd.  Hindalco Industries Ltd.  Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.  Ultra Tech Cement Ltd.
  • 11.
    11 Indian companies:  PSI Data systems  Aditya Birla Minacs Worldwide Ltd.  Essel Mining & Industries Ltd.  Shree Digvijay Cement Ltd.  Idea Cellular Ltd.  Aditya Birla Insulators.  Aditya Birla Retail Limited  Bihar Caustic and Chemicals Ltd. International companies: Thailand:  Thai Rayon  Indo Thai Synthetics  Thai Acrylic Fibre  Thai Carbon Black  Aditya Birla Chemicals(Thailand) Ltd.  Thai Peroxide. Philippines:  Indo Phil Textile Mills.  Indo Phil Cotton Mills.  Indo Phil Acrylic Mfg.  Pan Century Surfactants Inc. Indonesia:  PT Indo Bharat Rayon.
  • 12.
    12  PT Elegant Textile Industry.  PT Sunrise Bumi Textiles.  PT Indo Liberty Textiles.  PT Indo Raya Kimia. Egypt:  Alexandria Fiber Company S.A.E.  Alexandria Carbon Black Company S.A.E. China:  Liaoning Birla Carbon.  Birla Jingwei Fibres Company Ltd.  Aditya Birla Grasun Chemicals(Fangchenggang) Ltd. Canada:  AV Cell Inc.  AV Nackawic Inc. Australia:  Aditya Birla Minerals Ltd. Laos:  Birla Laos Pulp and Paper Plantation Company Ltd. North and South America, Europe and Asia:  Novelis Inc. Globally • A metals powerhouse, among the world's most cost-efficient Aluminium and Copper producers. Hindalco-Novelis from its fold is a Fortune 500 company. It is the largest Aluminium rolling company
  • 13.
    13 • It ranks as No. 1 in Viscous Staple Fibre • The largest single location palm oil producer • The third largest producer of insulators • The third largest producer of carbon black • The eleventh largest producer of cement and the largest in a single geography • The largest single location copper smelter • Among the world's top 15 BPO companies and among India's top three • Among the best energy efficient fertilizer plants In Asia • The largest integrated Aluminium producer In India • A premier branded garments player • The second largest in the chlor-alkali sector • Among the top five mobile telephony companies • Among the top three supermarket chains in the retail business • Second largest player in viscous filament yarn • Second largest private sector insurance company and a leading assets management company.
  • 14.
    14 JOINT VENTURES  Birla Sun Life Insurance  Birla Sun Life Asset Management Company Ltd.  Birla Sun Life Distribution Company Ltd.  Tanfac Industries Ltd
  • 15.
    15 ADITYA BIRLA MANAGEMENT CORPORATION BOARD OF DIRECTOR Mr. Kumar Mangalam Birla (chairman) Mr. S.Aga Mr. D.bhattacharya,managing director Mr. S.K.jain Mr. Santrupt misra Dr. Bharat singh Mr.S.K. mitra Mr. Di mittal FINANCIAL FOOT PRINT: A us $28 billian corporation with a market cap of US $31.5 billian and in the leaque of fotune 500.the A.B. group is anchored by an extra ordinary sale of 100000 employee belonging to 25 different nationalties. In India the group has been adjusted the best employees in India and among the top 20 in asia by the Hewitt- economic times and wall streetjournal study2007over50% of its revenues flow from overes operations. The groupoperation in 20 country: India thiland,indonasia,Egypt,china,Canada,Australia,U.S.A.germany,brazil,italy,Switzerland, andmalasia. Renukoot: A general overview  Lying in the foothills of the vindhya range, renukoot is about 160kms from varanasi and 154 kms from mirzapur.
  • 16.
    16  There is a direct daily train named muri expressed between jammu tawl to tatanagar and rachi via renukoot.  A part from above renukoot is also connected with kolkatta through direct train named shaktipunj express. Location:- Renukoot- zonal office:-  Kolkatta  Mumbai  Bangalore  delhi Divisional office:-  Power division  Foil division Guest house:-  Delhi  Mirzapur  Lucknow  Allahabad
  • 17.
    17 Renukoot Renusagar (CPP) Silavasa Bauxite (Foils & Wheels) Mines (Jharkhand & Chattisgarh)
  • 18.
    18 INTRODUCTION HINDALCO AT A GLANCE HIGHLIGHTS OF HINDALCO INDUSTRIES LIMITED HINDALCO OVERVIEW
  • 19.
    19 HIGHLIGHTS OF HINDALCOINDUSTRIES LIMITED  India ‘s largest aluminium producer.  Market share of 50 percent.  World’s cost producer of aluminium.  Fully integrated production facilities from bauxite mines to value added aluminium products.  Fully integrated aluminium plant at renukoot,U.P.  Aluminium wheels and foils plant at silvassa, in Dadra& NagarHaveli.  First Indian Aluminium producer which was accorded ISO 9002 and 14001 certified.  Significant economies of small scale from large scale production.  Strong market presence and wide distribution network. HINDALCO OVERVIEW:- “Hindalco” was set up in collaboration with Kaiser Aluminum & Chemicals Corporation U.S.A, in a record time of 18 months. The plant started functioning in the year 1962 with a capacity of 20,000 tons per annum. The company has growth manifold and is managed by Board of Directors, with Shri Kumar Mangalam Birla as the chairman of the Board of Directors. Day to day affairs of the company are managed by Professional Executives headed by Shri Ratan K Shah as the chief operation officer-Aluminium & Power. Hindalco is one of India’s largest producers of Aluminium. The company was in corporated on December 15, 1958 and commenced production in 1962 with an initial smelting capacity of 20,000 TPA.
  • 20.
    20 Hindalco’s integrated operation and operational efficiency have enabled the company to be one of the world’s lowest cost producers of Aluminium. Hindalco Today Aluminium has turned out to be the wonder metal of the industrialised world. No other single metal can do so many jobs, so well, and so economically. Aluminium’s growth rate is the highest amongst the major basic metals today. Hindalco ranks as the largest Aluminium producer in India, whose more than 58% sales is in value added product and has more than 40% in total market share. Hindalco’s integrated operations and operational efficiency have enabled the company to be one of the world’s lowest cost producers of Aluminium. Hindalco also owns a large captive thermal power plant at Renusagar that meets the power requirement of the company very effectively. Hindalco currently has primary Aluminium capacity of 3, 75,000 MTPA. Hindalco is a leading domestic player in two metals business segments - aluminium and copper. The aluminium division's product range includes alumina chemicals, primary aluminium ingots, billets, wire rods, rolled products, extrusions, foils and alloy wheels. The company has a significant market share in all the segments in which it operates. It enjoys a domestic market share of 42 per cent in primary aluminium, 63 per cent in rolled products, 20 per cent in extrusions, 44 per cent in foils and 31 per cent in wheels. As a step towards expanding the market for value-added products and services, Hindalco has launched several brands in recent years, which include Aura for alloy wheels, Freshwrapp for kitchen foil and Everlast for roofing sheets. Our exclusive showroom, The Aluminium Gallery, seeks to promote Hindalco products to its
  • 21.
    21 customers. It is a platform for the company to showcase quality products to a quality audience in an appropriate ambience. The exhibits include products like windows, doors, furniture, ladder, roofing sheets and ceiling and cladding panels. Hindalco's products are well received not only in the domestic market, but also in the international market. The company's metal is accepted for delivery under the high grade aluminium contract on the London Metal Exchange (LME). The company exports about 17 percent of its total sales volume of aluminium. The company's alumina chemical business is a leader in manufacturing and marketing of speciality alumina and alumina hydrate products in the country. It has a major market share in the country. These speciality products find wide usage in diversified industries including water treatment chemicals, refractories, ceramics, cryolite, glass, fillers and plastics, conveyor belts and cables, among others. The company also exports these alumina chemicals to over 30 countries covering North America, Western Europe and the Asian region. Birla Copper, Hindalco's copper division at Dahej in Gujarat, enjoys a leadership position in India, having built over 40 per cent of the domestic market share within three years of its commissioning. It has also made successful forays into the export markets of the Middle East, Southeast Asia, China, Korea and Taiwan. The copper plant produces world-class copper cathodes, continuous cast copper rods and precious metals. Sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid, di- ammonium phosphate, other phosphatic fertilizers and phospho-gypsum are also produced at this plant.
  • 22.
    22 Hindalco Vision “To strength our position as a premium Aluminum company, sustaining, domestic leadership and global competitiveness through innovation quality and value added growth.”
  • 23.
    23 Hindalco Mission “To pursue the creation of value for our customers, shareholders, employees and society at large.” Hindalco Values INTEGRETY: Honesty in every action. COMMITMENT: Doing whatever it takes to deliver, as promised. PASSION: Missionary zeal arising out of an emotional engagement with work. SEAMLESSNESS: Thinking and working together across functional silos, hierarchy levels, business and geographies. SPEED: Responding to stockholders with a sense of urgency. Hindalco Strategy  EFFICIENCY FOCUS: To be one of the lowest cost producers globally.  EFFECTIVENESS FOCUS: To continue to remain the market leader domestically.  GROWTH FOCUS: To pursue value adding growth opportunities. HINDALCO’S MARKETING VISION “To be a premium marketing organization sustaining domestic market leadership and establishing global presence in each product category.” HINDALCO’S MARKETING MISSION “To create value for our customers and profitable markets for Aluminium, ensuring rapid and sustained long-term growth.” HINDALCO POLICY QUALITY POLICY
  • 24.
    24 We, at Hindalco, shall aim to achieve and sustain excellence in all our activity.  We are committed to total customer satisfaction by providing products and services, which meet or exceed the customer, expectations.  Modernization of the manufacturing facilities stress on technological innovation and training of employee at all level shall be a continuous process of Hindalco.  A motivated workforce with a sense of pride in the organization shall us towards total quality. SAFETY POLICY We at Hindalco value as our most importance resource and hence committed to achieve health and safety. Excellence by providing healthy and safe working environment our objective therefore, will be  Use appropriate technology and other resources to upgrade safety standards.  To continuously improve the working condition leading to prevention of accidents.  Not only continue to comply with all the applicable laws and regulation but also strive to achieve beyond and set new standards.  To continuously monitor and control work places hazard and project employees and community from them.  To creation awareness and concern for safety amongst employees through active involvement participation continuous training etc. ENVIRONMENT POLICY We at Hindalco Industries Ltd. are committed to resources conservation and control of environmental aspect of our activities internally relating to production of
  • 25.
    25 Alumina. Aluminium fabricatedproduct and power generation at Renukoot in order to serve the cause of sustainable development our objective therefore will be to  Innovate and improve our process equipment operations maintenance and other practices continuously for population prevention.  Adopt cleaner technologies wherever techno-Economically viable.  Conserve key input resources such as bauxite caustic soda coal, power, water furnance oil and other oil.  Keep exploring the flexibility of recycling and utilization of inevitable waste especially of water tube oil red mud fly ash. We shall make this policy available to all employee and public. TPM-WCM POLICY Weat hindalco shall continuosly TPM-WCM practices as a key to optimization of resource, and recognition as a world class company constantly aspiring to exceed the ezception of all atakeholder. We shall:  Involve all our people in the pursuit of efficient production system.  Target zero accident, Zero breakdown, and Zero defect.  Work vigorously for elimination of losses and wastage of resource.  Promote process capability through innovation.  Conserve energy and ensure healthy a green environment through pollution prevention and control.  Be flexible, so as to meet the challenge of change through association assimilation and improvisation.
  • 26.
    26  Be a solutions provider-delivering optimum valve to our customers. BOARD OF DIRECTOR Non Executive Directors Mr. Kumar Mangalam Birla (chairman) Mrs. Rajashree Birla Mr. A. K. Agarwala Mr. E. B. Desai Mr. S.S. Kothari Mr. C. M. Maniar Mr. M. M. Bhagat Mr. K. N. Bhandari Mr. N. J. Jhaveri Executive Director Mr.D.Bhattacharya Managing Director RENUKOOT UNIT Mr. D. K. Kohly, Chief Operating Officer Mr. Ashok Machher, Joint President(F& C) Mr. G.M.Pandey,Joint President (Renusagar Power)
  • 27.
    27 Chief financial officer Mr. S.talukdar (Group executive president &CFO) Corporate- Mr.R.Ram, Senior president (project corporate) Mr. Pratik roy. (Chief people officer) Advisors Mr.R.K. Kasiwal Mr.Amit Basu. Key executives- (aluminium business) Mr.Shashi k. maudgal (chief marketing officer) Mr.R.S.Dhulkhed president Mr shanker roy president Mr S.M. Bhatia, president Copper business Mr Dilip gaur(group executive president copper) Mr N.M. pathaik, Mr j.p.paliwal,( commercial president) Mr B.M. sharma (chief marketing officer copper)
  • 28.
    28 Joint venture companies of Hindalco 1. Indo-gulf Fertilizers & chemicals Corpn Ltd. 2. Bihar Caustic & Chemicals Ltd. 3. Tanfac Industries Ltd. 4. Mangalore Refinery & Protochemicals Ltd. 5. Birla AT & T Communication Ltd. 6. Bina Power Supply Co. Ltd. 7. Birla Global Finance Ltd. 8. Birla Capital International AMC Ltd. 9. Century Enka. Recent Awards won by Hindalco in Different fields.  National Safety Award 2003: By Minister of Labor and Employment.  Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award 2003: Joint award winner of R.G.N.Q.A. 2003 in large –scale manufacturing category. The award is instituted by Bureau of Indian Standard, Ministry of Consumer Affairs, Government of India.  CIOL Dataquest Award: For best performance in the pioneer category for 2004-05 by CIOL, an IT portal along with Dataquest Magazine.  Green Tech Gold Award 2003-04: By Greentech Foundation, New Delhi for organizational Health & Safety.  Qualtech Award 2004: For Quality Management by Quimpro college, Mumbai.  CII National Award:
  • 29.
    29 For Excellence in Energy Management-2004.  Prime Minister’s Shram Award 2004: Shram Veer award to Mr. Ram Kailash of Aluminium plant won the Excellence Case Study Presentation Award at NCQC, Mumbai in December 2004.  National Energy Conservation Award 2004: In aluminium sector – Government of India, Ministry of Power.  Aditya Birla Planet Award 2004: Jt. Winner of Aditya Birla Planet Award 2004 for community initiative & Rural Development Works.  Our Mines Division has been reorganized by Indian Bureau of Mines, Government of India for A forestation; Plantation, waste Dump Management, Topsoil Management, Reclamation and Rehabilitation, Dust suppression Arrangement, Publicity & propaganda and overall Performance.  Training & Development (HR) Practices 2004: Renusager Power has declared winner of Innovation Training & Development (HR) Practices 2004. Award given by Indian Society for Training & Development, New Delhi.  Annual Greentech Safety Gold Award: Hindalco own the 4th Annual Greentech Safety Gold award for the year 2004-05 in Metallurgy Sector. The award will be presented on 11th May 2005 at Hyderabad.  National Award for Excellence in Energy Management 2005:
  • 30.
    30 Belure Sheet Plant received the National Award for Excellence in Energy Management 2005 (Energy Efficient Unite) from CII –Sohrabji Godrej Green Business Center.  National Safety Award 2004: Owned by Renukoot Plant, given by the Ministry of Labor and Employment, Government of India.  Vishkarma Rashtriya Puraskar: Awarded to Five workmen of our smelter, Mr. Rajesh Pal, Mr. A.K. Gupta, Mr. R.K. Singh, Mr. H.N. Singh, & Mr. S.K. Singh, given by the Ministry of Labor and Employment, Government of India.  National Energy Conservation 2005: Renukoot plant won the 1st Prize in Aluminium sector, given by Ministry of power, Government of India.  ICWAI National Award for Excellence in Cost Management-2005: Hindalco was awarded by Institute of Cost and Works Accountants of India.  “National Energy Conservation Award-2006” Hindalco was awarded by Ministry of Power, Government of India  National Award for Excellence in Water Management 2006 Hindalco, Renukoot has won the National Award for Excellence in Water Management 2006 organised by CII  Quality Circle Forum of India Award
  • 31.
    31 The quality circle teams at Hindalco, Renukoot were adjudged winners in the live quiz competition organised by the Quality Circle Forum of India.  Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award 2007 Renukoot was selected for the Rajiv Gandhi National Quality Award 2007 – Silver Trophy, presented by the Bureau of Indian Standards, in the large scale manufacturing (metallurgy) category  National Award for Excellence in Water Management 2007". Hindalco awarded the CII-Sorabji Green Business Centre "National Award for Excellence in Water Management 2007".  “D.L. Shah National Award for Economics of Quality” Hindalco won the prestigious “D.L. Shah National Award for Economics of Quality” given by quality council of India. Chief manufacturing officer, Mr. R. P. Shah and Mr. Arun Kumar received the award from the President of India, H.E. Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam on 9 February 2007 at New Delhi  IT Competition 2008 Award By CII: Hindalco Hirakud Systems ranked runners up at the state level IT Competition 2008 organised by CII in association with the department of informational technology, Government of Orissa.  Greentech Safety Gold Award 2008: Greentech Safety Gold Award 2008 for outstanding achievement in safety management in coal based power sector
  • 32.
    32 Above Figure ShowsThe Sales Revenue Of Aluminium Business SALES REVENUE OF ALUMINIUM BUSINESS CHEMICAL 10% FOIL&WHEEL 8% PRIMARY PRIMARY EXTRUSION 37% ROLLED 9% EXTRUSION FOIL&WHEEL CHEMICAL ROLLED 36% IMPORTANT MILESTONES OF PROGRESS YEAR ACHIEVEMENTS 1958 Date of registration 1962 Aluminium production started.capacity20,000TPA
  • 33.
    33 Aluminium production started.capacity40,000TPA 1964 properzi wire rod mill commissioned. 1965 Aluminium production capacity expanded to 40,000TPA. Renusagar pawar plant commissioned with 65.7mw capacity. Aluminium production capacity expanded to 60,000TPA. Properi mll no.2,extrusion press 2&3. 1969 Aluminium production capacity expanded to. 80000TPA 1972 Aluminium production capacity expanded to 95,000TPA. 1981 Aluminium production capacity expanded to 120,000TPA. Third generater at renusagar commissioned. 1886 Alumina production capacity expanded to 300,000. 1988 Conferm extrusion press commissioned. 1990 Continuous caster installed. 1991 Aluminiumproduction capacity expanded to 150,000TPA. 1993 Dave cold rolling mill commissioned. 1994 Aluminium production capacity expanded to 350,000TPA. 1996 Continuos ingot casting machine installed. Aluminiumproduction capacity expanded to 210,000TPA Wag stuff slab casing machne installed. 1997 Bliss hot & cold mill revamped. Co-generation power plant of 37 mu commissioned. Wag stuff billet casing machine commissioned.
  • 34.
    34 6th generator commissioned At Renusagar. 1998 Aluminium production capacity expanded to 242,000TPA. Aluminiumproduction capacity expanded to 450,000TPA. Aluminium fil production commenced at silvassa. 1996 wheel plant commissioned at silvassa.2001 1997 under brown field expansion of smelter, pot line 9 commisioned and aluminium production capacity expanded to 275, 000TPA 2002 brown field expansion of capitive power plant completed power production capacity enhanced by 160 mu . 2002 brown field expansion of alumina refinery completed. 2004 co generation power plant of 40 mu commissioned. 2005 HIndalco received the ICWAI national award for excellence in cast management. 2006 In may the company singed a mow wih the government of Madhya Pradesh for setting up a green field aluminium smelter and a captive power plant. 2007 In may novelis become a Hindalco subsidery with the completion of the acquisition process. ACHIVEMENTS:- Recent awards won by Hindalco of labour and employment:-  National safety award 2003 by ministry of labour and employment.  Joint award winner of Rajive Gandhi national quality award 2003 in large scale manufacturing category. The award I sinstotuted by bureau of Indian standerds ministry of consumer affairs, govt. of India.
  • 35.
    35  CIOL Dataquest award for best performance in the pioneer category for 2004-2005 by CIOL an IT portal along with dataquestr magazine.  Green tech gold awad 2003-2004 by greentech foundation new delhi for organization health and safety.  Qualtech award 2004 for quality management bu quimpro college.  CLL national award for excellence in energy management 2004.  Prime minister’s shram awards 2004 sharam veer award to mr.Ram kailash of alumina plant and Sharam shree award to Mr. Suresh Prasad of alumina plant.  Quality circle shakti of reduction plan won the excellence case study presentation award at NCQC Mumbai in December 2004.  National energy congervation award 2004 in aluminium sector government of India, ministry of power.  Jt.winner of Aditya Birla planed award 2004 for commity initiative & rural development works.  Our mines division has been recognized by Indian bureau of mines, govt of India for afforestation, plantation management publicityn and propaganda and overall performance.  Renusagar power has declared winner of innovation training and development practice 2004 award givin by Indian society for training & development new delhi.  Hindalco won the 4th annual greentech safety gold award for the year 2004-2005 in metallurgy sector. The award will be presented on the 11th may 2005 at hydarabad.
  • 36.
    36 COMPANY PROFILE INDUSTRY AT GLANCE ALUMINIUM COPPER
  • 37.
    37 COMPANY PROFILE INDUSTRY AT GLANCE Hindalco industry limited, a flagship company of ADITYA BIRLA group, with a turnover of Rs.192,010.00 crore in 2007-08, ranks M vmd ndnvkl among India’s top 10 companies in terms of capital market capitalization a non ferrous metal powerhouse Hindalco’s operations are organized into two strategic business units –Aluminium and Copper. The company is an industry leader in both these business. ALUMINIUM Hindalco is Asia’s largest integrated primary producer of aluminium and among the most cost efficient producers globally. In India, Hindalco enjoys a leadership position for aluminium and downstream products. Synergies of operations with it’s wholly – owned subsidiary Indian aluminium company Ltd. (Indal), have enhanced the company share in value addition segments, in which the Hindalco – Indal combine has a market share of over 50 %. As a step towards expanding the market for value –added products and services, Hindalco has launched several brands in past year –“Aura”, “Freshwrapp”, Everlast”, and, “Al plant”. The company’s product range includes primary aluminium ingots, billets, wire rods, rolled products, extrusions, and foils and alloy wheels. To enhance its capacities, the company had under taken Brownfield expansions, leading to smelting capacity of 1,46,000 tpa, an alumina refining capacity of 4,50, 0000 tones, and captive power generation of 167.5MW. The company further enhanced the smelter capacity of 4, 29,140MT and alumina refinery to 7, 00,000 tones, by streamlining to eliminate bottlenecks and
  • 38.
    38 installation of balancing equipment, including another co- generation plant. This has facilitated optimization of expand facilities and, more importantly, has been achieved within the original budget. Besides being a dominant player in the Indian aluminium market, Hindalco’s products are well accepted in international markets. The company’s metal is accepted for delivery under the high grade aluminium contract on the LME (London Metal Exchange). The company’s export efforts have led to its reorganization as a “Star Trading House”. Hindalco is an ISO 9001 company, and has been awarded the ISO 14001certification for its entire operations at Renukoot and Silvassa, including its power plant and mines. It has received several awards from the export promotion council as well as the government of India. With the completition of on going Brownfield expansion, Hindalco will further consolidate its domestic market leadership, and reach out to international markets in larger measure. COPPER Birla copper enjoys leadership position in India, having built up-------percent domestic market share with in three years of commissioning. It has also made successful forays into the export markets of the Middle East, South East Asia, china Korea and Taiwan. Birla copper has a mega green field copper smelting and refining complex at dahej in the bharuch district of Gujarat, India. With an investment of Rs 1,850. Crore, it is largest of its kind in India. The plant produces world- class copper cathodes, continues cast copper rods and precious metals. Sulphuric acids, phosphoric acid, di-
  • 39.
    39 ammonium phosphate, other phosphatic fertilizers and phospho- gypsum are also produced at this plant . Birla copper aspires to be among the world’s foremost cost competitive producers of cooper. To reach this goal, it had under taken a brown field expansion raising its smelter capacity from 65,000 tones per annum to 146000 tones per annum. The copper division is evaluating a further expansion as well, so as to rank among the top 10percent of cost competitive producer globally. To make birla copper an integrated producer of copper, the company believes that upstream expansion through ownership in mines is important for a smelter of its size. As a first step in this direction, birla copper acquired the nifty copper mines in Australia. Nifty currently has a capacity of 25000 tones per year of copper cathodes, with a large underdeveloped copper sulphide. PRODUCTION PROFILE PRODUCTION PROCESS EXTRACTION OF ALUMINA FROM BAUXITE EXTRACTION ALUMINIUM FROM ALUMINA
  • 40.
  • 41.
    41 PRODUCTION PROCESS The aluminum production process can be categorized into up stream and down stream activities. The upstream process involves meaning and refining bauxite to alumina while the downstream process involves smelting and casting and fabricating. Hindalco refines bauxite primarily obtained from captive mines, to extract alumina, which is smelted into alumina ingots or billets. Hindalco smelts its entire production of alumina into aluminum and does not engage in alumina trade. Production of aluminum can be categories in two stages, namely • From bauxite to alumina • From alumina to aluminum  EXTRACTION OF ALUMINA FROM BAUXITE Alumina is manufactured by conventional bayers process i.e. treating bauxite with caustic soda. Bauxite is brought to the site from mines by means of railways wagon tippler. Primary crushing is done in cone crusher where bauxite size is reduced form 8”- 12” to 3” - 4” and then stockpiled. Secondary crushing is done by means of hammer mills where process liquor known as a spent liquor and 600 psig. Seam is mixed together. This solution of alumina from bauxite into caustic solution in the form of sodium aluminates is carried out of digesters at 240 degrees centigrade temperature and 36-kg/sq.cm pressures. The digested slurry is placed flashed and brought to atmosphere pressure; flashed vapors are utilized for pre heating the spent liquor and condensed returned to boiler hose for generation of steam. Digested flashed slurry is pumped to clarification area for removal of solid Impurities (red mud). Red mud is separated out, in solid liquid hydrocyclon and stellar. Separated mud slurry is washed in counter current and washing Circuit without using water. Washed mud slurry is cauterized by treating with lime slurry to recover soda. Cauterized mud slurry is filtered on drum filters. Filtrate liquor is taken back into the system and red mud cake is
  • 42.
    42 disposed off bymeans of dumpers Settler overflow pregnant liquor is filtered in Kelly presses to remove fine mud particles. Clear pregnant liquor is pumped to precipitators through plate heat exchanges after exchanging heat with the spent liquor where it is seeded with alumina trihydrate. Alumina trihydrate is separated out in thickness and pan filter. Alumina trihydrate cake thus obtained is fed into the gas suspension calciner where furnace oil is burnt for calcining alumina. The reduction grade alumina thus produced is transported to smelter plant. Spent liquor generated and separated from precipitation circuit is fed to the evaporation unit for increasing caustic concentration to the desired level and recirculated to digesters through heaters for further processing of bauxite and thus the process goes on.  EXTRACTION OF ALUMINUM FROM ALUMINA Alumina from alumina plant is conveyed to the reduction plant. The reduction plant has 11 prebaked pot – lines which have 1278 pot cells. Each pot has 24/26 carbon anodes and it is lined with carbon cathode. Alumina is converted to metallic aluminum is these pot cells by the standard “hall heroult” process. The pot cells work at an average 4.3-volt D. C. current of 5800/6300 amperes. Electrolysis of the alumina takes place in molten bath of cryolte at a temperature of 955 to 960 degrees centigrade. The molten aluminum that collects at the cathodes is siphoned into crucibles periodically. The entire process is controlled by microprocessor system.
  • 43.
    43 PRODUCT PROFILE PRODUCT OVERVIEW ALUMINIUM COPPER PRIMARY ALUMINIUM PRODUCTS INTEGRATED OPERATION OF HINDALCO PRODUCTION CAPACITY
  • 44.
    44 PRODUCT OVERVIEW Hindalco operations are organized into two strategic business units- aluminum and copper. The company is an industry leader in both these businesses. ALUMINUM Hindalco’s Aluminum business comprises primary aluminum, extrusions, rolled products, foils and alloy wheels. In the value-added segment, hindalco, along with its subsidiary Indal, has a 50 percent market share. In the past year, hindalco has launched several brands – “Aura”, Freshwrapp”, “Everlast”, “Permashield”, and, Al Planet”. COPPER BIRLA copper, with an over 45 per cent market share, is India leading copper producer in private sector. Its plant at dahej in Gujarat, produces world class copper cathodes, continuous cast copper rods and precious metals. A part form copper products, euphoric acid, phosphoric acid, di-ammonium phosphate, other phosphates fertilizers and phosphor –gypsum are also produced at this plant. PRIMARY ALUMINIUM PRODUCTS  INGOTS:  Is an LME (London Metal Exchange) registered brand. These are also known as virgin metal. These are used as raw material for making aluminium product.  ROUND BILLETS: These are use for making extrusion.  CAST SLABS: Slabs are used input in Hot Rolling Mill, which is converted into thinner sheets, plates or coils.
  • 45.
    45 SEMI FABRICATED PRODUCTS: Hindalco produces 900 different rolled product items of which 40 are standard.  HOT ROLLED PRODUCTS: These are the product which are used after the process of hot rolling according to their specification and requirements, these products are as follows: 1. Hot rolled plates electrical application 2. Hot rolled wire.  COLD ROLLED PRODUCT. (plane sheets) (Cold rolled coil) 3. Circle 4. checkered sheet 5. alkaloid sheets. EXTRUSIONS Hindalco extrusions offer an enormous range of shapes, wide range of alloys for decorative, structural and functional application. The present die catalogue included over one thousand die for various sections and we are fuy equipped to design and make new die as per exclusive requirement. Some of the common shapes are as follows:  ROD, BAR-Flat, Square, Hexagonal  STRUCTURAL SHAPES-Angles, Channels, Tee, I-beans, H sections etc.  TUBES-Round, Oval, Square, Rectangular, Triangular  MOUDINGS FOIL  Cable Rape stock  Light Gauge Foil  Bare & Coated Fine stock
  • 46.
    46  Collapsible insulation Ducts ALLOY WHEELS  12 to 18 inch diameters. OTHERS: The main by products of the process included  VANADIUM SLUDGE  GALLIUM INTEGRATED OPERATION OF HINDALCO S DA M INE SO ITE ST IC UX CA BA RY EF INA INI UM AR M M IN ALU IDE ALU FLU R ER ESS OC ELT NP R SM SIO UM TRU MINI EX ON ALU ER ATI EN T O-G P LA N C ON ATI BRIC E R IFA P OW SEM AR SAG EL RENU LL HE NT MI W P LA IN G UM OLL M INI LLS R ALU T D MI N RO PLA R AW RED IL S FO
  • 47.
    47 PRODUCTION CAPACITY ALUMINA CAPACITY 12, 30,000TPA  RENUKOOT 700,000TPA  BELGAUM 350,000TPA  MURI 180,000TPA SMELTER (PRIMARY ALUMINIUM) CAPACITY 5, 59,000TPA  RENUKOOT 375,000TPA  HIRAKUND 1,43,000TPA  ALPURAM 14,000TPA  TALOJA 25000TPA  BELGUAUM 2000TPA
  • 48.
    48 ROLLED PRODUCTS CAPACITY 2, 37,000TPA  RENUKOOT 100,000TPA  BELUR 57,000TPA  TALOJA 50,000TPA  MOUDA 30,000TPA FOIL CAPACITY 40,000TPA  SILVASA 30,000TPA  KALWA 6,000TPA  KOLLAR 4,000TPA EXTRUSIONS CAPACITY 46,000TPA  RENUKOOT 33,000TPA  ALPURAM 13,000TPA ALLOY WHEELS CAPACITY 3,00,000 pcs. PA  SILVASA 3,00,000 pcs. CAPATIVE POWER CAPACITY 1188MW  RENUSAGAR 742MW  RENUKOOT 78MW  HIRAKUD 368MW
  • 49.
    49 Organizational Profile of Hindalco Industries Limited Hindalco Industries Limited, a Non-ferrous Metal powerhouse, is the flagship company of the Aditya Birla Group. Hindalco is one of India’s producers of Aluminium. The company was incorporated on December 15, 1958 and commenced production in 1962 with an initial smelting capacity of 20,000 TPA. The company has sales and distribution network that covers all of India and includes five sales offices located in Mumbai, New Delhi, Bangalore, Chennai and Renukoot. In India Hindalco enjoys a leadership position in Aluminium and Copper. All of the Hindalco’s units are ISO 9001:2000, ISO 14001:2004 and several have attained the OHSAS 18001— the occupational health and safety certification. On the export front, the company has been accorded a Trading House status by the Indian government. Both in Aluminium and Copper, Hindalco is the largest Company in India. The company’s Aluminium product range includes Primary Aluminium Ingots, Billets, Rolling Slabs, Redraw Roads, Alloy Wire Rods, Flat Rolled Products, Extruded Profiles, Foils and Alloy Wheels. Hindalco is the largest manufacturer of the entire range of flat rolled products in India. Hindalco’s domestic market share in Flat Rolled Products is nearly 60% and its rolled products are widely used in various segments such as packaging, transportation, building and construction, electrical, defense and general engineering applications. Hindalco is registered as a star Trading House. About 35% of Flat Rolled Products are exported to more than 50 countries.
  • 50.
    50 The company's commitmentto quality and service along with its extensive infrastructure has made Hindalco a prime source for best-selling brands. Continuous improvements in manufacturing, processes, practices and systems ensure that customers' needs and expectations are fully met. Efficiency and product quality are ensured by using state-of-the-art equipment and a strong research and development set-up, supported by dedicated and motivated employees and the Oracle ERP system. Wag staff Air Slip™ slab casting technology is used to ensure consistent quality and surface finish of stock feed, which in turn ensures quality, finished products. The company's capacity in flat rolled products at present is 2,30,000 tonne per annum and new plans are being implemented to increase the manufacturing capacity Of the total production of Hindalco's flat rolled products, around 40 per cent is exported and customers in more than 50 countries are using the products. Ever last, a Hindalco brand for aluminium-roofing sheets, offers ideal and economical solutions for all roofing and cladding needs. Hindalco also offers colour-coated and tiled roofing profiles. Hindalco is one of Asia's largest producers of primary aluminium and one of the most cost-efficient producers globally. In India, Hindalco enjoys a leadership position in specialty alumina, primary aluminium and downstream products The company's integrated complex at Renukoot houses an alumina refinery, aluminium smelter and facilities for production of semi-fabricated products. Power is sourced from the company's captive power plant at Renusagar, located at a distance of about 45 km from Renukoot. It has a captive capacity of 820.2 mw. Besides the integrated complex at Renukoot, Hindalco's other manufacturing facilities are situated at locations across the country. While the captive bauxite mines are located in western and eastern India, the alumina refineries are located in Belgaum in southern India and Muri in eastern India. Smelters are located at Hirakud, Orissa, with a captive power plant and coal mines, and at Alupuram, Kerala. Rolled product manufacturing facilities are located at Belur and Taloja, and an extrusion plant
  • 51.
    51 is situated atAlupuram. Foil plants are based in the Union Territory of Silvassa and in Kalwa, Maharashtra. The foil plant at Kollur, Andhra Pradesh is the only remaining entity with the erstwhile Indal after the merger of Indal with Hindalco. The wheel plant of Hindalco is also located at Silvassa. The company has two R&D centres: the Belgaum Research and Development Centre in Belgaum, Karnataka and Taloja Research and Development Centre in Taloja, Maharashtra. They have been recognized by the Government of India's Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR). Hindalco is a leading domestic player in two non-ferrous metals business segments- Aluminium and Copper. The Aluminium division's product range includes alumina chemicals, primary Aluminium ingots and billets, wire rods, rolled products, extrusions, foils and alloy wheels. The company has a significant market share in all the segments in which it operates. It enjoys a domestic market share of 42 per cent in primary aluminium, 63 per cent in rolled products, 20 per cent in extrusions, 44 per cent in foils and 31 per cent in wheels. As a step towards expanding the market for value-added products and services, Hindalco has launched several brands in recent years, which include Aura for alloy wheels, Freshwrapp for kitchen foil and Ever last for roofing sheets. Our exclusive showroom, The Aluminium Gallery, seeks to promote Hindalco products to its customers. It is a platform for the company to showcase quality products to a quality audience in an appropriate ambience. The exhibits include products like windows, doors, furniture, ladder, roofing sheets and ceiling and cladding panels. Hindalco's products are well received not only in the domestic market, but also in the international market. The company's metal is accepted for delivery under the high-grade aluminium contract on the London Metal Exchange (LME). The company exports about 17% of its total sales volume of Aluminium. The company's alumina chemical business is a leader in manufacturing and marketing of speciality alumina and alumina hydrate products in the country. It has a market share of 90 per cent in the
  • 52.
    52 country. These specialityproducts find wide usage in diversified industries including water treatment chemicals, refractories, ceramics, cryolite, glass, fillers and plastics, conveyor belts and cables, among others. The company also exports these alumina chemicals to over 30 countries covering North America, Western Europe and the Asian region. Birla Copper, Hindalco's copper division at Dahej in Gujarat, enjoys a leadership position in India, having built over 40 per cent of the domestic market share within three years of its commissioning. It has also made successful forays into the export markets of the Middle East, Southeast Asia, China, Korea and Taiwan. The copper plant produces world-class copper cathodes, continuous cast copper rods and precious metals. Sulphuric acid, phosphoric acid, di-ammonium phosphate, other phosphatic fertilizers and phospho-gypsum are also produced at this plant. Products and Brands of HINDALCO Key Products and Locations Capacities Country Brands Hindalco Industries Ltd. Alumina Chemicals Renukoot (Uttar Pradesh), 1,160,000 tpa India Muri (Jharkhand), Belgaum (Karnataka) Primary Aluminium Renukoot, Hirakud (Orissa), 489,000 tpa Taloja Extrusions Renukoot, Alupuram 27,700 tpa Rolled Products Belur (West Bengal), Taloja 200,000 tpa (Maharashtra), Renukoot, Mauda (Maharashtra) Wire Rods Renukoot, Alupuram (Kerala) 64,400 tpa
  • 53.
    53 Aluminium Foil Silvassa (Dadra & Nagar Haveli), 11,000 tpa Kalwa (Maharashtra) Aluminium Wheels Silvassa (Dadra & Nagar Haveli) 300,000 pcs For Taloja recycling plant Indal (subsidiary of Hindalco) Foil Rolling Kollur (Andhra Pradesh) 4,000 tpa Key Products and Brands Locations Capacities Country Birla Copper (Hindalco Industries Ltd.) Copper Cathodes Dahej (Gujarat) 500,000 tpa India Continuous Cast Copper Rods 97,200 tpa Sulphuric Acid 1,670,000 tpa Phosphoric Acid 180,000 tpa Gold (Birla Gold) 15 mt Silver (Birla Silver) 150 mt Power 135 mw DAP and Complexes (Birla 400,000 tpa Balwan) Hindalco Industries Ltd. (Aditya Birla Minerals Resources Pty. Ltd.) Copper Cathodes Nifty mines 25,000 tpa Australia Copper in concentrate Mt. Gordon mines 40,000 tpa Australia Power Mt. Gordon mines 28 mw Australia Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd (Hi-Tech Carbon) Carbon Black Birla Carbon 2,30,000 mtpa India
  • 54.
    54 Thai Carbon Black Co. Ltd. Carbon Black Birla Carbon 220,000 mtpa Thailand Alexandria Carbon Co. S.A.E Carbon Black Birla Carbon 285,000 mtpa Egypt Liaoning Birla Carbon Co. Ltd. Carbon Black Birla Carbon 55,000 mtpa China Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Grasim Industries Ltd. White Cement Birla White 475,000 tpa India Grey Cement UltraTech 13.12 mn tpa Cement (formerly Birla Plus), Birla Super Shree Digvijay Grey Cement Kamal 1.08 mn tpa UltraTech Cement Ltd. Ordinary Portland Cement, 17 mn tpa Portland Blast Furnace Slag Cement, Portland Pozzolana Cement and Grey Portland Cement Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Indo Gulf Fertilizers Ltd. Urea Birla Shaktiman 864,600 mt India Birla Copper (Hindalco Industries Ltd.) DAP/NPK Birla Balwan 400,000 tpa India Complexes
  • 55.
    55 Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Aditya Birla Insulators Insulators 38,800 tpa India Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Pulp Grasim Industries Ltd. Rayon Grade Pulp 70,000 tpa India AV Cell Inc. Softwood / Hardwood Pulp 122,500 tpa Canada AV Nackawic Inc. Dissolving Pulp 189,000 tpa Canada Fibre Grasim Industries Ltd. Viscose Staple Fibre Birla Viscose 270,100 tpa India (VSF) Thai Rayon Public Company Ltd. VSF Birla Viscose 110,000 tpa Thailand PT Indo Bharat Rayon VSF Birla Viscose 155,000 tpa Indonesia Thai Acrylic Fibre Acrylic Fibre Texlan 100,000 tpa Thailand Alexandria Fiber Company, S.A.E Acrylic Fibre 18,000 tpa Egypt Yarn Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. Viscose Filament Yarn Ray One 16,400 tpa India Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. (Jaya Shree Textiles) Flax Yarns 15,340 spindles India Worsted Yarns 25,548 spindles PT Indo Liberty Textiles Rayon Yarn, Polyester, 45,120 ring spindles Indonesia Blended Yarn PT Elegant Textile Industry Rayon, Polyester, 168,088 spindles Indonesia Rayon-Polyester Blended Spun Yarn PT Sunrise Bumi Textiles Viscose Rayon, Polyester Viscose, Spun Polyester, 89,376 spindles Indonesia Polyester Combed Cotton, Anti Pill Yarn, Sewing Thread, High Twist Yarn, Reverse Twist Yarn,
  • 56.
    56 Flame Retardant Yarn, Rayon Cotton Blended Yarn, Micro Denier Polyester Rayon Yarn, Rayon Silk Yarn, Slub Yarn, Lycra Core Spun Yarn Indo Phil Acrylic Manufacturing Corporation High Bulk Acrylic Dyed Yarn, Non-bulk Acrylic Dyed 3,700 mtpa Philippines Yarn Indo Phil Textiles Mills Inc Poly Viscose Blended Yarn, Poly Cotton Blended 13,500 mtpa Philippines Yarn, Polyester Yarn Indo Phil Cotton Mills Inc Cotton Yarn 10,000 mtpa Philippines Indo Thai Synthetics Co. Ltd. Synthetic Yarns 98,568 spindles Thailand Fabrics Grasim Industries Ltd. Fabric -Polyester, Viscose, Silk and Wool Blends 146 looms India Uncrushables, Ice Touch, Purista, and Clean Fab 18 million meters Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. Pure Linen and Linen Linen Club 107 looms India Blends Flame Retardent Fabrics Pyroguard Branded apparel Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. (Madura Garments) Ready-to-wear Louis Philippe, India Garments Allen Solly Van Heusen, Peter England Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Grasim Industries Ltd. (Vikram Ispat) Sponge Iron (HBI & DRI) 900,000 tpa India Key Products and Brands Capacities Country
  • 57.
    57 Essel Mining & Industries Ltd Iron and Manganese ore 15 million tons India Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Grasim Industries Ltd. Caustic Soda 258,000 tpa India Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd. Caustic Soda 82,125 tpa India Liquid Chlorine 50,340 tpa Hydrochloric Acid 5,475 tpa Tanfac Industries Ltd. Aluminium Fluoride 17,000 tpa India Hydrofluoric Acid 17,000 tpa Bihar Caustic and Chemicals Ltd. Caustic Soda Lye 92,750 mt India Liquid Chlorine 65,785 mt Hydrochloric Acid 29,040 mt Sodium Hypochlorite 1,800 mt Compressed Hydrogen 17,42,400 nm3 Aluminium Chloride 12000 tpa Captive Power Plant 30 mw Aditya Birla Chemicals (Thailand) Ltd. Sodium Triployphosphates, Polyphos Thailand Tetrasodium Pyrophosphate, Epotec sodium Hexametaphosphate, Birlasulf-SS, Sodium Acid Pyrophosphate, Birlasulf-SM, Monosodium Phosphate, Birlasol 35 Disodium Phosphate, Trisodium Phosphate, Speciality Phosphates Epoxy Resins (bis-a and bis- f), Diluents, Curing Agents and Allied Products Sodium Sulphite, Sodium Metabisulphite, Sodium Bisulphite Epichlorohydrin Caustic Soda Chlorine Thai Peroxide Co. Ltd. Hydrogen Peroxide, Peracetic Encare, Ecare, 15,000 mtpa Thailand Acid, Calcium Peroxide Aqua-x, Birlox 5, Birlox
  • 58.
    58 12, Ocare PT. Indo Raya Kimia Carbon Disulfide 50,000 tpa Indonesia Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Pan Century Surfactants Inc. Fatty Acids 55000 mtpa Philippines Fatty Alcohol 30000 mtpa Glycerin 6500 mtpa Key Products and Brands Capacities Country PSI Data Systems Ltd. (subsidiary of Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.) IT Solutions (Banking, Finance and Insurance) India Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Aditya Birla Minacs Worldwide Limited (subsidiary of Aditya Birla Nuvo Ltd.) BPO / ITES 9,089 seats India
  • 59.
    59 Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Birla Global Finance Company Ltd. Financial Services India Birla Sun Life Insurance Company Ltd. Insurance Solutions India Birla Sun Life Asset Management Company Ltd. Mutual Funds India Birla Sun Life Distribution Company Ltd. Investment Planning Services India Birla Insurance Advisory Services Ltd. Non-life Insurance Advisory Services India Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Idea Cellular Cellular Services Idea 21 million subscriber base India Key Products and Brands Capacities Country Aditya Birla Retail Limited Multi-format Stores More 170 retail outlets India Sources: Through the website www.hindalco.com/www.adityabirla.com
  • 60.
    60 Hindalco Product Range 1) - 2) - 3) - 4) - 5) - Primary Aluminium Alloy ingots Billets Slab Aluminium sheet Ingots 6) - 7) - 8) - 9) - 10) - Wire rods sheet Circle Alloy Wheel Watch Blister Pack 11) - 12) - 13) - 14)- Ladder Door Handle Can
  • 61.
    61 Hindalco Products • Everlast aluminium roofing sheets • Freshwrapp aluminium foil • Freshpakk semi-rigid containers • Permashield waterproofing • Aluminium foil • Aura alloy wheels • Hindalco extrusions FLAT ROLLED PRODUCTS (FRPs) Of HINDALCO Hindalco is the world's largest aluminium rolling company with the acquisition of Novelis, the global leader in value-added high-end aluminium flat rolled products and aluminium can recycling. The combined volume of sales of flat rolled products in the world market is about 3 million tonnes and the market Hindalco is now world share is more than 20 percent. No.1 in aluminium flat rolled products Hindalco is the largest manufacturer of the entire range of flat rolled products in India. It enjoys nearly 60 per cent of market share and its rolled products are widely used in various segments such as packaging, transportation, building and construction, electrical, defence and general engineering applications. The company's commitment to quality and service along with its extensive infrastructure has made Hindalco a prime source for best-selling brands. Continuous improvements in manufacturing, processes, practices and systems ensure that customers' needs and expectations are fully met. Efficiency and product quality are ensured by using state-of-the-art equipment and a strong research and development set-up, supported by dedicated and motivated employees and the Oracle ERP system. Wagstaff Air Slip™ slab casting technology is used to ensure consistent quality and surface
  • 62.
    62 finish of stockfeed which in turn ensures quality finished products. The company's capacity in flat rolled products at present is 2, 00,000 tonnes per annum and new plans are being implemented to increase the manufacturing capacity. Of the total production of Hindalco's flat rolled products, around 40 per cent is exported and customers in more than 50 countries are using the products. Everlast, a Hindalco brand for aluminium roofing sheets, offers ideal and economical solutions for all roofing and cladding needs. Colour-coated and tiled roofing profiles are also offered by Hindalco. Types of Flat Rolled Products (Export) Basically, there are three kinds of Flat Rolled Products (FRPs) which is being exported by Hindalco i.e. 1. Cold rolled Coils 2. Cold rolled Sheets 3. Circles Cold Rolled Coils Hindalco's cold rolled coils are precision-finished to match international standards. They have good shape, high tolerance, versatility and blemish-free surfaces. They are used in commercial and general engineering applications such as bus bodies, cladding and fan blades. The company meets the demands of its ever-growing clientele with continuous upgrades and process improvement. Cold Rolled Sheets
  • 63.
    63 Hindalco's cold rolled sheets are precision-finished to match international standards for tight thickness, tolerance, flatness and dimensional accuracy. Sound metallurgical properties for further fabrication, anodizing characteristics and a blemish-free surface make it useful in both commercial and general engineering applications. Circles Hindalco offers circles, also known as flat circular sheets, in a variety of diameters and thickness to meet specific needs. Extensively used in the manufacture of pressure cookers, non-stick cookware, coated cookware, cans, etc they have earned the trust of many leading brands. Continuous upgrades and improvement of processes enable the company to keep pace with the demands of its ever-growing clientele. • Major Aluminium Producer Industries in India. Company Ownership Location Capacity Hindalco AB Group Renukoot 345,000
  • 64.
    64 Alpuram 14,000 Hirakud 65,000 Belgaum 31,000 NALCO Public Sect. Angul 345,000 BALCO Sterlight Korba 350,000 MALCO Sterlight Mettur 40,000 • EXTRUSIONS CAPACITY, PRODUCTION & DEMAND 1991-2020(MT) Particulars 91-92 99-00 03-04 2010 2020 Capacity 122000 190000 202000 202000 400000 Production 61000 109000 132000 188000 370000 Domestic 60000 105000 117000 166000 325000 Demand Export Nil 4000 15000 22000 45000 Excess 62000 81000 70000 14000 30000 Capacity • Product segment of Hindalco
  • 65.
    65 • World Consumption & Consumption growth% What is International Marketing? International marketing is simply the application of marketing principles to more than one country. However, there is a crossover between what is commonly expressed as international marketing and global marketing,
  • 66.
    66 which is asimilar term. For the purposes of this lesson on international marketing and those that follow it, international marketing and global marketing are interchangeable. The intersection is the result of the process of internationalisation. Many American and European authors see international marketing as a simple extension of exporting, whereby the marketing mix is simply adapted in some way to take into account differences in consumers and segments. It then follows that global marketing takes a more standardized approach to world markets and focuses upon sameness, in other words the similarities in consumers and segments. “At its simplest level, international marketing involves the firm in making one or more marketing mix decisions across national boundaries. At its most complex level, it involves the firm in establishing manufacturing facilities overseas and coordinating marketing strategies across the globe.” Doole and Lowe (2001) International Marketing is the performance of business activities that direct the flow of a company's goods and services to consumers or users in more than one nation for a profit. International marketing is the application of marketing orientation and marketing capabilities to international business. If the exporting departments are becoming successful but the costs of doing business from headquarters plus time differences, language barriers, and cultural ignorance are hindering the company’s competitiveness in the foreign market, then offices could be built in the foreign countries. Sometimes companies buy firms in the foreign countries to take advantage of relationships, storefronts, factories, and personnel already in place. These offices still report to headquarters in the home market but most of the marketing mix decisions are made in the individual countries since that staff is the most knowledgeable about the target markets. Local product development is based on the needs of local customers. These marketers are considered polycentric because they acknowledge that each market/country has different needs. What is Global Marketing? Global marketing refers to marketing activities coordinated and integrated across multiple country markets. Johansson (2000) Global/transnational marketing focuses upon leveraging a company's assets, experience and products globally and upon adapting to what is truly unique and different in each country.
  • 67.
    67 The Oxford UniversityPress defines global marketing as “marketing on a worldwide scale reconciling or taking commercial advantage of global operational differences, similarities and opportunities in order to meet global objectives.” When a company becomes a global marketer, it views the world as one market and creates products that will only require weeks to fit into any regional marketplace. Marketing decisions are made by consulting with marketers in all the countries that will be affected. The goal is to sell the same thing the same way everywhere. Global marketing: Advantages and Disadvantages Advantages • Economies of scale in production and distribution • Lower marketing costs • Power and scope • Consistency in brand image • Ability to leverage good ideas quickly and efficiently • Uniformity of marketing practices • Helps to establish relationships outside of the "political arena" • Helps to encourage ancillary industries to be set up to cater for the needs of the global player Disadvantages • Differences in consumer needs, wants, and usage patterns for products • Differences in consumer response to marketing mix elements • Differences in brand and product development and the competitive environment • Differences in the legal environment, some of which may conflict with those of the home market • Differences in the institutions available, some of which may call for the creation • Differences in the institutions available, some of which may call for the creation of entirely new ones • Differences in administrative procedures • Differences in product placement. What is Export? Export is the provision of goods, services or knowledge across national and international boundaries. Australia offers a wide range of goods and services to the world's markets. Export products include manufactures, computer software, business consultancies, education services and technology transfer. Exporting of goods from Australia is controlled by laws and government policies. Goods may not be exported unless all the necessary export permits have been obtained from the relevant agency. The federal, state and
  • 68.
    68 territory governments providea wide range of services to new exporters including advice and information about getting into exporting and assistance on the ground in foreign markets. Types of Export Export is divided into two main types: direct and indirect exports Direct exports Direct exports are transactions where exporters enter into direct relationships with importers overseas and negotiate a contract for the sale of goods and services. Alternatively, exporters may use a commission agent in the overseas market to solicit orders and generally represent the exporter's interests. The agent is paid by means of a commission on the value of orders obtained. Indirect exports Indirect exports are transactions arranged in Australia through local merchants or the Australian-based branch of an overseas company. Sales are negotiated with a trader in the exporter's country with payment made in local currency from the trader's office. For example, a Japanese trading house in Victoria arranges the contract for the supply of a particular product for the Japanese market. In such cases, payment will probably be made in Australian dollars. The Benefits of Export The benefits of exporting products and/or services include: Development of Additional Sales For most companies, exporting is a logical way of expanding sales when the domestic market has been fully developed. Optimizing Prices We may be able to achieve a much higher price for exported goods than is possible on the domestic market. Maximizing Resources Expansion into overseas markets can be an excellent way of increasing production with corresponding economies of scale in plant utilization and raw material purchases. Levelling Seasonal Demand
  • 69.
    69 Marketing internationally, especiallyin both northern and southern hemispheres, can achieve an overall levelling of seasonal demand for products like summer and winter clothing, sports equipment, heating and cooling equipment etc. Distribution of Market Risk A company can protect itself from the risk of a downturn in any one particular market by operating in a number of different markets, both domestic and overseas. Increased Competitive Advantage An improvement in product and service will usually flow from exposure to international competition. This in turn will lead to an increased competitive advantage in both the international and domestic areas. Improved Morale Being part of an internationally successful company will boost staff morale, particularly if the contribution of all staff members is recognized as an integral part of the company's international success. Capitalization of A Unique Product or Technology A unique product, service or technology that's difficult to sell on the domestic market may be easier to sell overseas. A Proactive Measure to Combat Foreign Competition It's possible to neutralize overseas competitors in the domestic market by exporting to the overseas competitor's market. The Risks From Export It is not possible to eliminate risk from export transactions. The development of export markets must be regarded as a long-term investment and companies should not expect an immediate return on the time and capital they invest. Banks, accountants, export consultants and government agencies can advise on ways of minimizing financial risks and exporters are encouraged to use external advice to supplement their own skill base. A risk management strategy developed as part of exporter export business plan will help identify risks to your export business and provide a strategy to minimise and handle those risks should they occur.
  • 70.
    70 There are anumber of different types of risks that exporter should consider, including: • Financial • Intellectual property • Increased insurance claims • Inadequate resources  Financial risks A. Failure to Pay Be aware that there's a series of international payment terms ranging from totally secure (exporter paid before goods are dispatched) to minimum security (exporter send the goods and wait for payment). Which particular term is used is negotiable between the buyer and seller when entering into a contract. B. Cash Flow Export will have a significant effect on the cash flow cycle of exporter business. It's not always possible to negotiate payment in advance of or immediately after shipment. This may lead to a considerable delay in receiving payment for goods and result in a cash flow problem. Alternatively, if favourable terms are available, export can have a very positive effect on the cash flow cycle. C. Foreign Currency Risk If export contracts are written in foreign currencies, fluctuations in rates of exchange can result in financial loss. This risk can be avoided by quoting in Australian dollars or, if this isn't acceptable to the overseas buyer, by taking forward exchange cover with the bank. D. Inadequate Working Capital Exporters may need additional working capital to purchase the raw materials and other components they require to produce goods for export. Access to adequate pre-shipment finance is crucial to export success. There are risks involved in over-borrowing and firms must ensure that they can fully service the additional borrowings export may entail.
  • 71.
    71  Intellectual Property Inexperiencedexporters are vulnerable to the risk of losing intellectual property. The legal systems in some countries do not afford the same level of protection for intellectual property rights, as does the Australian system. The cost of patenting a product or registering a trademark internationally can be substantial, as can the defence of patents or trademarks if they are infringed. Exporters should also ensure that their product does not infringe the intellectual property rights of other companies already operating in the marketplace.  Increased Insurance Claims Transport over long distances with repeated handling can increase the risk of cargo damage. Freight forwarders can advise on the best methods of packing and transport to prevent damage and reduce the risk of claims. Unethical trading partners may use spurious claims to achieve a discount on price. In such circumstances it is advisable to obtain inspection certificates from cargo surveyors to prove quality standards at the point of loading. Given the increasing trend toward litigation, exporters are now more vulnerable to product liability claims in the overseas market. Exporters must consider the difficulty of obtaining adequate product liability insurance and the cost of such cover. It is also important to consider the warranty, continuing technical update of products, spare parts supplies, servicing of equipment etc that may be required to support export sales. All these factors will affect the ongoing market acceptance of the product or service and its price in the market place.  Inadequate Resources A business seeking to enter the international marketplace must ensure that it has adequate resources, including raw materials, components and human and financial resources to meet the export requirement. If these resources aren't available and part of the export work needs to be subcontracted, the business runs the risk of losing control of quality or of spending time and money on constant supervision.
  • 72.
    72 Why we shouldExport? There are many reasons for a country to export, some of these are: • It provides valuable foreign exchange to country. • It is one of the measures of country’s economic growth. • To control over balance of payments. • For employment generation. • For poverty alleviation. • It provides shield against demand fluctuations in domestic market. • For import of capital goods at 0% duty. • Prepares ourselves for duty free regime. • For capacity utilization. • To get the working capital loan at low rate of interest. • In line with company’s & country’s image. How to Export? Golden Rule: In order to be successful in exporting one must fully research its markets. No one should ever try to tackle every market at once. Many enthusiastic persons bitten by the export bug fail because they bite off more than they can chew. Overseas design and product requirements must be carefully considered. Always sell as close to the market as possible. The fewer intermediaries one has the better, because every intermediary needs some percentage for his share in his business, which means less profit for the exporter and higher prices for the customer. All goods for export must be efficiently produced. They must be produced with due regard to the needs of export markets. It is no use trying to sell windows which open outwards in a country where, traditionally, windows open inwards. Sell Experience: If a person cannot easily export his goods, may be he can sell his experience. Alternatively, he can concentrate on supplying goods and materials to exporters' who already have established
  • 73.
    73 an export trade.He can concentrate on making what are termed 'own brand' products, much demanded by buyers in overseas markets which have the manufacturing know-how or facilities. Selling in Export: In today's competitive world, everyone has to be sold. The customer always has a choice of suppliers. Selling is an honorable profession, and you have to be an expert salesman. On-Time Deliveries: Late deliveries are not always an exporters fault. Dock strikes, go-slows, etc. occur almost everywhere in the world. If one enters into export for the first time, he must ensure of fast and efficient delivery of the promised consignment. Communication: Communication internal and external must be comprehensive and immediate. Good communication is vital in export. When you are in doubt, pick up the phone or email for immediate clarification. Testing Product: The risk of failure in export markets can be minimized by intelligent use of research. Before committing to a large-scale operation overseas, try out on a small scale. Use the sample test, and any mistakes can then be corrected without much harm having been done. While the test campaign may appear to cost more initially, remember that some of the cost will be repaid by sales, so that test marketing often turns out to be cheaper. Approach: If possible some indication of the attitudes towards the product should be established, like any sales operation. Even if the product is successful, to obtain reactions from the customer. Advantages of Export • The income from export business is exempted to the specified extent under the Income Tax Act, 1961. • Refund of central excise and custom duty on export is also made under the Duty Drawback Scheme of the Government.
  • 74.
    74 • There is no sales tax on products meant for exports. • Duty free import of raw materials is allowed under various schemes of Ministry of Commerce. • Foreign exchange regulations have been substantially liberalized for exporters. • Liberal release of foreign exchange is made available for travel abroad. • Norms for establishing offices abroad by the exporters have been eased. • Export credit is also available to the exporters at confessional rates of interest. • Transport subsidy is given for export by air as well as rail. • Import policy has also been liberalized substantially for export oriented importers. Process of Export Management The process of export management is essentially the process of planning, scheduling and controlling the complex of non-routine activities that must be completed to secure the export orders and to ensure the timely shipment of goods. The managerial process involved in export management relates to the following three activities: 1. Planning 2. Scheduling, and 3. Controlling PLANNIN SCHEDULING G CONTROLLING Fig 1: Process of Export Management
  • 75.
    75 1. Planning Planning refers to taking various decisions involved in export business. This relates to procurement of export orders and their timely and successful execution. Planning for export order would involve making concerted efforts supported by proper market entry strategies to get the export order. 2. Scheduling Scheduling refers to deciding the logistics for execution of export order. This is primarily concerned with implementation and monitoring of export order. This involves defining in detail the various jobs/activities, the nature of those jobs/activities (parallel or sequential), expected time frame for completion of those jobs/activities and fixing responsibility for completion. 3. Controlling It seeks to ensure whether the activities planned have been completed on time or not and whether the ffoll Posstt ol o - low -e x ow e P various schedules drawn up for execution of those orders have been followed or not. A system of reporting --u p xpor up por a tt acttii c should be developed and implemented in every export organization to ensure proper control of various activities on on involved in execution of export orders. EXPORT CYCLE The various activities/stages involved in planning and execution of an export order are performed in a or d Co - or Co diin - n sequential manner. Therefore, the activities/stages are viewed as different links in the chain of a cycle called attii a onon Plla export cycle. The export cycle is divided into three phases: Ex P Ex M o mplle a M mp po nn p nn on e m or II n iing rtts ii m ng ttor en t a. Planning for exports s or d g off on & or g o i on or ent de E iin e r Ex & n atti r b. Implementation and monitoring of an export order ffor or a xpo po c. Post exports follow up action. rtt r
  • 76.
    76 Fig. 2: Export Cycle A. Planning for Exports Planning for exports involves the following activities namely, 1. Understanding the international trade environment 2. Setting up an export firm/organization structure 3. Identification of export opportunities 4. Procurement of export order, negotiation and confirmation. B. Implementation and Monitoring of Export Order This represents the second phase in the export cycle and involves the following activities: 1. Development of logistics for execution of export order 2. Export financing arranging pre-shipment finance 3. Procurement of goods/supplies-domestic procurement and imports 4. Labeling, packaging, packing and marking 5. Pre-shipment inspection 6. Export risks-identification, quantification and management 7. Pre-shipment documentation 8. Shipment of good-central excise and customs clearance and transportation
  • 77.
    77 9. Compliance with exchange control regulations C. Post Export Follow-up Action Once the shipment of goods has been sent, export manager should take the necessary follow-up action. This would involve the following steps: 1. Negotiation of documents with the bank to realize payment against the port shipment, 2. Arranging post shipment finance 3. Claiming incentives/facilities 4. Maintaining liaison with the importer 5. Settlement of disputes, if any. Export Marketing Plan An export marketing plan is step-by-step guide to strategy implementation. It addresses strategic issues and outlines the corresponding operational action to be taken. It specifies targets for each step. The plan should answer all questions on how the export firm’s strategy is to be implemented and direct the enterprise in attaining the strategic objective. A typical export marketing plan focuses on the following aspects: • Marketing objectives • Market segmentation and positioning, • Market research, • Characteristics of the product line, • Export pricing, • Distribution channels, and • Promotional strategies. Some Practical Suggestion • The exporters should innovate new product designs, strategies and promotional policies to improve the level of exports. This helps them to make ‘value rich offers’ that are better than the best. • The exporter should aim at a Market Niche rather than at the mass market. • Exporters should know the key buyers in the target market. • Exporters should choose their markets carefully. The choice of market can make the difference between success and failure in exporting.
  • 78.
    78 • Exporters should clarify their motives for exporting and set their objectives at the outset. They should know why they want to export and set their goals. • Exporters should consider export market development a long-term investment. Sustained efforts are essential in export marketing. • Planning and strategy development are essential for success in the long run in export trade. • The export firm should have the requisite technical expertise, in addition to careful planning and suitable products. • No enterprise should seek entry an export market until it is ready. Any attempt at exporting without experience in domestic marketing is bound to fail. • The responsibility for the export effort should be assigned to a key staff member, usually known as export manager. Tips For Export Marketing 1. Select the product and the target market on the basis of desk research even before considering exporting. 2. Once a market has been decided upon, the entrepreneur should carry out in-depth study of the target market. 3. The aim of the first visit to foreign market should not be to do business or looking for orders. Rather, the visit should be used to improve the preparation for entering the market. 4. Evaluate all the information collected and then formulate a marketing strategy and develop a marketing plan. 5. Gaining foothold in foreign markets can only be effective on a long term basis. Thus, the entrepreneur should have the strong financial base. 6. The foreign buyers can’t afford to loose face and credibility by deterioration in quality or alternatives to price and/or late deliveries. It is important to understand the requirement of the foreign buyers before marketing commitments. 7. In exports, consumers are quality and price conscious in a market which enjoys large and varied supplies. Success or failure in business will depend upon understanding this sensitivity of the foreign buyer. The entrepreneur should adopt a consumer oriented approach to manufacturing and selling.
  • 79.
    79 8. International markets are trend sensitive. Designs frequently change and products may not remain in demand. It is therefore, necessary to be aware of this trend and efforts should be made to keep up-to-date with the market trends. 9. Foreign markets, particularly in the developed countries, are often highly segmented into different age and income groups. The exporter should select the right market segment and accordingly position the product in the market. Market Entry Strategies: Location of Importers The main thrust of the market entry strategy should be to ensure long-term presence in the chosen export market. This would be possible only if long-term approach is followed to export marketing as this is the basic condition for success in the export business. There are four alternative strategies to penetrate the foreign market with a view to locating the importers for the export product(s). These strategies are as follows: 1. Regular trade fair participation. 2. Business promotion visits to foreign markets. 3. Doing business through agents. 4. Opening overseas offices. 1. Regular Trade Fair Participation Participation in foreign trade fairs is one of the oldest forms of promotion of exports. Trade fairs provide an opportunity to the exporter to display their products to large number of buyers or their representatives who visit the fair. It offers tremendous facilities to bring across the message to a large number of buyers than perhaps any other trade promotional tool. (See Annexure) The objectives of trade fair participation are as follows: ♦ To introduce the concept of the products i.e., the basic theme of the products.
  • 80.
    80 ♦ To introduce the export firm in the foreign market. ♦ To introduce the brand of the product or increase the popularity of the existing brand. ♦ To conduct consumer research on the new product and test it in the market. ♦ To ensure customer loyalty. ♦ To look for prospective buyers. 2. Business Promotion Visits to Foreign Markets The exporter should plan for to foreign market in order to build relationships and understandings with the foreign buyers. The planning for the business promotion trip can be divided into three stages: (i) Before the trip, (ii) During the trip, and (iii) After the trip (i)- Planning Before the Trip An exporter should identify the valid reasons to justify his visit to the foreign country. There could be number of reasons to visit the foreign market. Some of these are as follows: ♦ To study the latest trends in the market to explore the possibilities for new business opportunities. ♦ To find new buyers. ♦ To find and negotiate with market agents. ♦ To hold negotiations with the buyers to conclude the business deals. ♦ To locate new buyers. ♦ To launch a new product. ♦ To attend to the queries of the foreign buyers and solve their problems in the use of the product. ♦ To develop understanding the riles and regulations as regards tariff, fumigation, inspection, labeling, packaging, safety, public health and quality of the products. (ii)- During the Business Promotion Visit The exporter should observe the following guidelines on his arrival in the foreign country: ♦ He should inform the buyers regarding his arrival and reconfirm the appointments. ♦ The exporter should be on time for his meeting with the prospective buyer. It is important to remember that the punctuality is at a premium in all the developed countries. ♦ The exporter should take his notes during discussion with the importer.
  • 81.
    81 ♦ The exporter should find time to visit the market/chamber of commerce and the economic section of the Embassy of India to gain first hand information about the foreign market and the business practices. (iii)- After the Business Promotion Visit Once the visit is over, the exporter should take up promptly the follow up action on the various points agreed with the buyers during the business meetings, this may relate to providing clarification, giving additional information, sending modified samples or any other point mentioned by the importer which needs clarifications. Time is the essence of follow up action to ensure successful conclusion of the business visit. The exporter should also submit the bank certificate for repatriation of export proceeds and evidence regarding bringing goods. 3. Business through Agents Many buyers prefer to make imports through import agents (also known as commercial agents/sales representatives etc.) based in their own countries. It is also common among some of the large importers to make direct imports through the intermediation of a representative firm in the exporting country. The representative firm is known as buying house or buying agent in exporting country or indenting agent in the importing country. The importer depends upon the buying agent for selection of the exporter to arrange for timely supplies. Thus, the exporter can approach either of the two or both of them to promote his exports business. These agents are classified as: a) Import Agent or Overseas Agent b) Buying Agent. a) Import Agent (or Overseas Agent) The exporter should prefer an import agent in the following situations: • When communication is a major problem, particularly in the case of traditional exporters. • In certain countries like Spain, Scandinavia etc. exporters can penetrate only through agents. These agents ensure prompt payment. The possibilities of default or delay in payments can also be minimized. Functions of import agents are Marketing, Quality Control, Ensuring Payments, and Warehousing etc. b) Buying Agents Buying agents are the firms in exporting countries to represent foreign buyers. Generally, foreign buyers who regularly import from certain countries face the difficulty in locating the reliable exporters to supply the goods of the desired quality. In order to overcome this problem, the large importers may appoint local business firms in the countries of exports to act as their indenting agents. Such firms of indenting agents are usually referred to as buying agents or the buying houses in the exporting countries. The main function of a
  • 82.
    82 buying agent is to arrange foe supplies of goods desired by the foreign buyers i.e. their principals. The various functions performed by buying agents are merchandising, product development, and quality control, placing order, payment arrangements and documentation. 4. Opening Overseas Offices Another strategy to enter a foreign market is to open the office in the market itself. The implication of this strategy is that the exporter and the importer will be the same party. The exporter can utilize this route to ensure his effective presence in the foreign market. As a consequence, the chain of distribution shall be as follows: ExporterImporter (Exporter) WholesalerRetailerConsumer In this case, the exporter with the help of his overseas office shall be in a position to effectively penetrate the foreign market. He would have first hand information of the foreign market and the market inputs so collected would help him plan his marketing strategy. He can secure business from the wholesalers or the sales representative or the sales / commercial agents or the distributors. The distinctive feature of this strategy is that the exporter can gain the confidence of the foreign buyers by referring to his office both in India and the foreign market. The presence of the exporter in the foreign market will give confidence to the buyers that they are dealing with the reliable party. The exporter on his part can provide better after sale service to the importers or attend to their queries promptly. This arrangement also enables the exporter to ensure that there are no defaults in making payments. Better payment terms can also be offered to the foreign buyers. As far as exporter is concerned, he would be receiving orders from his own outlet in the foreign market. The order can be placed on D/A (Document against Acceptance) terms of payment with the exporter by the importer which represents the Indian exporter in the foreign country. This will reduce the risk of non payment and also obviate the need for obtaining letter of credit. One of the fundamental advantages of this strategy is that the exporter can increase his profitability by being more competitive in the foreign market. The other advantage is that the exporter can bypass the traditional
  • 83.
    83 channel used fordistribution of the product and offer the product at lower prices directly to the retailers. This would help the exporter to not only increase his sales volume but also his profits. Developing an Export Strategy Determining Products' Export Potential There are several ways to evaluate the export potential of our products and services in overseas markets. The most common approach is to examine the success of our products domestically. If our company succeeds at selling in the U.S. market, there is a good chance that it will also be successful in markets abroad, at least those where similar needs and conditions exist. Another means to assess our company's potential in exporting is by examining the unique or important features of our product. If those features are hard to duplicate abroad, then it is likely that we will be successful overseas. A unique product may have little competition and demand for it might be quite high. Finally, our product may have export potential even if there are declining sales in the U.S. market. Assessing Company's Export Readiness By answering these general questions about how exporting will enhance into our company's short, medium and long-term goals will help determine our company's readiness to export: • What does the company want to gain from exporting? • Is exporting consistent with other company goals? • What demands will exporting place on the company's key resources, management and personnel, production capacity, and finance and how will these demands be met? • Are the expected benefits worth the costs, or would company resources be better used for developing new domestic business? Developing an Export Plan Once we decided to sell our products abroad, it is time to develop an export plan. A crucial first step in planning is to develop broad consensus among key management on the company's goals, objectives, capabilities, and
  • 84.
    84 constraints. In addition,all aspects of an export plan should be agreed upon by the personnel involved in the exporting process, as they will ultimately execute the export plan. The purposes of the export plan are (a) to assemble facts, constraints, and goals and (b) to create an action statement that takes all of these into account. At least the following ten questions should ultimately be addressed: 1. Which products are selected for export development? What modifications, if any, must be made to adapt them for overseas markets? 2. Which countries are targeted for sales development? 3. In each country, what is the basic customer profile? What marketing and distribution channels should be used to reach customers? 4. What special challenges pertain to each market (competition, cultural differences, import controls, etc.), and what strategy will be used to address them? 5. How will the product's export sale price be determined? 6. What specific operational steps must be taken and when? 7. What will be the time frame for implementing each element of the plan? 8. What personnel and company resources will be dedicated to exporting? 9. What will be the cost in time and money for each element? 10. How will results be evaluated and used to modify the plan? The first time an export plan is developed, it should be kept simple. It need be only a few pages long, since important market data and planning elements may not yet be available. The initial planning effort itself gradually generates more information and insight. As the planners learn more about exporting and our company's competitive position, the export plan will become more detailed and complete. A detailed plan is recommended for companies that intend to export directly. Companies choosing indirect export methods may require much simpler plans.
  • 85.
    85 Developing A Marketing Plan Once you have decided that your company is able and committed to exporting, the next step is to develop a marketing plan. Marketing Strategy Benefits A clearly written marketing strategy offers six immediate benefits: 1. Because written plans display strengths and weaknesses more readily, they are a great help in formulating and polishing an export strategy. 2. Written plans are not easily forgotten, overlooked, or ignored by those charged with executing them. If deviation from the original plan occurs, it is likely to be due to a deliberate and thoughtful choice. 3. Written plans are easier to communicate to others and are less likely to be misunderstood. 4. Written plans allocate responsibilities and provide for an evaluation of results. 5. Written plans are helpful when seeking financial assistance. They indicate to lenders that you have a serious approach to the export venture. 6. Written plans give management a clear understanding of what will be required of them and thus help to ensure a commitment to exporting. Actually, a written plan signals that the decision to export has already been made. Building an international business takes time. It usually takes months, sometimes even several years, before an exporting company begins to see a return on its investment of time and money. By committing to the specifics of a written plan, top management can make sure that the firm will finish what it begins and that the hopes that prompted its export efforts will be fulfilled. Market Research To successfully export our product, we should examine foreign markets through research. The purpose is to identify marketing opportunities and constraints abroad, as well as to identify prospective buyers and customers.
  • 86.
    86 Market research encompassesall methods that a company can use to determine which foreign markets have the best potential for its products. Results of this research inform the firm of: the largest markets for its product, the fastest growing markets, market trends and outlook, market conditions and practices, and competitive firms and products. Firm may begin to export without conducting any market research if it receives unsolicited orders from abroad. A firm may research a market by using either primary or secondary data resources. In conducting primary market research, a company collects data directly from the foreign marketplace through interviews, surveys, and other direct contact with representatives and potential buyers. Primary market research has the advantage of being tailored to the company's needs and provides answers to specific questions, but the collection of such data is time-consuming and expensive. When conducting secondary market research, a company collects data from various sources, such as trade statistics for a country or a product. Working with secondary sources is less expensive and helps the company focus its marketing efforts. Although secondary data sources are critical to market research, they do have limitations. Yet, even with these limitations, secondary research is a valuable and relatively easy first step for a company to take. It may be the only step needed if the company decides to export indirectly, since the intermediary firm may have advanced research capabilities. Methods of Market Research Because of the expense of primary market research, most firms rely on secondary data sources. The three following recommendations will help us obtain useful secondary information: 1. Keep abreast of world events that influence the international marketplace, watch for announcements of specific projects, or simply visiting likely markets. For example, a thawing of political hostilities often leads to the opening of economic channels between countries. 2. Analyze trade and economic statistics. Trade statistics are generally compiled by product category and by country. These statistics provide the U.S. firm with information concerning shipments of products over specified periods of time. Demographic and general economic statistics, such as population size and
  • 87.
    87 makeup, per capita income, and production levels by industry can be important indicators of the market potential for a company's products. 3. Obtain advice from experts. There are several ways of obtaining this advice: • Contact experts at the U.S. Department of Commerce and other government agencies. • Attend seminars, workshops, and international trade shows. • Hire an international trade and marketing consultant. • Talk with successful exporters of similar products. • Contact trade and industry association staff. A Step-by-Step Approach to Market Research It involves screening potential markets, assessing the targeted markets, and drawing conclusions. A. Screen Potential Markets • Step 1:- Obtain export statistics that indicate product exports to various countries. Published export statistics provide a reliable indicator of where U.S. exports are currently being shipped. The U.S. Census Bureau provides these statistics in a published format. Trade statistics also can be obtained using the National Trade Data Bank (NTDB). • Step 2:- Identify five to ten large and fast-growing markets for the firm's product. Look at them over the past three to five years. Has market growth been consistent year to year? Did import growth occur even during periods of economic recession? If not, did growth resume with economic recovery? • Step 3:- Identify some smaller but fast-emerging markets that may provide ground-floor opportunities. If the market is just beginning to open up, there may be fewer competitors than in established markets. Growth rates should be substantially higher in these countries to qualify as up-and-coming markets, given the lower starting point. • Step 4:- Target three to five of the most statistically promising markets for further assessment. Consult with a Department of Commerce Export Assistance Center, business associates, freight forwarders, and others to further evaluate targeted markets. B. Assess Targeted Markets
  • 88.
    88 • Step 1:- Examine trends for company products as well as related products, that could influence demand. Calculate overall consumption of the product and the amount accounted for by imports. The National Trade Data Bank (NTDB) and the National Technical Information Service (NTIS) offer Industry Sector Analyses (ISAs), Country Commercial Guides (CCGs), and other reports that give economic backgrounds and market trends for each country. Demographic information (such as population and age) can be obtained from World Population (Census) and Statistical Yearbook (United Nations). • Step 2:- Ascertain the sources of competition, including the extent of domestic industry production and the major foreign countries the firm is competing against in each targeted market by using ISAs and competitive assessments. This information is available from the NTDB and the NTIS. Look at each competitor's U.S. market share. • Step 3:- Analyze factors affecting marketing and use of the product in each market, such as end-user sectors, channels of distribution, cultural idiosyncrasies, and business practices. Again, the ISAs and Customized Market Analyses (CMAs) offered by the Department of Commerce are useful. • Step 4:- Identify any foreign barriers (tariff or nontariff) for the product being imported into the country. Identify any U.S. barriers (such as export controls) that affect exports to the country. • Step 5:- Identify any U.S. or foreign government incentives that promote exporting of your particular product or service. C. Draw Conclusions After analyzing the data, the company may conclude that its marketing resources would be applied more effectively to a few countries. Exporting to one or two countries will allow the company to focus its resources without jeopardizing its domestic sales efforts. The company's internal resources should determine its level of effort. Methods/Channels of Exporting The most common methods of exporting are indirect selling and direct selling. In indirect selling, an export intermediary such as an export management company (EMC) or an export trading company (ETC) normally
  • 89.
    89 assumes responsibility forfinding overseas buyers, shipping products, and getting paid. In direct selling, the U.S. producer deals directly with a foreign buyer. The paramount consideration in determining whether to market indirectly or directly is the level of resources a company is willing to devote to its international marketing effort. Other factors to consider when deciding whether to market indirectly or directly include: • The size of firm; • The nature of products; • Previous export experience and expertise; • Business conditions in the selected overseas markets. Approaches to Exporting The way your company chooses to export its products can have a significant effect on its export plan and specific marketing strategies. The basic distinction among approaches to exporting relates to the company's level of involvement in the export process. There are at least four approaches, which may be used alone or in combination: 1. Passively filling orders from domestic buyers who then export the product: - These sales are indistinguishable from other domestic sales as far as the original seller is concerned. Someone else has decided that the product in question meets foreign demand. That party takes all the risk and handles all of the exporting details, in some cases without even the awareness of the original seller. 2. Seeking out domestic buyers who represent foreign end users or customers: - Many U.S. and foreign corporations, general contractors, foreign trading companies, foreign government agencies, foreign distributors and retailers, and others in the United States purchase for export. These buyers are a large market for a wide variety of goods and services. In this case a company may know its product is being exported, but it is still the buyer who assumes the risk and handles the details of exporting. 3. Exporting indirectly through intermediaries: - With this approach, a company engages the services of an intermediary firm capable of finding foreign markets and buyers for its products. EMCs, ETCs, international trade consultants, and other intermediaries can give the exporter access to well- established expertise and trade contacts. Yet, the exporter can still retain considerable control over the
  • 90.
    90 process and can realize some of the other benefits of exporting, such as learning more about foreign competitors, new technologies, and other market opportunities. 4. Exporting directly: - This approach is the most ambitious and difficult, since the exporter personally handles every aspect of the exporting process from market research and planning to foreign distribution and collections. Consequently, a significant commitment of management time and attention is required to achieve good results. However, this approach may also be the best way to achieve maximum profits and long-term growth. With appropriate help and guidance from the Department of Commerce, state trade offices, freight forwarders, international banks, and other service groups, even small or medium-sized firms can export directly if they are able to commit enough staff time to the effort. For those who cannot make that commitment, the services of an EMC, ETC, trade consultant, or other qualified intermediary are indispensable. Distribution Considerations • Which channels of distribution should the firm use to market its products abroad? • Where should the firm produce its products and how should it distribute them in the foreign market? • What types of representatives, brokers, wholesalers, dealers, distributors, or end-use customers, and so forth should the firm use? • What are the characteristics and capabilities of the available intermediaries? • Should the assistance of an EMC or ETC be obtained? Indirect Exporting The principal advantage of indirect marketing for a smaller U.S. company is that it provides a way to penetrate foreign markets without the complexities and risks of direct exporting. Several kinds of intermediary firms provide a range of export services. Direct Exporting The advantages of direct exporting for a U.S. company include more control over the export process, potentially higher profits, and a closer relationship to the overseas buyer and marketplace.
  • 91.
    91 When a companychooses to export directly to foreign markets, it usually makes internal organizational changes to support more complex functions. A direct exporter normally selects the markets it wishes to penetrate, chooses the best channels of distribution for each market, and then makes specific foreign business connections in order to sell its product. Once the company is organized to handle exporting, a proper channel of distribution needs to be carefully chosen for each market. These channels include sales representatives, agents, distributors, retailers, and end users. Sales Representatives Overseas, a sales representative is the equivalent of a manufacturer's representative in the United States. The representative uses the company's product literature and samples to present the product to potential buyers. A representative usually handles many complementary lines that do not conflict. The sales representative usually works on a commission basis, assumes no risk or responsibility, and is under contract for a definite period of time. The contract defines territory, terms of sale, method of compensation, reasons and procedures for terminating the agreement, and other details. The sales representative may operate on either an exclusive or a nonexclusive basis. Agents The widely misunderstood term "agent" means a representative who normally has authority, perhaps even a power of attorney, to make commitments on behalf of the firm he or she represents. Firms in the United States and other developed countries have stopped using the term and instead rely on the term "representative," since agent can imply more than intended. It is important that any contract state whether the representative or agent does or does not have legal authority to obligate the firm. Distributors The foreign distributor is a merchant who purchases goods from a U.S. exporter (often at a substantial discount) and resells it for a profit. The foreign distributor generally provides support and service for the product, thus relieving the U.S. company of these responsibilities. The distributor usually carries an inventory of products and a sufficient supply of spare parts and also maintains adequate facilities and personnel for normal servicing operations. Distributors typically handle a range of non-conflicting but complementary products. End users do not usually buy from a distributor; they buy from retailers or dealers. Foreign Retailers A company may also sell directly to foreign retailers, although in such transactions, products are generally limited to consumer lines. The growth of major retail chains in markets such as Canada and Japan has created new
  • 92.
    92 opportunities for thistype of direct sale. This method relies mainly on traveling sales representatives who directly contact foreign retailers, although results might also be achieved by mailing catalogs, brochures, or other literature. The direct mail approach has the benefits of eliminating commissions, reducing traveling expenses, and reaching a broader audience. For optimal results, a firm that uses direct mail to reach foreign retailers should support it with other marketing activities. American manufacturers with ties to major domestic retailers may also be able to use them to sell abroad. Many large American retailers maintain overseas buying offices and use these offices to sell abroad when practical. Direct Sales to End Users A U.S. business may sell its products or services directly to end users in foreign countries. These buyers can be foreign governments; institutions such as hospitals, banks, and schools; or businesses. Buyers can be identified at trade shows, through international publications, or through Commerce's Export Contact List Service. The U.S. Company should be aware that if a product is sold in such a direct fashion, the company is responsible for shipping, payment collection, and product servicing unless other arrangements are made. Unless the cost of providing these services is built into the export price, a company could have a narrower profit than originally intended. Preparing Product for Export Selecting and preparing product for export requires not only product knowledge but also knowledge of the unique characteristics of each market being targeted. Market research conducted and foreign representatives contacts should give the U.S. company an idea of what products can be sold and where. However, before the sale can occur, the company may need to modify a particular product to satisfy buyer tastes or needs in foreign markets. The extent to which the company will modify products sold in export markets is a key policy issue to be addressed by management. Some exporters believe the domestic product can be exported without significant changes. Others seek to consciously develop uniform products that are acceptable in all markets. If the company manufactures more than one product or offers many models of a single product, it should start with the one best suited to the targeted market. Ideally, the firm chooses one or two products that fit the market without major design or engineering modifications. Doing so works best when the U.S. company:
  • 93.
    93 • Deals with international customers that have the same demographic characteristics or the same specifications for manufactured goods; • Supplies parts for U.S. goods that are exported to foreign countries without modifications; • Produces a unique product that is sold on the basis of its status or foreign appeal; or produces a product that has few or no distinguishing features and that is sold almost exclusively on a commodity or price basis. Questions to Consider • What foreign needs does the product satisfy? • What product should the firm offer abroad? • Should the firm modify its domestic-market product for sale abroad? Should it develop a new product for the foreign market? • What specific features, such as design, color, size, packaging, brand and warranty should the product have? • What specific services are necessary abroad at the pre-sale and post-sale stages? • Are the firm’s services and repair facilities adequate? Product Adaptation To enter a foreign market successfully, a U.S. company may have to modify its product to conform to government regulations, geographic and climatic conditions, buyer preferences, or standards of living. The company may also need to modify its product to facilitate shipment or to compensate for possible differences in engineering and design standards. Foreign government product regulations are common in international trade and are expected to expand in the future. These regulations can take the form of high tariffs or nontariff barriers, such as regulations or product specifications. Governments impose these regulations to: • Protect domestic industries from foreign competition; • Protect the health of their citizens; • Force importers to comply with environmental controls; • Ensure that importers meet local requirements for electrical or measurement systems; • Restrict the flow of goods originating in or having components from certain countries; and • Protect their citizens from cultural influences deemed inappropriate. It is often necessary for a company to adapt its product to account for geographic and climatic conditions as well
  • 94.
    94 as for theavailability of resources. Factors such as topography, humidity, and energy costs can affect the performance of a product or even define its use. For example, the cost of petroleum products and the state of a country's infrastructure may indicate the demand for energy-consuming products. Market potential must be large enough to justify the direct and indirect costs involved in product adaptation. The firm should assess the costs to be incurred and though it may be difficult, determine the increased revenues expected from adaptation. The decision to adapt a product is based partly on the degree of commitment to the specific foreign market; a firm with short-term goals will probably have a different perspective than a firm with long-term goals. Engineering and Redesign The exporter should be aware that even fundamental aspects of its products may require changing. For example, electrical standards in many foreign countries differ from U.S. electrical standards. It is not unusual to find phases, cycles, or voltages (for both residential and commercial use) that would damage or impair the operating efficiency of equipment designed for use in the United States. These electrical standards sometimes vary even in the same country. Knowing this requirement, the manufacturer can determine whether a special motor must be substituted or arrange for a different drive ratio to achieve the desired operating revolutions per minute. Similarly, many kinds of equipment must be engineered in the metric system for integration with other pieces of equipment or for compliance with the standards of a given country. The United States is virtually alone in its adherence to a non-metric system, and U.S. firms that compete successfully in the global market realize that conversion to metric measurement is an important detail in selling to overseas customers. Even instruction or maintenance manuals should take care to give dimensions in centimeters, weights in grams or kilos, and temperatures in Celsius degrees. Branding, Labeling, and Packaging Consumers are concerned with both the product itself and the product's supplementary features, such as packaging, warranties, and service. Branding and labeling products in foreign markets raise new considerations for the U.S. company such as: • Are international brand names important to promote and distinguish a product? Conversely, should local brands or private labels be employed to heighten local interest? • Are the colors used on labels and packages offensive or attractive to the foreign buyer? For example, in some countries certain colors are associated with death.
  • 95.
    95 • Can labels be produced in official or customary languages if required by law or practice? • Does information on product content and country of origin have to be provided? • Are weights and measures stated in the local unit? • Must each item be labeled individually? • Are local tastes and knowledge considered? A dry cereal box picturing a U.S. athlete may not be as attractive to overseas consumers as the picture of a local sports hero. A company may find that building international recognition for a brand is expensive. Protection for brand names varies from one country to another. To protect its products and brand names, a company must comply with local laws on patents, copyrights, and trademarks. Installation Another element of product preparation that a company should consider is the ease of installing that product overseas. If technicians or engineers are needed overseas to assist in installation, the company should minimize their time in the field if possible. To do so, the company may wish to preassemble or pretest the product before shipping. Disassembling the product for shipment and reassembling abroad may be considered by the company. This method can save the firm shipping costs, but it may add to delay in payment if the sale is contingent on an assembled product. The company should be careful to provide all product information, such as training manuals, installation instructions, and parts lists - all in the local language - even relatively simple instructions. Warranties The company should include a warranty on the product since the buyer expects a specific level of performance and a guarantee that it will be achieved. Levels of expectation for a warranty vary by country depending upon its level of development, competitive practices, the activism of consumer groups, local standards of production quality, and other factors. Product service guarantees are important since customers overseas typically have service expectations as high as or greater than in the United States. A company may use warranties for advertising purposes to distinguish its product from the competition. Strong warranties may be required to break into a new market, especially if the company is an unknown supplier. In some cases, warranties may be instrumental in making the sale and become a major element in negotiations. Servicing Service after the sale is critical for some products. Generally, the more complex the product's technology, the greater the demand for pre-sale and post-sale service. Therefore, there is pressure in some firms to offer simpler, more robust products overseas thereby reducing the need for maintenance and repairs. U.S. suppliers who rely
  • 96.
    96 on foreign distributorsor agents to provide service backup must take steps to ensure an adequate level of service. These steps include training, periodically checking service quality, and monitoring inventories of spare parts. PROCESSING OF AN EXPORT ORDER Export Order is a document communicating decision of the foreign buyer to purchase certain item(s) from the exporter. It specifies the description of the item(s), their quantity and quality specifications, unit price, delivery terms, shipping marks, insurance requirements, requirements as regards labeling, packing and packaging, payment terms, pre-shipment inspection requirements, documents required and so on. The Export Order represents an ‘offer to sell’ made by the exporter and its ‘acceptance’ by the foreign buyer. Process of Securing Export Order Generally, the process of obtaining the export order follows the sequence of the steps given below: Step 1:- The exporter locates a trade enquiry i.e., he/she comes across the details of a foreign buyer who is willing to import the item(s). The exporter may get these details through any of the following ways: a) Websites of the import firms. b) Visit to the exporter’s website by an interested foreign buyer. c) Participation in a trade fair/visit to a trade fair by the exporter. d) Business promotion visit to a foreign country. e) Contact with the overseas marketing agent. f) Contact with a buying agent in the exporter’s country. g) Exporter’s own retail outlet in the foreign country. h) Circulation of the trade enquiry by the trade promotion body in the exporter‘s country. Step 2:- On receipt of the trade enquiry, the exporter sends his/her company profile, product profile and the promotional literature of his/her product range to know the interest of the buyer. Step 3:- The buyer may like to have the details of certain product of his/her choice from the exporter.
  • 97.
    97 Step 4:- Theexporter sends the quotation in respect of the product of interest to the buyer. This quotation contains the basic details like its FOB price, mode of payment, photograph of the item along with its specifications and the likely delivery time. Step 5:- On receipt of this basic information, the foreign buyer puts forward his/her requirements as regards the design, size, finish or other specifications of the product in view. Once the product has been identified, then the process of negotiations of the other terms and conditions begins. It is very likely that these terms and conditions would be negotiated only as a result of personal meeting between the exporter and the foreign buyer particularly if the exporter happens to be a new exporter. Step 6:- The exporter sends the proforma invoice to the foreign buyer setting out in detail the terms and conditions negotiated between the two parties. This proforma invoice represents the ‘offer to sell’ made by the exporter. Step 7:- The importer conveys his/her ‘acceptance’ of the exporter on the proforma invoice originally sent by the exporter. It is however, not essential for the offer and acceptance to be on the proforma invoice. These could be in the form of exchange of letters as well. Terms and Conditions of an Export Order The following are the standard clauses of an export order: 1. Product and its description 2. Product specifications as regards its quality 3. Price: FOB/CFR/CIF etc., as per INCOTERMS 2000 4. Quantity 5. Payment Terms: D/A, D/P, Letter of Credit, Advance Payment etc. 6. Delivery Schedule: Time Period; Partial/complete dispatch 7. Mode of Shipment: Air/Sea/Road 8. Type of Shipment: Direct/Transhipment 9. Inspection 10. Labeling, Packaging, Packing and Marking requirements 11. Insurance: By exporter/importer
  • 98.
    98 12. Documentsrequired 13. Escalation clause: Sharing of increase in cost 14. Force Majeure clause: Clause providing for excuse of non-performance due to acts of God. 15. Arbitration Clause: Clause foe settlement of dispute 16. Fines/Penalties 17. Applicability of Law The exporter and importer hold negotiations with regard to the above points to conclude the business deal. Planning for Execution of the Export Order Planning for the execution of the export order involves the following steps: Step 1:- Acknowledgement of the Export Order First of all, the exporter should send a letter of thanks to the foreign buyer for placing the order. Step 2:- Constitution of Team of Executives The exporter should treat each export order as a separate project and constitute a team of executives drawn from the marketing, production, finance and accounts, shipping, quality control departments etc. to implement the order. One of the executives should be made the Team Leader to coordinate with all the departments and external agencies involved in the execution of the order. Step 3:- Scrutiny of the Export Order The careful scrutiny of the order in respect of its following aspects by the team of executive appointed to observe the implementation: i. The order has been received for the product for which quotation/offer was sent and the exporter is still in a position to supply the product. ii. Sizes and specifications should be same as per the offer and quotation. iii. Pre-shipment inspection by Export Inspection Agency is required; the buyer should be informed about the inspection scheme.
  • 99.
    99 iv. Paymentterms are the same as stipulated/negotiated. If the payment is by means of an irrevocable Letter of Credit, it should be ensured that such an irrevocable letter of credit (L/C) has been opened and its terms & conditions have been clearly understood by the exporter and are also acceptable to him/her. v. Special packaging, labeling and marketing requirements, if any, should be noted for compliance. vi. Shipment and delivery date is in conformity with the exporter’s production plan and whether: a. Part shipment is allowed. b. Transhipment is permissible. c. Port of shipment/destination is same. vii. Whether insurance is to be done by the exporter or the buyer, and conditions (terms) of insurance. viii. Documents required by the buyer. It should be examined as to whether the exporter can arrange for the documents required by the buyer. Step 4:- Confirmation of the Export Order The buyer requires the exporter to confirm the order to him/her. Based on this confirmation he/she can draw his/her own schedules for supply of goods to his/her customers or plan for production schedules. Step 5:- Developing Logistics for Execution of the Order Logistics refers to the formulation of a detailed plan of action for the implementation of the export order. This involves identification of the minutest possible activities/jobs that need to be performed to ensure the successful execution of the order as per its terms and conditions. This listing of various jobs/ activities should be done as a result of the brain storming sessions amongst the members of the export team. The team should thus, prepare an Activity Profile for the order. The Activity Profile should state the following: a. Name of job/activity. b. Nature of the activity/job whether it is to be performed sequentially or parallel to some other activity. c. Likely time required for the completion. It should be specified as to what would be earliest start/finish time; the latest start/finish time of the activity and the total time duration for its completion. This information can
  • 100.
    100 used to draw a network diagram to control the likely delay in the execution of the order and as consequence control the likely cost escalations. d. The executive/agency responsible for its completion. Step 6:- Contents of the Activity Profile The contents of the Activity Profile are as follows: 1. Determination of materials/supplies required 2. Making arrangement for the procurement of the materials/supplies 3. Arrangements of funds to send the shipment i.e., packing credit from the bank 4. Labeling, packaging, packing and marking of the export consignments 5. Arrangements for ensuring pre-shipment inspection of goods for quality 6. Compliance with the statutory requirements as regards inspection/authentication of export products 7. Managing the risks involved in the export shipment 8. Appointment of the clearing and forwarding agent 9. Preparing the pre-shipment documents for obtaining central excise and custom clearance of the export shipment. 10. Compliance with the exchange control requirements 11. Shipment of goods 12. Negotiation of documents 13. Arranging post shipment finance from the bank Step 7:- Reservation of Shipping Space The exporter should plan for reservation of the shipping space much in advance in the ship. The reason is that there is a shortage of shipping space and their frequency is also limited. It is quite possible that exporter may not be able to obtain the reservation for the timely shipment of the goods. As far as shipment by sea is concerned, there is not much difficulty in booking the cargo with the airlines. The reservation can be arranged through the clearing and forwarding agent. Thus, the exporter should appoint a clearing and forwarding agent at the initial stages if the shipment is to be sent by sea.
  • 101.
    101 EXPORT PRICING, QUOTATIONS AND INCOTERMS Proper pricing, complete and accurate quotations, choosing the terms of the sale, and selecting the payment method are four critical elements in selling a product or service overseas. Of the four, pricing can be the most problematic, even for an experienced exporter. Pricing Considerations The price considerations listed below will help an exporter determine the best price for the product overseas: • At what price should the firm sell its product in the foreign market? • What type of market positioning (customer perception) does the company want to convey from its pricing structure? • Does the export price reflect the product's quality? • Is the price competitive? • Should the firm pursue market penetration or market-skimming pricing objectives abroad? • What type of discount (trade, cash, quantity) and allowances (advertising, trade-off) should the firm offer its foreign customers? • Should prices differ by market segment? • What should the firm do about product line pricing? • What pricing options are available if the firm's costs increase or decrease? Is the demand in the foreign market elastic or inelastic? • Are the prices going to be viewed by the foreign government as reasonable or exploitative? • Do the foreign country's antidumping laws pose a problem? As in the domestic market, the price at which a product or service is sold directly determines a firm's revenues. It is essential that a firm's market research include an evaluation of all of the variables that may affect the price range for the product or service. If a firm's price is too high, the product or service will not sell. If the price is too low, export activities may not be sufficiently profitable or may actually create a net loss. It is very important that the exporter take into account additional costs that are typically borne by the importer. They include tariffs, customs fees, currency fluctuation transaction costs and value-added taxes (VATs). These additional costs can add substantially to the final price paid by the importer. Foreign Market Objectives
  • 102.
    102 An important aspectof a company's pricing analysis is determining market objectives. For example, is the company attempting to penetrate a new market, looking for long-term market growth, or looking for an outlet for surplus production or outmoded products? Many firms view the foreign market as a secondary market and consequently have lower expectations regarding market share and sales volume. This naturally affects pricing decisions. Marketing and pricing objectives may be general or tailored to particular foreign markets. For example, marketing objectives for sales to a developing nation where per capita income may be one tenth of that in the United States are necessarily different from the objectives for Europe or Japan. Costs The computation of the actual cost of producing a product and bringing it to market is the core element in determining if exporting is financially viable. Many new exporters calculate their export price by the cost-plus method. In the cost-plus method of calculation, the exporter starts with the domestic manufacturing cost and adds administration, research and development, overhead, freight forwarding, distributor margins, customs charges, and profit. Marginal cost pricing is a more competitive method of pricing a product for market entry. This method considers the direct, out-of-pocket expenses of producing and selling products for export as a floor beneath which prices cannot be set without incurring a loss. For example, additional costs may occur due to product modification for the export market that accommodates different sizes, electrical systems, or labels. On the other hand, costs may decrease if the export products are stripped-down versions or made without increasing the fixed costs of domestic production. Other costs should be assessed for domestic and export products according to how much benefit each product receives from such expenditures. Additional costs often associated with export sales include: • Market research and credit checks; • Business travel; • International postage, cable, and telephone rates; • Translation costs; • Commissions, training charges, and other costs involving foreign representatives;
  • 103.
    103 • Consultants and freight forwarders; and • Product modification and special packaging. After the actual cost of the export product has been calculated, the exporter should formulate an approximate consumer price for the foreign market. Factory price $7.50 $7.50 Domestic freight .70 .70 Final consumer price $14.15 $20.30 Table 1: Calculation of Final Consumer Price Market Demand For most consumer goods, per capita income is a good gauge of a market's ability to pay. Some products may create such a strong demand such as popular goods like Levis, that even low per capita income will not affect their selling price. The firm must also keep in mind that currency fluctuations may alter the affordability of its goods. Thus, pricing should try to accommodate wild changes in the U.S. and/or foreign currency. The firm should anticipate the type of potential customers. If the firm's primary customers in a developing country are expatriates or belong to the upper class, a higher price might be feasible even if the average per capita income is low.
  • 104.
    104 Competition In the domesticmarket, few companies are free to set prices without carefully evaluating their competitors' pricing policies. This situation is true in exporting, and is further complicated by the need to evaluate the competition's prices in each potential export market. If there are many competitors within the foreign market, the exporter may have little choice but to match the market price or even under price the product or service in order to establish a market share. On the other hand, if the product or service is new to a particular foreign market, it may actually be possible to set a higher price than in the domestic market. Pricing Summary The key points to remember during determining product's price are: • Determine the objective in the foreign market. • Compute the actual cost of the export product. • Compute the final consumer price. • Evaluate market demand and competition. • Consider modifying the product to reduce the export price. • Include "nonmarket" costs, such as tariffs and customs fees. • Exclude cost elements that provide no benefit to the export function, such as domestic advertising. Quotation and Proforma Invoice Quotations Many export transactions, particularly initial export transactions, begin with the receipt of an inquiry from abroad that is followed by a request for a quotation. The preferred method for export is a pro forma invoice, which a quotation is prepared in invoice format. A quotation describes the product, states a price for it, sets the time of shipment, and specifies the terms of the sale and terms of the payment. Since the foreign buyer may not be familiar with the product, the description of it in an overseas quotation usually must be more detailed than in a domestic quotation. The description should include the following 15 points: 1. Seller's and buyer's names and addresses.
  • 105.
    105 2. Buyer's reference number and date of inquiry. 3. Listing of requested products and brief description. 4. Price of each item (it is advisable to indicate whether items are new or used and to quote in U.S. dollars to reduce foreign-exchange risk). 5. Appropriate gross and net shipping weight (in metric units where appropriate). 6. Appropriate total cubic volume and dimensions packed for export(in metric units where appropriate). 7. Trade discount (if applicable). 8. Delivery point. 9. Terms of sale. 10. Terms of payment. 11. Insurance and shipping costs. 12. Validity period for quotation. 13. Total charges to be paid by customer. 14. Estimated shipping date from U.S. port or airport. 15. Currency of sale. The Proforma Invoice A proforma invoice (sometimes written as pro forma invoice) is little more than a 'preadvice' or indication of what will stand in the commercial invoice once negotiations have been completed. Indeed, the proforma invoice and the commercial invoice often look exactly the same, except that it should state clearly "proforma invoice" on this document, whereas the commercial invoice will state "invoice" or "commercial invoice". The proforma invoice serves as a negotiating instrument. The initial proforma invoice often sets the stage for the first round of negotiations if the exporter and importer have not yet had any real discussions. Difference Between a Proforma Invoice and a Quotation In reality, there is very little difference in function between the two and the proforma invoice is really a quotation in invoice form; in other words. The difference really comes about in terms of the structure and layout of the proforma invoice/quotation. A typical quotation appears more like a business letter describing a written offer, while a proforma invoice appears exactly the same as a invoice (except with the words "proforma invoice" written on the document). The proforma invoice essentially serves as a 'quotation' that sets the road to further negotiations. Some exporters choose to prepare an 'official' quotation, while others prefer to use the
  • 106.
    106 proforma invoice astheir quotation. In fact, the quotation can contain the same information as a proforma invoice. Sometimes a firm may send out a written quotation and the importer may ask for a proforma invoice. It is important to note that there is no standard format for the proforma invoice and one proforma invoice may differ redically in layout from the next (although there is common agreement on the information that should be included in the coument). It is a document prepared by the exporter and so will take the format/layout decided on by the exporter. Use of a Proforma Invoice In summary, the proforma invoice is a popular document in exporting because: • It is a widely accepted form of sales offer in the global export community. • It clearly outlines all of the relevant information required to enable an export purchase decision to be made by the importer • It is a legal document, which if accepted by the importer is considered the basis of a binding agreement • Banks and other financial institutions will commonly accept proforma invoices in order to establish a Letter of Credit on behalf of the importer • The commercial invoice is almost identical to the proforma invoice (except for the title) and is thus easy to prepare, thus minimising the possibility of errors. Details Pertinent to the Proforma Invoice The following details are pertinent to the setting up of the proforma invoice and need careful attention: • The document title should clearly state "Proforma Invoice" • The name of the exporter (referred to as the shipper) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail), including physical (not postal) address • The name of the importer (referred to as the consignee, meaning the person or firm to whom the goods are to be sent) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail), including physical (not postal) address (In the case of transshipment, there may be an intermediate consignee and their contact details and address should then also be included on the invoice.)
  • 107.
    107 • If the person or firm buying the goods (the importer) is not the same as the person or firm to whom the goods are being sent, then you should include both their contact details and addresses in the proforma invoice • The name of the person and company to notify once shipment has taken place and their contact details and physical address (here the contact details such as telephone, fax and cell number and e-mail address are more important than the physical address) • A proforma invoice reference number • An order number or similar reference to correspondence between the supplier and importer • The date of issue of the proforma invoice (the 'quotation date') - quite important • A complete, detailed and clear description of the goods in question, incorporating the appropriate HS codes and brandmarks if applicable (here the importer may ask you to remove these codes as they may not be the same in the importing country and may thus incur additional or higher duties to the importer's detriment because of their inadvertent misuse) • The quantity of goods in question, including the number of units/items • The packing details, including their external dimensions, cubic capacity, weight, numbers and contents of each package shipped, and kinds of packaging involved (pallets, boxes, bags, etc.) • The grand total price of the goods for the whole consignment • Where applicable, the unit prices should be indicated - the unit price multiplied by the number of units/items should be reflected in the line total. The various line totals (in the case where different items are included in the same commercial invoice, or where additional services are itemised in the invoice), should add up to the total price for the whole consignment (also referred to as the 'Grand Total') • The currency in which the goods will be sold (e.g. US dollars or rands) • The type and amount of any discount given, where applicable • The likely delivery schedule and delivery terms • The payment methods (for example cash in advance, documentary collection, L/C, etc.) • The payment terms (for example 30 days on sight) • The Incoterms to be used (Incoterms 2000 - FAS, CIF, CFR, DDP, etc.) • Who is responsible for the banking fees and other related costs (insurance and freight costs are covered by the incoterms in question)
  • 108.
    108 • What the freight and insurance charges are • The exporter's banking details • A declaration of the country of origin of the goods • The expected country of final destination • Any freight details such as the port of loading and discharge • Any additional exporter-provided services that should be added to the invoice to come to the grand total • Any transhipment requirements • The validity of the proforma invoice - that is, when does the offer expire (leaving it open-ended could be very risky) • Any other information relevant to the order • Make sure the proforma invoice is signed, together with the signature's name written underneath, with initials, title and position Pro forma invoices are not used for payment purposes. A pro forma invoice should include two statements. One that certifies the pro forma invoice is true and correct and another that gives the country of origin of the goods. The invoice should also be clearly marked "pro forma invoice." Pro forma invoices are models that the buyer uses when applying for an import license, opening a letter of credit or arranging for funds. In fact, it is a good practice to include a pro forma invoice with any international quotation, regardless of whether it has been requested or not. When final commercial invoices are being prepared prior to shipment, it is advisable to check with the U.S. Department of Commerce or another reliable source for any special invoicing requirements that may be required by the importing country. The Commercial Invoice After the pro-forma invoice is accepted by the importer, the exporter must prepare a commercial invoice. The commercial invoice is required by both the exporter (to obtain the necessary export documents to enable the consignment to be exported, to prove ownership and to enable payment) and importer (who requires the commercial invoice to facilitate the import of the goods into the country in question). In exporting, the
  • 109.
    109 commercial invoice isconsidered a very important document as it serves as the starting or initiating document that underpins the rest of the export transaction. The commercial invoice is essentially a bill (i.e. invoice) from the seller (the exporter) to the buyer (the importer) describing the parties to the agreement, the goods to be sold, and the terms involved, as agreed between the exporter and importer. As such, the commercial invoice is the final bill exchanged between the seller and the buyer. The commercial invoice will normally be presented on the exporter's letterhead and will be addressed to the importer. It should contain full details of the consignment, including price and other related costs, in order to facilitate customs clearance. It must also be signed and dated. Freight and insurance, when included in the selling price, should be itemised separately as these charges are not subject to duty in certain countries. It is important that the commercial invoice clearly differentiates between the dutiable component of the order (the market value of the order), any other typically non-dutiable charges such as freight and insurance, and the total invoice value of the order. The commercial invoice is used by Customs authorities throughout the world for assessing Customs duties, inspection purposes, and for the keeping of statistics. Custom’s and Consular Invoices Some countries, however, may require the commercial invoice to be completed on their own specified forms - such commercial invoices are known as "Customs' invoices" and may be provided in lieu of or in addition to the standard commercial invoices referred to above. In addition, a "consular invoice" is required by certain countries. The consular invoice must be prepared in the language of the destination country and can be obtained from the country's consulate, and often must be "consularised" (i.e. stamped by an authorised Consul official in the exporting country). From the Proforma to the Commercial Invoice There is usually very little, if any, difference between the final proforma invoice accepted by the importer and the commercial invoice, except that the one is titled "Proforma Invoice", while the other is titled "Commercial Invoice". Although the proforma invoice comes before the commercial invoice, the proforma invoice really only serves as a means of negotiating the actual contract. The proforma invoice is the 'offer' put to the importer
  • 110.
    110 by the exporter.The importer may accept the terms specified in the proforma invoice, but a more likely scenario is that the importer will negotiate some of these terms with the exporter. There may be some backward and forward communication between the exporter and importer before the importer finally agrees to the transaction. Once the importer indicates that he/she is happy with the terms of the contract as outlined in the proforma invoice, the exporter will then be requested to provide the importer with a commercial invoice. The commercial invoice should reflect the final (agreed-upon) profroma invoice exactly - any deviances will result in problems executing the transaction and/or receiving payment. Based on the terms specified in this commercial invoice, the importer will instruct his/her bank (referred to as the issuing bank) to issue a letter of credit (L/C). This L/C (or the documentation associated with any other form of payment) will also need to reflect the terms specified in the commercial invoice exactly, while all subsequent documentation must reflect the terms of the L/C; there can be no exceptions. From this explanation, it is clear that the commercial invoice plays a central role in an export transaction. What should appear in the Commercial Invoice? The following details should appear in the commercial invoice: • The document title should clearly state "Commercial Invoice" • The name of the exporter (referred to as the shipper) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail), including physical (not postal) address • The name of the importer (referred to as the consignee, meaning the person or firm to whom the goods are to be sent) and their contact details (tel, fax, cell, e-mail), including physical (not postal) address (In the case of transshipment, there may be an intermediate consignee and their contact details and address should then also be included on the invoice.) • If the person or firm buying the goods (the importer) is not the same as the person or firm to whom the goods are being sent, then you should include both their contact details and addresses in the commercial invoice • The name of the person and company to notify once shipment has taken place and their contact details and physical address (here the contact details such as telephone, fax and cell number and e-mail address are more important than the physical address) • A commercial invoice reference number • A purchase order number or similar reference to correspondence between the supplier and importer • The date of issue of the commercial invoice
  • 111.
    111 • A complete, detailed and clear description of the goods in question, incorporating the appropriate HS codes and brandmarks if applicable (here the importer may ask you to remove these codes as they may not be the same in the importing country and may thus incur additional or higher duties to the importer's detriment because of their inadvertent misuse) • The quantity of goods in question, including the number of units/items • The packing details unless provided in a separate packing list, including their external dimensions, cubic capacity, weight, numbers and contents of each package shipped, and kinds of packaging involved (pallets, boxes, bags, etc.) - if a separate packing list is used, reference should be made in the commercial invoice to the packing list • The grand total price of the goods for the whole consignment • Where applicable, the unit prices should be indicated - the unit price multipled by the number of units/items should be reflected in the line total. The various line totals (in the case where different items are included in the same commercial invoice, or where additional services are itemised in the invoice), should add up to the total price for the whole consignment (also referred to as the 'Grand Total') • The currency in which the goods will be sold (e.g. US dollars or rands) • The type and amount of any discount given, where applicable • The likely delivery schedule and delivery terms • The payment methods (for example cash in advance, documentary collection, L/C, etc.) • The payment terms (for example 30 days on sight) • The Incoterm to be used (Incoterms 2000 - FAS, CIF, CFR, DDP, etc.) • Who is responsible for the banking fees and other related costs (insurance and freight costs are covered by the incoterm in question) • What the freight and insurance charges are • The exporter's banking details • A declaration of the country of origin of the goods • The expected country of final destination • Any freight details such as the port of loading and discharge • Any additional exporter-provided services that should be added to the invoice to come to the grand total • Any transhipment requirements • The validity of the commercial invoice - that is, when does the offer expire (leaving it open-ended could be very risky) • Any other information relevant to the order • Make sure the commercial invoice is signed, together with the signature's name written underneath, with initials, title and position
  • 112.
    112 Commercial Invoices arethe Basis for Assessing Duties and Statistics Commercial invoices are often used by governments to determine the true value of goods when assessing customs duties and recording trade statistics. Governments that use the commercial invoice to control imports will often specify its form, content, and number of copies, language to be used, and other characteristics. Examples of commercial invoice • Unzco commercial invoice • Meridian commercial invoice • BellAir commercial invoice Incoterms or Terms of Sale In any sales agreement, it is important that there is a common understanding of the delivery terms since confusion over their meaning can result in a lost sale or a loss on a sale. The terms in international business transactions often sound similar to those used in domestic business, but they frequently have very different meanings. For this reason, the exporter must know the terms before preparing a quotation or a pro forma invoice. There are a number of common sale or trade terms used in International Trade to express the sale price and corresponding rights and responsibilities of the seller and the buyer. The International Chamber of Commerce regulates these terms. Then the exporter and the importer agree on the terms of delivery, they legally bind themselves the four legal aspects of the transactions, which are: • Which cost does the exporter and which are to be paid by the importer pay? • Which costs the exporter will obtain and at whose expense? • When the title of the goods and responsibility for them passes from the exporter to the importer? • Where and when the goods are delivered? The following are a few of the more frequently used terms in international trade: EXW-Export Works The seller’s obligation to the deliver the goods under this term is complete when he passes the goods at the disposal of the buyer at his own premises and other places named therein, i.e. works, factory, warehouse etc. not cleared for export and not loaded on any collecting vehicle. This term thus enjoys the minimum for the seller.
  • 113.
    113 The buyer hasto bear all the cost and risks. This term should therefore not be used if buyer cannot carry out the export formality himself. FCA-Free Carrier Here the seller’s obligation to deliver the goods is complete when he delivers to the carrier nominated by the buyer at the named place cleared for export. If the chosen place is the exporter’s premises then the seller is responsible for loading. If it occurs at any other place, the seller is not responsible for unloading. FAS-Free Alongside Ship Under this term the seller delivers the goods by placing them alongside the vessel at the named port of shipment. The buyer bears all the cost and risk of loss of or damage to the goods from that moment. This term can be used only of sea or inland waterway transport. FOB-Free on Board Under this term, the seller fulfills his obligation of delivery when goods pass the ship’s rail at the named port of shipment. Form that point onwards buyer bears all costs and risks. The seller clears the goods for export. If the intention is not to deliver the goods across the ship’s rail, FCA terms should be used. CFR-Cost and Freight In CFR also, obligation of delivery is fulfilled when the goods pass the ship’s rail at the port of shipment. The only addition is that the seller also pays the freight necessary to bring the goods to the named port of destination but the risk of loss of or damage to the goods and also additional costs occurring after the time of delivery are transferred from seller to the buyer. Under this term the seller clears the goods for export. This term can be used only for the sea or inland waterway transport. If the parties do not intend to deliver the goods across the ship’s rail, the term should be used. CIF-Cost, Insurance and Freight Here again the delivery point is the goods passing the ship’s rail in the port of shipment. The seller however paid the cost and freight necessary to the named port of destination and contracts for insurance and pays the insurance and pays the insurance premium and the risk of loss of or damage to the goods and additional costs occurring after the time of delivery at transferred from the seller to the buyer. The seller obtains the insurance only for the minimum cover. If the buyer whishes to have a greater cover, he would either need to agree with the seller expressly or to make his own extra insurance arrangements. Clearance of goods for export is the
  • 114.
    114 responsibility of theseller under this term as well. It can be used for sea and inland waterway transport. If the parties do not intend to deliver the goods across the ship’s rail, the CIP terms should be used. CPT-Carriage Paid To It denotes that seller delivers to the carrier nominated by him. If subsequent carriers are used, the risks pass when the goods have been delivered to the first carrier. The must in addition pay the cost of carriage to bring the goods to the named destination. The buyer bears all the risks and any cost occurring after the goods have been so delivered. Here too, obtaining the export clearance is the responsibility of the seller. It can be used for any mode of transport including multi-modal transport. FAO/FOB Airport 'FOB Airport' is based on the same main principle as the ordinary FOB term. You fulfill your obligation by delivering the goods to the air carrier at the airport of departure. Without the buyer's approval delivery at a town terminal outside the airport is not sufficient, your obligations with respect to costs and risks do not extend to the arrival of the goods at the destination. CIP-Carriage and Insurance Paid To The term corresponds to CPT except that under CIP the seller also to procure insurance against risk of loss of or damage to the goods during the carriage. The seller therefore has to obtain the insurance and pay the insurance premium for a minimum cover. For any additional cover, the buyer needs to either have express arrangements with the seller or make his own arrangement. Here again if subsequent carriers are used, the risks passes when the goods have been delivered to the first carrier and clearance of goods for export is the responsibility of the seller. The term can be used for any mode of transport including multi-modal transport. DAF-Delivered At Frontier Under this term the seller delivers the goods by placing them at disposal of the buyer on arriving means of transport not unloaded, cleared for export but not cleared for imports at the named point/place at the frontier but before the custom border at the adjoining country. Since the term frontier includes the frontiers of the country of export naming the point and the place in the term is of vital importance. For making the seller responsible for the unloading of the goods and to bear the risk and cost therefore explicit working to this effect need to be included in the contract. The term can be used for any mode of transport when goods are to be delivered at the land frontier. When the delivery is to take place in the port of destination on board, a vessel or on the quay, the DES or DEQ terms should be used. DES-Delivered Ex Ship
  • 115.
    115 This term appliesthat the seller delivers the goods by placing them at the disposal of the buyer on the board, the ship not cleared for import at the named port of destination. The seller bears all the cost and the risk involved in bringing the goods to the named port of destination before their discharge. If the parties intend the seller to bear the cost and risk of discharging goods then the DEQ term should be used. This term can be used for sea or inland waterways or multimode transport on a vessel in the port of destination. DEQ-Delivered Export Quay The point of delivery at this term moves to the quay not cleared for export at the named port of destination. The seller bears the cost of discharging the goods in quay in addition to the cost of risk involved as per the term DES. The term DEQ has been modified in the incoterms 2000 and is a total reversal from the previous incoterms version. Under the modified DEQ term the buyer clears the goods for imports and pays all formalities, duties, taxes and other charges. If the buyer still wants the seller to undertake import clearance, it should be made clear by adding an explicit warning. This term can be used only when the goods are to be delivered by sea or inland waterways or multimode transport on discharging from a vessel onto the port of destination. If the parties intend to include in the seller’s obligation the risk and cost of handling of the goods from the quay to another place (warehouse, terminal transportation station) in or outside the port, the DDU or DDP should be used. DDU-Delivered Duty Unpaid This term can be used irrespective of the mode of transport, but when the delivery is to take place in the port of destination on board, the vessel or on the quay, the DES or DEQ terms should be used. Under DDU, the seller delivers the goods to the buyer not cleared for import, not unloaded from any arriving means of transport at the named place of destination. The seller bears the cost and the risk involved in bringing goods there to other than, where applicable, any duty of import in the country of destination. The term duty includes the responsibility for and the risk in the carrying out the customs formalities, the payment of such formalities, custom duties, taxes and other charges. Such duty has to be borne by the buyer, so also any costs and risks caused by his failure to clear the goods for import in time. If the intention is to make the seller carry out customs formalities and bears the risks resulting there from as well as some of the costs payable upon import of goods. This should be made clear by adding explicit wording to this effect in the contract of sale. The responsibility, risks and costs for unloading or reloading of the buyer or the seller. DDP-Delivered Duty Paid Under the term the seller delivers the goods to the buyer cleared for imports but not unloaded from any arriving means of transport at the named place of destination. Thus all cost and risk involved in bringing the goods there to including, wherever applicable, any duty for import in the country of destination. Thus the term represents minimum obligation to the buyer and maximum obligation to the seller. It should, therefore not be used if the
  • 116.
    116 seller is unableto obtain the import clearance. It the parties wish the buyer to bear all risks and costs of import the DDU term should be used. EXPORT PROCESS Enquiry Quotation Order confirmation Letter of Credit Production planning Production of material Dispatch Preparation of Pre-shipment documents Arrival at port Shipment Preparation of Post-shipment documents Document negotiation with bank Payment realization
  • 117.
    117 Fig. 3: Export Process PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT There are various steps involved for the proper procedure of export of a product. These are as follows: • RECEIPT OF AN ENQUIRY. • CHECK ON RESTRICTIONS ON FOREIGN EXCHANGE AND IMPORT IN THE IMPORTER’S COUNTRY. • SCRUITINISE THE ORDER. • ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF THE ORDER. • ARRANGING FOR GOODS. • EXPORT LICENCE. • CENTRAL EXCISE CLEARANCE. • APPLY TO EXPORT INSPECTION COUNCIL OF INSPECTION. • APPLY FOR MARINE INSURANCE POLICY, IF IT IS A C.I.F. QUOTATION. • ISSUE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE CLEARING AND FORWARDING AGENT. • CLEARING AND FORWARDING AGENTS ROLE FOR SHIPPING AND CUSTOMS AT PORT. • DOCUMENTS RETURNED BY THE FORWARDING AGENTS. • SHIPPING ADVICE TO IMPORTER. • PRESENTATION OF DOCUMENTS BY THE BANK. • CENTRAL EXCISE REBATE. • DUTY ENTITLEMENT PASSBOOK SCHEME STEP 1:- Receipt of an Enquiry It is not possible to attend personally to all of these enquiries, as it would not be economical to do so. The best way to do this is to ask the enquirers themselves to supply information about their business. If the enquirer is well established, he will be glad to give the information asked for, but if he refuses to do so than it is fair evidence that his intensions are not good. The exporter after having satisfied himself that the enquirer abroad is a fit person and is capable of meeting his obligations should give him the details of his business. STEP 2:- Check on Restrictions on Foreign Exchange and Import in the Importer’s Country When the order is received its first decision is based upon the approval of credit. For example: War or any other disturbances in the buyer’s country could lead to the restriction of transaction. Therefore if the exporter is dealing with a well experienced importer, the latter will furnish full information with reference to foreign exchange restrictions and import Licenses while placing the initial order. STEP 3:- Scruitinise the Order
  • 118.
    118 The exporter shouldcarefully scrutinize and check the contents of an export before its confirmation. If should be broadly in accordance with the ‘elements of contract’ which might have been conveyed to the overseas buyer, received along with the duplicate copy duly signed of export contract. The export should be scrutinized on the following aspects: • Terms of payment • Documents • Delivery schedule STEP 4:- Acknowledgement of Order In this step the order is to be acknowledged. The order must be acknowledged before the exporter states that whether he would be able to fill it or not. The acknowledgement should contain the essential features concerning the shipment which the exporter should know. STEP 5:- Arranging the Goods As soon as the export order has been confirmed or finalized, preparations are made for the production or procurement of goods to be exported. STEP 6:- Export License If the item being exported requires an export License, the same should be procured by the exporter from the Licensing authority, i.e., chief Controller of imports and Exports. STEP 7:- Central Excise Clearance The excisable goods can be exported outside India either under claim for rebate of excise duty or under bond. STEP 8:- Apply to Export Inspection Council for Inspection Exporter should apply to EIC for pre-shipment inspection. Under the EIC an inspector will carry out the quality control and inspection for exportable products. After carrying out inspection the consignment is found to confirm to the prescribed specification. STEP 9:- Apply for Marine Insurance Policy, if it is A C.I.F. Quotation As soon as the goods are ready for export, the exporter has to apply to insurance company for an insurance cover/policy as the case may be. The policy would be for C.I.F. value plus 10% to cover expenses. STEP 10:- Issue Instruction to the Clearing and Forwarding Agent A detailed note is prepared for the clearing and forwarding agent, giving instructions regarding the shipment of the consignment. STEP 11:- Clearing & Forwarding Agents Role For Shipping & Customs at the Port The clearing and forwarding agent then prepares the shipping bill and presents them along with the above documents to the export department of the customs house. STEP 12:- Documents Returned by the Forwarding Agent The master document is returned by the clearing and forwarding agent to the exporter along with: • Shipping bill
  • 119.
    119 • Original L/C • AR-4/AR-4A form in duplicate • Full set of clean-on-board of lading together with required number of non-negotiable copies. STEP 13: Shipment Advice to Importer Intimation is sent to the imports, indicating the date of dispatch of goods and the name of ship by which they have been sent. STEP 14:- Presentation of Documents by the Exporter of the Bank The following documents are presented by the exporter for negotiation/collection. • Master Document • GR-1 form • Full set of clean-on-board bill of lading • Original L/C • Bank certificate in prescribed form • Marine Insurance Policy • Export Contract/Order • Bill of Exchange STEP 15:- Processing of Documents by the Bank Bank examines the documents with reference to the terms and conditions of the original order and also of the letter of credit. The exporter’s bank screens the above documents and sends a set of the following documents to the importer’s bank: • Master Document • Marine Insurance Policy • Negotiable Bill of Lading • Bill of Exchange STEP 16:- Central Excise Rebate A claim is filled by the exporter with the concerned maritime collector of Central excise for rebate on central excise duty. STEP 17:- Duty Entitlement Passbook Scheme The exporter should file an application to the Licensing authority for an advance License/special License in accordance with export/import policy of the country at point of time. LOGISTICS PROCESS
  • 120.
    120 Logistics is themanagement of the flow of goods, information and other resources, including energy and people, between the point of origin and the point of consumption in order to meet the requirements of consumers (frequently, and originally, military organizations). Logistics involve the integration of information, transportation and inventory, warehousing, material-handling, and packaging. Logistics Management Logistics management is that part of the supply chain which plans, implements and controls the efficient, effective forward and reverse flow and storage of goods, services and related information between the point of origin and the point of consumption in order to meet customers' requirements. A professional working in the field of logistics management is called a logistician. Logistics Management Software Software is used for logistics automation which helps the supply chain industry in automating the work flow as well as management of the system. There is very few generalized software available in the new market in the said topology. This is because there is no rule to generalize the system as well as work flow even though the practice is more or less the same. Most of the commercial companies do use one or the other custom solution. But there are various software that is being used within the departments of logistics. Few departments in Logistics are namely, Conventional Department, Container department, Warehouse, Marine Engineering, Heavy haulage, Etc. Importer The software that is used in these departments are:  Conventional Department: CVT software / CTMS software  Container Trucking: CTMS software Planning Dept.  Warehouse: WMS Expor t Note: In Hindalco, all the departments are interconnected with computer network system and the Office Export software on which these department works is on the Oracle 11i platform. This software is connected with Control Internet and the working in any department in any region of Hindalco will make effect in all over India. Head A Brief Description of the Flow of Logistics Process Production Finished Goods Production Warehouse Process Packaging
  • 121.
    121 Fig. 4: Flow of Logistics Process in Brief First of all Customer or Importer place their order to the company. This is done in the following two ways: 1. Through Export Office 2. Directly to Planning Office 1. Through Export Office For placing their order, Customer or Importer contacts to their respective Export Office. There must be one Export Control Head who can deal with that order. Export Control Head sends the information about the order to the Planning department. Planning dept. can make a plan to execute that order and sends the information about the amount of production to the Production Plant. After production, the product is being sent for packaging. There packaging should be done according to the demand of the customer. When the product is being packed, it is being sent to the Finished Goods Warehouse for storage. When the finished product reaches to the warehouse, it can be informed to the Export Control Head that the product is ready for the delivery to the customer. From warehouse the product reaches to the Export office and from there it reaches to the respective Importer’s destination. 2. Directly to Planning Office
  • 122.
    122 The second optionfor the customer to place their order is that they can place their order directly to the planning office of the company. Rest all the process after planning till warehousing is same as through Export office process. In this process the product is being delivered to the importer from the Finished Goods Warehouse directly. Confirmation of the Export Order Logistics Container Indenting Process Warehouse Inland Transportation Sea Transportation Arrange empty Containers at ICD, Kanpur/Kolkata port based on Export Order Storage of Stuffing of By Sea By Air in advance based on Production Schedule Indent Container Finished Goods Finished Goods Inform Finished Goods Warehouse for segregating of material as per container load By Roadways By Railways Inform Finished Goods Warehouse with details of the Order Fig. 5: Diagram Shows the Sub-Division of Export Logistics Process Pre-shipment Export Documentation & stuffing of materials in containers Flow of Export Logistics Process Implemented by Hindalco Excise Clearance (Filling ARE-1 form & Excise Invoice, Verification of exporting consignment by Excise Clearance Authority) Arrival of consignment at Dry Port Custom Clearance Shipment Post-shipment Documentation Document Negotiation Payment Realization
  • 123.
    123 Fig. 6: Flow of Export Logistics in Hindalco Step 1:- First of all, order is being confirmed. Step 2:- Container Indenting Process • Order for the container is given to the Shipping Line according to the Production schedule. • Container comes via ICD, Kanpur in case of Mumbai Shipment and directly via roadways or railways in case of Kolkata Shipment. • A particular number is being allotted in the ICD or Kolkata port before sending it to the factory. • Information is being sent to the warehouse about the availability of containers for the stuffing of containers. Step 3:- According to the information, materials is being segregated as per container load in the Warehouse. Step 4:- Stuffing of material in the containers is being done as well as Pre-shipment documents is being made in this step.
  • 124.
    124 Step 5:- Afterthe stuffing of material, Excise Clearance office is being informed to do the Excise clearance process. In this stage ARE-1 form and Excise Invoice is being filled by the exporter. Step 6:- After the completion of Excise clearance process, stuffed containers is being sent to the respective port according to their destination. Step 7:- After the arrival of export consignment at the port, Custom Clearance process is being done by the Custom clearing authority. Step 8:- Shipment is being done after the Custom process is cleared. Step 9:- Post-Shipment documents is being made by the exporter after the shipment of the consignments. Step 10:- When the post-shipment documents are made, these documents are being sent to the bank for the negotiation. Step 11:- After negotiation, the documents are cleared for making payments which exporter receives. This stage is called Payment Realization stage. EXPORT DOCUMENTATION Any export shipment involves a number of documents required mainly by the customs or port authorities. According to the Customs Act, the person Incharge of a conveyance-vessel, vehicle aircraft etc. cannot permit loading of export cargo at the customs stations unless & until the formal permission given by proper customs office is presented. An improved system of documentation for exports announced by the government of India on 31st March, 1991 is fine and should be adopted by the exporters as far as possible. Export documentation work constitute heavy on our export activity. It’s complex, cumbersome and costly. Some of the procedures that must be followed when an exporter has marketed his goods and received an order. These procedures often involve a good deal of documentation. This documentation is one of the major differences between trading in the home country as well as in foreign country. The document materials to an export sales contract are not many in number. The documents used differed in size and layout, despite the fact that most of the information requirements are common to a number of them. Therefore they have to be completed individually.
  • 125.
    125  Importance ofExport Documentation Once the goods are ready, an exporter has to prepare and execute various documents at different stages of sending the shipment of goods to the importer. These documents are important for two reasons: • As an evidence of shipment and title of goods • For obtaining payment The various documents are therefore of vital interest to the exporter and the bank which is the usual media of payment. The documentary requirements are both regulatory and operational in nature and have to comply with the rules and regulations of the Indian Government as well as the importing country for different type of products. These requirements are different for different type of products. Accuracy and completeness are a prime necessity in documents covering export shipments. Any alteration or addition made by an Authority issuing the documents must be endorsed properly, with the signature of person issuing the signature of person issuing the documents only. If the documents are not the correct ones, the importer may not be able to get the goods when the ship arrives. One of the major purposes of documentation is to provide a specific and complete description of the goods, so that they can be correctly assessed for import duty. But documentation also plays an important role in transport arrangements, in payment and credit procedures and in relation to cargo insurance and claims.  Set of Documents Required For Exports The following documents are generally required for export of products: 1. Invoice-in 4 copies plus 10 copies for certification. 2. Packing List in4 copies. 3. Mill’s Certificate in 3 copies. 4. Insurance Certificate in duplicate. 5. Certificate of Origin in 3 copies. 6. Bill of Exchange-in duplicate.
  • 126.
    126 7. B/L-full set plus 2 non-negotiable copies. 8. Material Safety Data Sheets/Analysis Report in 3 copies. 9. SDF Form & Custom certified Invoice both in original. 10. Above mentioned L/C in original.  The Major Documents Export documentation plays a vital role in international marketing as it facilitates the smooth flow of physical goods and payments thereof across national frontiers. Export documentation is however complex as the number concerned authorities to whom the relevant documents are to be submitted. On the basis of the function to be performed export documents can be classified under four categories: A. Trade Documents/Commercial Documents The commercial documents are those by which customs of trade are required for effecting physical transfer of goods and their title from the exporter to the importer. On an average there are 16 commercial documents. The following 16 commercial documents are involved in the pre-shipment stage:  Pro-forma invoice  Commercial invoice  Packing list  Shipping instruction  Intimation inspection  Certificate of inspection  Insurance declaration  Certificate of insurance  Shipping order  Mate’s receipt
  • 127.
    127  Bill of lading  Application for certificate of origin  Certificate of origin  Bill of exchange  Shipping Advice  Letter to the bank for collection Out of 16 documents 14 have been standardized and aligned to one another. Two documents viz; Shipping Order and Bill of Exchange could not be standardized. B. Regulatory Documents These are the documents which are required for complying with the rules and regulations governing export trade transactions such as foreign exchange regulations, customs formalities, export inspection etc. The regulatory documents associated with the pre-shipment stage of an export transaction are as follows:  Gate Pass-1/gate Pass-2  AR-4 form  Shipping bill/bill of export  Export application/dock Challan/Port trust copy of shipping bill  Receipt for payment of port charges  Vehicle chit  Exchange Control declaration (GR/PP) Forms  Freight Payment Certificate  Insurance premium payment certificate Out of the above 9 regulatory documents, 4 have been standardized. C. Export assistance documents
  • 128.
    128 These are thedocuments which are required for claiming assistance under the various export assistance measures or may be in operation from time to time. Presently these refer to import replenishment licenses, cash compensatory support scheme drawback of central excise & custom duties & packing credit facilities. D. Foreign documentation These are the documents which are required by the importer in order to satisfy the requirements of his governments. These include:  Certificate of origin  Consular invoice  Quality control certificate etc. Export documents can be classified into two categories depending upon the specific requirements: • Regulatory • Operational  Need for Export Documents Export documents have to be prepared for various purposes: • Declaration of exports as per exchange control regulation of the country. • Transport of the goods. • Customs clearance of the goods • Other purposes.  Significance of Some Export Documents Some of the principal documents are discussed as follows: • Letter of credit • Export invoice • Packing list • Certificate of origin
  • 129.
    129 • Bill of lading • Shipping order/mate’s receipt • Shipping bill • Marine insurance policy  Letter of Credit Letter of credit is an undertaking by the importer’s bank that if the exporter exports the goods and produces documents as stipulated in the letter, the bank would make payment to the exporter. “Letter of credit” is the most important single document in international trade. It forms the basis of very large volume of world trade. Letter of credit provides great security to the exporter. “It is an arrangement by means of which (issuing bank) acting at the request of a customer (Applicant), undertakes to pay to a third party (Beneficiary) a predetermined amount by a given date according agreed stipulation and against presentation of stipulated documents.” • Salient Features ♦ It is an undertaking by the bank. ♦ It is an undertaking to make payment. ♦ It is an undertaking to make on behalf of the person. ♦ It is an undertaking given to the third party. ♦ It is an undertaking given to the third person. (A person other than the one on whose behalf it is given) ♦ It is a conditional undertaking, payment being subjected to compliance with some conditions. • Parties to A Letter of Credit A documentary credit has got four parties, namely: • APPLICANT (opener) • ISSUING BANK • BENIFICIARY
  • 130.
    130 • ADVISING BANK • Mechanism of L/C • Is to make payment to the order of a third party (the beneficiary), or is to accept and pay bills of exchange drawn by the beneficiary; or • Authorizes another bank to effect such payment or to accept and pay such bill of exchange; or • Authorizes another bank to negotiate, against stipulated documents, provided that the terms and conditions of the credit are complied with. • Types of a Letter of Credit • Revocable Letter of Credit: - It is a credit which can be revoked. A revocable L/C is the one which can be cancelled or amended by the issuing bank at any time without prior notice to the beneficiary. Revocable credits indicate the nature by a specific clause addressed to the advising bank. • Irrevocable Letter of Credit: - It is a firm undertaking on the part of issuing bank and cannot be cancelled or amended without the consent of the parties to L/C, particularly the beneficiary. An irrevocable credit constitutes a definite undertaking of the issuing bank to accept or pay bills drawn on another bank or make payment. • Payment Credit: - It is a credit which will be paid at sight basis against presentation of requisite documents to the designated paying bank. In a payment credit, beneficiary may or may not be called upon to draw a draft. • Deferred Payment Credit: - It is a usance credit where payment will be made by designated bank, on respective due dates. • Acceptance Credit: - It is similarly to defer payment credit except for the fact that in this credit drawing of a usance draft is a must. Under this credit, drafts must. Under this credit, drafts must be drawn on the specified bank.
  • 131.
    131 • With recourse without recourse credit • Revolving letter of credit • Confirmed letter of credit • Transferable credit • Revolving credit • Transit credit • Bank to back credit • The sight credit • Usance credit • The deferred payment credit.  Export Invoice • Commercial Invoice It is one of the most important documents issued by the seller in the standardized format. The invoice is usually made out of the full realizable amount of the Trader term. The invoice should be strictly as per the contract of sale and must be signed by the seller or the person on his behalf. • Consular Invoice A consular invoice is required to be prepared in a prescribed format and it should be signed/certified by the council of the importing country located in the country of export. The main purpose of consular invoice is to enable the importer’s country to collect accurate and authenticated information about the value, volume, quality, source etc of the import for assessing Import duties and for other statistical purposes. It helps the importer to get cleared the goods through the customs without any undue delay. This document is required mainly by the Latin American countries like Kenya, Tanzania, Nigeria, Mauritius, New Zealand etc.  Packing List Packing list may be shown on invoice or separately and should contain item by item, the contents of cases or containers or of a shipment with its weight and description set forth in such a manner as to permit checks of the contents by the customs on arrival at the port of destination. The packing list is a relatively simpler document and the whole of the information can be reproduced from the master by masking information not desired on the packing list. Special information, if any can be
  • 132.
    132 given in theblank space in the lower third position of the document. It is a list showing the details of goods contained in each Parcel shipment. Packing list has to be prepared in the Aligned document from.  Bill of Lading A Bill of lading is a document issued by the sipping company or its agent, acknowledging the receipt of goods for carriage which are deliverable to the consignee or his assignee in the same condition as they were received. A bill of lading serves the following purposes: • It is a receipt of goods received by the shipment company. • A Contract with the carrier: it contains the terms of contract between the shipper and the shipping company, between stated points at a specific charge. • Evidence of title: It is a certificate of ownership or title to the goods. • Contents of Bill of lading The usual form of a bill of lading includes the following information: • Name of the shipping company. • Name of the shipper. • Name and address of the importer. • Name and address of the party to be notified on the arrival of shipment. • Name of the carrying vessel. • Name of the ports of loading and discharge. • Whether freight is payable or whether freight has been paid. • Number of originals in the set of bill of lading documents. • Marks and number identifying goods. • Brief description of the goods (including weights and dimensions). • Number of packages. • Signature of ship’s master or his agent. • Date on which goods were received for shipment. • Signature of the exporter (or his agent) and his designation applicable. • Importance of Bill of Lading • It is a contract between the shipper and the shipping company for the carriage of goods to the port of destination. • It is an acknowledgement indicating that the goods mentioned in the document have been received on the board for the purpose of shipment.
  • 133.
    133 • It issue for claiming incentives offered by the government to exporters.  Marine Insurance Policy The safe conduct of the goods from the time it leaves the exporter’s godowns and till it reaches the warehouse of the importer is what all the parties in the transaction pray for. It depends upon the safety of the goods during the voyage and safety of the vessel that carries the goods. Marine insurance Policy offers the desired cover against the loss or damage of the goods during the transit. It allows a free flow of international trade. In India Marine insurance is governed by the marine Insurance act’ 1963. Section 3 of the act defines a contract of marine insurance as “as agreement in which the insurer undertakes to indemnify the assured in the manner and to the extent thereby agreed”. • Nature of Marine Cargo Insurance • Parties • Insurable interest • Utmost good faith • Indemnity • Assignment  Certificate of Origin This certificate certifies the place of origin of the merchandise’ Besides the federation of Indian Chamber of Commerce and Industry, EPC’s and various other trade associations have been authorized government of India to issue certificate of origin. These certificates are important in case of shipments to countries which have preferential rates of tariff for Indian goods. Certificates of origin are issued by Chamber of commerce on their own printed forms differing in sizes and layout. The standard documents in respect of certificate of origin are included in the series of aligned documents. A Certificate of origin declares the place of actual manufacture or growth of the goods. A country may place restrictions on imports from certain countries.
  • 134.
    134  Shipping Order/Mate’sReceipt When a cargo is loaded on the ship the commanding officer of the ship will issue a receipt called the mate’s receipt for the goods. The mate receipt is first handed over the port trust authorities so that all the port dues are paid by the exporter to the port trust. The bill of lading is prepared by the shipping agent only after the male receipt has been obtained. The aligned shipping order and the mate’s receipt have been prepared after examining the forms of the two documents issued by the different shipping companies. The information required in these documents can be reproduced with great ease from the master. The issuance of these documents in the standard from will also facilitate the processing of documents at various stages.  Shipping Bill Shipping bill is required by the customs. It is only after the shipping bill is stamped by the customs that cargo is allowed to be carted to the docks. The aligned shipping bill has been prepared after taking into consideration the requirement of custom’s public notice no. 39 which suggests a uniform shipping bill for different categories of exports. Basically shipping bill is of four types: • Export duty/cess • Free of duty/cess • Entitlement to duty drawback • Re-export of imported goods. The format presented for shipping bill is as under: • White shipping bill. • Green shipping bill. • Yellow shipping bill. • Pink shipping bill. Where goods are to be cleared by the Land customs, Bill of export is prepared instead of shipping bill.  Bill of Exchange A bill of exchange is an instruction by the exporter (drawer) to the (importer) or the importer’s bank to make payment of the amount mentioned in it. A bill of exchange is a negotiable instrument and is governed by the
  • 135.
    135 Negotiable Instruments Actin India and by similar enactments in other countries. The Negotiable Instruments Act defines a bill of exchange as “an instrument in writing containing an unconditional order, signed by the maker directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to or order of a certain person or to the bearer of instrument”. A bill of exchange is also called as draft contains an order from the credit to the debtor to pay a specified amount to a person mentioned therein. There are three parties to B/E. • The Drawer (exporter):- The person who executes the B/E. • The Drawee (importer):- The person on whom the B/E is drawn and who is required to meet the terms of the document. • The Payee (the exporter’s bank):- The party to receive the payment. • Types of Bill of Exchange • Sight and usance bills. • D/A and D/P bills. • Inland and foreign bill.  GR Form The RBI to ensure that the foreign exchange receipts in respect of exports are repatriated to India has prescribed this form. This has to be prepared in duplicate. The original copy has to be submitted to the customs authorities at the port of shipment. This is sent to the RBI directly by the customs authorities. The duplicate copy is submitted to the negotiating bank along with the other documents after shipment of goods. The negotiating bank sends the duplicate copy to the RBI.  Common Defects in Documentation The bank making payment on behalf of its foreign correspondent must verify that all documents & drafts conform precisely to the terms & conditions of the L/C. to avoid payment delays, the beneficiary should prepare & examine all documents carefully before presenting them to the paying bank. Paying banks find that the following discrepancies between the documents & the letter of credit occur most frequently: i. Drafts are presented after L/C has expired or after time for shipment has expired. ii. Invoice value or draft exceeds amount available under L/C.
  • 136.
    136 iii. Charges included in the invoice are not authorized in the L/C. iv. Amount of insurance coverage is inadequate or coverage does not include risks required by the L/C. v. Insurance document is not endorsed and/or countersigned. vi. Date of insurance policy or certificate is later than the date on bill of lading. vii. Bills of lading are not “clean” that is, they bear notations that qualify good order & condition of merchandise of its packing. viii. Bills of lading are not marked “On Board” when so required by L/C. ix. “On Board” endorsement or charges on bills of lading are not signed by carrier or its agent or initialed by party who signed bills of lading. x. “On Board” endorsement is not dated. xi. Bills of lading are not endorsed. xii. Bills of lading are made out “to order” (Shipper’s order, Blank endorsed) where L/C stipulates “Straight” (direct to consignee bills of lading or vice versa. xiii. Bills of lading do not indicate, “Freight prepaid” as stipulated in the L/C. xiv. B/L are not marked “Freight prepaid” when freight charges are included in invoice. xv. Descriptions, marks & nos. of merchandise are not same on all documents presented or are not as required by L/C. xvi. Not all documents required by L/C are presented. xvii. Invoice states “used”, “Second hand” or “rebuilt” merchandise when L/C does not authorize such condition. xviii. Invoice does not specify shipment terms (C & F, CIF, FOB, etc) as stated in L/C. xix. Invoice is not signed as L/C requires. Process of Getting Custom Clearance
  • 137.
    137 Fig. 7: Process of Getting Custom Clearance GOVERNMENT POLICIES FOR EXPORT EXIM Policy The EXIM Policy was announced by the government on 1st April, 1992 which is effective for a period of 5 years upto March, 1997 co-terminus with the 8th Five year Plan. This is the first time that an EXIM Policy for a Five Year Plan was announced against earlier policies for 3 years or one year duration. This was done in response to the appeal made by the trade that frequent and radical changes in the EXIM policy had adversely affected country’s export efforts and the credibility of the Indian exporters abroad. The changes in the present EXIM Policy announced on 31st March, 1995 are a result of the intense interaction between trade and industry. One of the highlights of revised policy is the widening of the scope of the Export Promotion Capital Goods (EPCG) scheme to provide for zero duty import of capital goods of a value of at least Rs. 20 crores. Exports and imports in India are governed by the EXIM policy published by the Director General of Foreign trade (DGFT).
  • 138.
    138 The EXIM policyallows imports and exports from/to any country in the world except Fiji, Iraq, Yugoslavia (Serbia and Montenegro).  Main Objectives of EXIM Policy • Globalization of India’s foreign trade. • Augmenting exports by facilitating access to imported inputs. • Promoting efficient and internationally competitive import substitution. • Encouraging high and internationally accepted standards of quality. • Transparency in the export-import policies, minimization of quantitative restriction/licensing and other discretionary controls. • Strengthening and stimulating the country’s research and development capabilities. • Simplifying and streamlining procedures governing imports and exports. EXPORT INCENTIVES The Government of India has framed several schemes to promote exports and to obtain foreign exchange. These schemes grants incentive and other benefits. The few important export incentives, from the point of view of indirect taxes are briefed below: Free Trade Zones (FTZ) Several FTZs have been established at various places in India like Kandla, Noida, Cochin, etc. No excise duties are payable on goods manufactured in these zones provided they are made for export purpose. Goods being brought in these zones from different parts of the country are brought without the payment of any excise duty. Moreover, no customs duties are payable on imported raw material and components used in the manufacture of such goods being exported. If entire production is not sold outside the country, the unit has the provision of selling 25% of their production in India. On such sale, the excise duty is payable at 50% of basic plus additional customs or normal excise duty payable if the goods were produced elsewhere in India, whichever is higher. Electronic Hardware Technology Park / Software Technology Parks
  • 139.
    139 This scheme isjust like FTZ scheme, but it is restricted to units in the electronics and computer hardware and software sector. Advance License/ Duty Exemption Entitlement Scheme (DEEC) In this scheme advance license, either quantity based (Qbal) or value based (Vabal), is given to an exporter against which the raw materials and other components may be imported without payment of customs duty provided the manufactured goods are exported. These licenses are transferable in the open market at a price. Export Promotion Capital Goods Scheme (EPCG) According to this scheme, a domestic manufacturer can import machinery and plant without paying customs duty or settling at a concessional rate of customs duty. But his undertakings should be as mentioned below: Customs Duty Rate Export Obligation Time 10% 4 times exports (on FOB basis) of CIF 5 years value of machinery. Nil in case CIF value is Rs200mn or more. 6 times exports (on FOB basis) of CIF 8 years value of machinery or 5 times exports on (NFE) basis of CIF value of machinery. Nil in case CIF value is Rs50mn or more for 6 times exports (on FOB basis) of CIF 8 years agriculture, aquaculture, animal husbandry, value of machinery or 5 times exports on floriculture, horticulture, poultry and (NFE) basis of CIF value of machinery. sericulture. Table 2: Undertaking of EPCG Note:- • NFE stands for net foreign earnings. • CIF stands for cost plus insurance plus freight cost of the machinery. • FOB stands for Free on Board i.e. export value excluding cost of freight and insurance. Deemed Exports The Indian suppliers are entitled for the following benefits in respect of deemed exports: • Refund of excise duty paid on final products
  • 140.
    140 • Duty drawback • Imports under DEEC scheme • Special import licenses based on value of deemed exports The following categories are treated as deemed exports for seller if the goods are manufactured in India: • Supply of goods against duty free licenses under DEEC scheme • Supply of goods to a 100 % EOU or a unit in a free trade zone or a unit in a software technology park or a unit in a hardware technology park • Supply of goods to holders of license under the EPCG scheme • Supply of goods to projects financed by multilateral or bilateral agencies or funds notified by the Finance Ministry under international competitive bidding or under limited tender systems in accordance with the procedures of those agencies or funds where legal agreements provide for tender evaluation without including customs duty • Supply of capital goods and spares upto 10% of the FOR value to fertilizer plants under international competitive bidding • Supply of goods to any project or purpose in respect of which the Ministry of Finance permits by notification the import of goods at zero customs duty along with benefits of deemed exports to domestic supplies • Supply of goods to power, oil and gas sectors in respect of which the Ministry of Finance permits by notification benefits of deemed exports to domestic supplies Manufacture under Bond This scheme furnishes a bond with the manufacturer of adequate amount to undertake the export of his production. Against this the manufacturer is allowed to import goods without paying any customs duty, even if he obtains it from the domestic market without excise duty. The production is made under the supervision of customs or excise authority. Duty Drawback It means the rebate of duty chargeable on imported material or excisable material used in the manufacturing of goods in and is exported. The exporter may claim drawback or refund of excise and customs duties being paid by his suppliers. The final exporter can claim the drawback on material used for the manufacture of export products. In case of re-import of goods the drawback can be claimed.
  • 141.
    141 The following areDrawbacks: • Customs paid on imported inputs plus excise duty paid on indigenous imports. • Duty paid on packing material. Drawback is not allowed on inputs obtained without payment of customs or excise duty. In part payment of customs and excise duty, rebate or refund can be claimed only on the paid part. In case of re-export of goods, it should be done within 2 years from the date of payment of duty when they were imported. 98% of the duty is allowable as drawback, only after inspection. If the goods imported are used before its re-export, the drawback will be allowed as at reduced per cent.
  • 142.
    142 Process Involved in Getting Export Incentives Shipping Bill for Export of Goods under claim for DEPB Scheme is made after shipment BRC is prepared for claiming the export incentives A bunch of 20-25 Shipping Bills and their respective BRCs has been made for one application Various data regarding export made are feeded in the Excel system for the purpose of online feeding on the DGFT Site Necessary application fee in the form of EFT is made through system The application is digitally signed and submitted to Jt. DGFT, Varanasi through the Internet Site Hard copy of Application form along with E.P. copy of Shipping Bills & original BRCs has been sent to Jt. DGFT, Varanasi for issuing DEPB License After receipt of DEPB license, this license along with respective DEPB copy of shipping bills & duplicate copy of BRCs & a statement showing comprehensive details of claims has been sent to respective customs house through the clearing agents for verification Fig. 8: Process of Getting Export Incentives
  • 143.
    143 Step 1: –First of all, Shipping Bill has been made for claiming the Export Incentives. It is made as SHIPPING BILL FOR EXPORT OF GOODS UNDER CLAIM FOR DUTY ENTITLEMENT PASS BOOK (DEPB) SCHEME. Under this the main things which have been covered are:-- 1. Invoice No. & Date 2. Custom House agent’s Description 3. Nature of Contract 4. Exchange Rate 5. Currency of Invoice 6. Statistical Code & Description of Goods & Exim Scheme code where applicable. 7. Analysis of Export Value 8. Amount 9. DEPB Rate 10. Rate List Sr. No. 11. Product Group 12. DEPB No. 13. LET Export date Passed for Shipment There are two copies of this document. 1st one is export promotion copy & the 2nd one is DEPB copy. These document having the stamp of Custom & Excise and the signature & seal of Custom Inspector. Step 2: – When Shipping Bill has been prepared, after that Bank Realization Certificate (BRC) has been made for negotiation process in claiming the Export Incentives. This document has two parts; the 1st part contains 17 columns named Invoice no. & date, Shipping Bill no. & date, Description of goods, Bill of Ladings’ no. & date, Destination, Bill amount, Freight amount, Insurance amount Commission Paid, FOB value, Date of realization of export proceeds and No., date & category of applicable Licence which has been filled by the exporter. Under these columns Place, Date, Seal & Signature of the exporter have been mentioned. The 2nd part of this document contains Bank’s Certificate which has to be filled by the Banker with their authorization seal & signature. When the exporter gets this BRC, it means that exporter had got the exported amount in his bank account. Step 3: – After getting the BRC from the bank, one application have been prepared for a bunch of 20-25 Shipping bills and their respective BRCs. This application is in favor of the Jt. Director General of Foreign Trade (DGFT). Description of application for issue of DEPB license, description of EFT towards the application fee, description of Export Promotion Copy of Shipping Bills & the description of self-addressed envelop with a relevant amount of stamp fixed on it have been mentioned in this application.
  • 144.
    144 Step 4: –On the DGFT site, there is application software for filling the data regarding export made. For this purpose various data regarding export made are feeded in the Excel system. Step 5: – After filling the necessary information regarding export made in the DGFT site, relevant application fee in the EFT form is made through system. Step 6: – After that application is digitally signed & submitted to DGFT through the Internet. Step 7: – A hard copy of application form has been made and along with Export Promotion Copy of Shipping Bills & original BRCs, it has been sent to Jt. DGFT, Varanasi for issuing DEPB License. Step 8: – After getting the DEPB license from DGFT, this license along with respective DEPB copy of shipping bills & original BRCs & a statement showing comprehensive details of claims, it has been sent to respective customs house through the clearing agents for verification. The DEPB license from DGFT which an exporter receives after the verification of application regarding export made under DEPB scheme contains the following: 1. Authorization Forwarding Letter 2. DEPB License 3. Details of the exported items 4. Application Submission Details 5. DEPB E-Commerce Version, under this- ♦ IEC Details ♦ Application Firm Details ♦ Nature of Concern ♦ Type of Exporter ♦ Industrial Registration Details ♦ Service Tax Registration Details ♦ RCMC Registration Details ♦ Status House Details ♦ Excise Details ♦ VAT Details ♦ Past Turnover (Rs. Lakhs) ♦ Name & Address of the exporter ♦ Payment Details ♦ FOB value of Exports
  • 145.
    145 ♦ DEPB Claimed ♦ DEPB Applied for ♦ DEPB Entitlement for 100% ♦ DEPB Entitlement after cut ♦ Shipping Bills Details ♦ Declaration/Undertaking ♦ Signature & Description of the applicant ♦ Sign of DGFT is being covered. EXPORT FINANCE Financial assistance to the exporters are generally provided by Commercial Banks, before shipment as well as after shipment of the said goods. The assistance provided before shipment of goods is known as per-shipment finance and that provided after the shipment of goods is known as post-shipment finance. Pre-shipment finance is given for working capital for purchase of raw-material, processing, packing, transportation, ware-housing etc. of the goods meant for export. Post-shipment finance is provided for bridging the gap between the shipment of goods and realization of export proceeds. The later is done by the Banks by purchasing or negotiating the export documents or by extending advance against export bills accepted on collection basis. While doing so, the Banks adjust the pre-shipment advance, if any, already granted to the exporter.  Pre-Shipment Finance An application for pre-shipment advance should be made by you to your banker along with the following documents: • Confirmed export order/contract or L/C etc. in original. Where it is not available, an undertaking to the effect that the same will be produced to the bank within a reasonable time for verification and endorsement should be given. An undertaking that the advance will be utilised for the specific purpose of procuring/manufacturing/shipping etc., of the goods meant for export only, as stated in the relative confirmed export order or the L/C. If you are a sub-supplier and want to supply the goods to the Export/Trading/Star Trading House or Merchant Exporter, an undertaking from the Merchant.
  • 146.
    146 • Exporter or Export/Trading/Star Trading House stating that they have not/will p 7 3 not avail themselves of packing credit facility against the same transaction for the same purpose till the original packing credit is liquidated. Copies of Income Tax/Wealth Tax assessment Order for the last 2-3 years in the case of sole proprietary and partnership firm. Copy of Exporter's Code Number (CNX). Copy of a valid RCMC (Registration-cum-Membership Certificate) held by you and/or the Export/Trading/Star Trading House Certificate. Appropriate policy/guarantee of the ECGC. • Any other document required by the Bank. For encouraging exports, R.B.I. has instructed the banks to grant pre-shipment advance at a concessional rate of interest. The present rate of interest is 10% p.a. for pre-shipment advance upto an initial period of 180 days. Pre-shipment advance for a further period of 90 days is given at the concessional rate of 13% p.a. Banks are free to determine the interest rate for advances beyond 270 days and upto 360 days. Following special schemes are also available in respect of pre-shipment finance: • Exim Bank's scheme for grant of foreign currency pre-shipment credit to exporters for financing cost of imported inputs for manufacture of export products. • Scheme of export packing credit to sub-suppliers from export order. • Packing credit for deemed exports. • Pre-shipment Credit in Foreign Currency (PCFC). For further details refer to Nabhi's "How to Borrow from Financial and Banking Institutions".  Post Shipment Finance Post-shipment finance is the finance provided against shipping documents. It is also provided against duty drawback claims. It is provided in the following forms:  Purchase of Export Documents drawn under Export Order: - Purchase or discount facilities in respect of export bills drawn under confirmed export order are generally granted to the customers who are enjoying Bill Purchase/Discounting limits from the Bank. As in case of purchase or discounting of export documents drawn under export order, the security offered under L/C by way of substitution of credit-worthiness of the buyer by the issuing bank is not available, the bank financing is totally dependent upon the credit worthiness of the buyer, i.e. the importer, as well as that of the exporter or the beneficiary. The documents dawn on DP basis are parted with through foreign correspondent only when payment is received while in case of DA bills documents (including that of title to the goods) are passed on to the overseas importer against the acceptance of the draft to make payment on maturity. DA bills are thus unsecured. The bank financing against export bills is open to the risk of non-payment. Banks, in order to enhance security, generally opt for ECGC policies and guarantees which are issued in
  • 147.
    147 favor of the exporter/banks to protect their interest on percentage basis in case of non-payment or delayed payment which is not on account of mischief, mistake or negligence on the part of exporter. Within the total limit of policy issued to the customer, Drawee-wise limits are generally fixed for individual customers. At the time of purchasing the bill bank has to ascertain that this Drawee limit is not exceeded so as to make the bank ineligible for claim in case of non-payment.  Advances against Export Bills Sent on Collection: - It may sometimes be possible to avail advance against export bills sent on collection. In such cases the export bills are sent by the bank on collection basis as against their purchase/discounting by the bank. Advance against such bills is granted by way of a 'separate loan' usually termed as 'post-shipment loan'. This facility is, in fact, another form of post- shipment advance and is sanctioned by the bank on the same terms and conditions as applicable to the facility of Negotiation/Purchase/Discount of export bills. A margin of 10 to 25% is, however, stipulated in such cases. The rates of interest etc., chargeable on this facility are also governed by the same rules. This type of facility is, however, not very popular and most of the advances against export bills are made by the bank by way of negotiation/purchase/discount.  Advance against Goods Sent on Consignment Basis: - When the goods are exported on consignment basis at the risk of the exporter for sale and eventual remittance of sale proceeds to him by the agent/consignee, bank may finance against such transaction subject to the customer enjoying specific limit to that effect. However, the bank should ensure while forwarding shipping documents to its overseas branch/correspondent to instruct the latter to deliver the document only against Trust Receipt/Undertaking to deliver the sale proceeds by specified date, which should be within the prescribed date even if according to the practice in certain trades a bill for part of the estimated value is drawn in advance against the exports.  Advance against Undrawn Balance: - In certain lines of export it is the trade practice that bills are not to be drawn for the full invoice value of the goods but to leave small part undrawn for payment after adjustment due to difference in rates, weight, quality etc. to be ascertained after approval and inspection of the goods. Banks do finance against the undrawn balance if undrawn balance is in conformity with the normal level of balance left undrawn in the particular line of export subject to a maximum of 10% of the value of export and an undertaking is obtained from the exporter that he will, within 6 months from due date of payment or the date of shipment of the goods, whichever is earlier surrender balance proceeds of the shipment. Against the specific prior approval from Reserve Bank of India the percentage of undrawn balance can be enhanced by the exporter and the finance can be made available accordingly at higher rate. Since the actual amount to be realised out of the undrawn balance, may be less than the undrawn balance, it is necessary to keep a margin on such advance.
  • 148.
    148  Advance against Retention Money: - Banks also grant advances against retention money, which is payable within one year from the date of shipment, at a concessional rate of interest up to 90 days. If such advances extend beyond one year, they are treated as deferred payment advances which are also eligible for concessional rate of interest.  Advances against Claims of Duty Drawback: - Duty Drawback is permitted against exports of different categories of goods under the 'Customs and Central Excise Duty Drawback Rules, 1995'. Drawback in relation to goods manufactured in India and exported means a rebate of duties chargeable on any imported materials or excisable materials used in manufacture of such goods in India or rebate on excise duty chargeable under Central Excises Act, 1944 on certain specified goods. The Duty Drawback Scheme is administered by Directorate of Duty Drawback in the Ministry of Finance. The claims of duty drawback are settled by Custom House at the rates determined and notified by the Directorate. As per the present procedure, no separate claim of duty drawback is to be filed by the exporter. A copy of the shipping bill presented by the exporter at the time of making shipment of goods serves the purpose of claim of duty drawback as well. This claim is provisionally accepted by the customs at the time of shipment and the shipping bill is duly verified. The claim is settled by customs office later. As a further incentive to exporters, Customs Houses at Delhi, Mumbai, Calcutta, Chennai, Chandigarh, and Hyderabad have evolved a simplified procedure under which claims of duty drawback are settled immediately after shipment and no funds of exporter are blocked. However, where settlement is not possible under the simplified procedure exporters may obtain advances against claims of duty drawback as provisionally certified by customs.  Negotiation of Export documents Drawn under L/C: - This aspect has been discussed in the chapter on Special Care for negotiation of Export Documents under Letter of Credit.  Rates of Interest: -The rate of interest depends on the nature of the Bills, i.e., whether it is a demand bill or usance bill. Like pre-shipment, post-shipment finance is also available at concessional rate of interest. The Present Rates of interest are as under: • Demand Bills for transit period Not exceeding (as specified by FEDAI) 10% p.a. • Usance Bills (for total period comprising usance period of ex-port bills, transit period as specified by FED AI and grace period, wherever applicable: • Upto 90 days 10% p.a. • Beyond 90 days and upto six 12% p.a. months from the date of shipment. • Beyond six months from the 20% date of Shipment (Minimum)
  • 149.
    149  Normal Transit Period: - Foreign Exchange Dealers Association of India (FEDAI) has fixed transit period for export bills drawn on different countries in the world. The concept of this transit period is that an export bill should normally be realised within that period. The transit period so fixed by FEDAI is known as 'Normal Transit Period' and mainly depends on geographical location of a particular country.  Direct and Indirect Bill: - If the currency of the bill is the same as the currency of the country on which it is drawn, it is termed as direct bill, e.g. an export bill in US $ drawn on a place in U.S.A. However, if the currency of the bill in which it is drawn is different than the currency of the country on which it is drawn, it is termed as indirect bill, e.g. an export bill in US $ drawn on a place in Japan. The normal transit period fixed for indirect bill is on higher side as compared to transit period fixed for direct bills.  Notional Due Date: - To determine the due date of an export bill we have to consider the following 3 components: - (1) Normal transit period as fixed by FEDAI, (2) Usance period of the bill and (3) Grace period if applicable in the country on which the bill is drawn. Grace period is applicable only in the case of Usance bills. The notional due date of an export bill may thus be calculated after adding all the above 3 components the concessional rate of interest is chargeable upto the notional due date subject to a maximum of 90 days.  Forfeiting Finance by Authorised Dealers: - Reserve Bank has now permitted the authorised dealers (Banks) to arrange forfeiting of medium term export receivables p 7 3 on the same lines as per the scheme of EXIM Bank and many International forfeiting agencies have now become active in Indian market. Forfeiting may be usefully employed as an additional window of export finance particularly for exports to those countries for which normal exports credit is not intended by the commercial banks. It must be noted that charges of forfeiting are eventually to be passed on to the ultimate buyer and should, therefore, be so declared on relative export declaration forms.  External Commercial Borrowings: - Proposals for raising foreign currency loans/credits viz., Buyer's Credits, Supplier's Credits or Lines of Credits by firms/companies/lending institutions, banks, etc. for financing cost of import of goods, technology or for any other purposes, other than short-term loans/credits maturing within one year should first be submitted to government of India, Ministry of Finance (Department Economic Affairs), ECB Division, New Delhi for necessary clearance. The proposals are considered by the government on merits of each case and in the light of prevailing Government policy.  EXIM Bank Finance: - Besides commercial banks, export finance is also made available by the EXIM bank. The EXIM bank provides financial assistance to promote Indian exports through direct
  • 150.
    150 financial assistance, overseas investment finance, term finance for export production and export development, pre-shipment credit, lines of credit, re-lending facility, export bills re-discounting, refinance to commercial banks, finance for computer software exports, finance for export marketing and bulk import finance to commercial banks. The EXIM Bank also extends non-funded facility to Indian exports in the form of guarantees. The diversified lending programmed of the EXIM Bank now covers various stages of exports, i.e. from the development export markets to expansion of production capacity for exports, production for export and post shipment financing. The EXIM Bank's focus is on export of manufactured goods, project exports, exports of technology, services and export of computer software. Hindalco Export Data (From Renukoot Plant) Although, EXIM bank is assisting finance to the exporters but Hindalco is not availing this facility provided by the EXIM bank. HINDALCO’S EXPORTS (From Renukoot Plant) YEAR QTY. (MT) 2003-04 20393 2004-05 32828 2005-06 36559 2006-07 35477 2007-08 39317 2008-09 34282 Table 3: Hindalco’s Export in terms of Quantity (MT)
  • 151.
    151 SWOT ANALYSIS OF HINDALCO  STRENGTH • A global leader in value-added high-end aluminium flat rolled products and aluminium can recycle. • It is the largest manufacturer of the entire range of flat rolled products in India & enjoys nearly 60 per cent of market share. • The company exports about 17 per cent of its total sales volume of aluminium. • The company has been accorded the Five Star Trading House status in India. • The company's metal is accepted for delivery under the high grade aluminium contract on the London Metal Exchange (LME).  WEAKNESS Since I had done my project in Renukoot plant then the only weakness which I found here in Renukoot plant is that Marketing process is very difficult from here due to its remote location and it is also very far from ports.  OPPORTUITIES • Takeover of Indal is taking Hindalco to the way of increased production to meet the Importer’s requirements without any delay in time and it also giving the opportunities to export marketing department to secure as much export order due to increased capacity of production. • Acquisition of Novelis giving the opportunities to the Hindalco to expand more its global market, since, Novelis has the unrivaled capability to provide its customers with a regional supply of technologically sophisticated rolled aluminium products throughout Asia, Europe, North America and South America.  THREATS Due to high International Inflation rate, price of the Aluminium is increasing in the International Metal Market. As a result, the Aluminium, which was said as the product of poor peoples, now it has been gone far from the hands of a middle class people. Now, it becomes a product of high class society. So, poor and middle class peoples are searching and getting the alternatives of the Aluminium metal i.e. Iron and Steel which is low in cost as comparison to Aluminium now-a-days.
  • 152.
    152 FINDINGS & RECOMMENDATIONS  Findings • Hindalco is the leading exporter of Aluminium Semi-Finished products in India. • FIEO (Federation of Indian Export Organisation) has awarded Hindalco as a Five Star Trading Houses on their export achievements. • Hindalco is following all the norms as per Central Excise & Customs and other government rules & regulations in the export process. • Hindalco is following positive and proactive approach towards export. • Hindalco is exporting from Kolkata and Mumbai port both. • Hindalco is exporting all over the world, from underdeveloped countries to advance countries.  Recommendations Hindalco is a reputed Aluminium industry in the world and its products are well accepted in the market but as we know that there is always a scope of improvement. Following are the recommendations in all the three areas i.e. Export Process, Export Documentations and Export Logistics: • Sometimes 3-4% execution of export order has been delayed due to rejection of partial quantity of the product due to quality problems and manufacturing defects. So, it is recommended that Hindalco should have to keep advance stock or backup products in their warehouse to overcome this problem and to execute the order on time. • Some of the Caster product order is being delayed due to limited capacity of the Caster Plant. So, it is recommended that Hindalco should have to increase the capacity of their Caster Plant.
  • 153.
    153 • Hindalco is using Oracle 11i & IVL software system for making export documents. The working of this software is from Order management to Shipment. This process is time taking due to partly adoption of the software system. So, it is recommended that this software should have been start from Enquiry management to Shipment. It would ease in making documents in faster way manual interruption will be minimized. • Sometimes there is unavailability of containers for any particular destination occurs. This problem have been overcome by helding a meeting and making a successful negotiation process from the shipping line companies for the arrangement of empty containers. • Unavailability of tailors due to non-uniformity of production occurs. This problem should have been solved by the proper working collaboration of the Marketing & Production department. • Movement of export consignment tailors disturbs due to creation of problems by the Naxalieds in Jharkhand and Bihar. This problem will be overcome by the Indian Government only, company have not any solution of this problem. Some other recommendations are: • Company should focus on small-scale industries. • Improved and advanced technologies should be used for better Quality and more Quantity. • Company should focus on CRM (Customers Relationship Management).
  • 154.
    154 BIBLIOGRAPHY Books:  Khurana P. K., Export Management, 4th Edition, Galgotia Publication Company.  Philip R. Cateora and John L. Graham, International Marketing, 11th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publication Company Limited.  Francis Cherunilam, International Trade and Export Management, 15th Edition, Himalaya Publication House.  Rothor B.S. & J.S. Rathor, Export Management, 6th Edition, Himalaya Publication House. Magazines:  Aluminium International Today  Aluminium Times  APT – Aluminium Process and Product Technology  Induction Manual Internet:  http://www.unzco.com/basicguide  http://www.fieo.org  http://www.wikipedia.com/trade_policy/export_procedures  http://www.google.co.in  http://www.altavista.com  http://www.hindalco.com  http://www.novelis.com  http://www.adityabirla.com  http://www.bxa.doc.gov
  • 155.
    155 SPECIMEN OF PROFORMA INVOICE Exporter Invoice no. Exporter’s Ref & date Buyer’s order no. & date Other references Consignee Buyer Country of origin of Country of goods Final destination Terms of delivery and payment Pre-carriage by Place of Receipt by Pre- carrier Vessel/Flight Port of lading No. Port of Final destination discharge Marks and no. No. and Description Quality Rate Amount of containers kind of of goods Pkgs. Signature & date
  • 156.
    156 SPECIMEN OF PACKING LIST Exporter Invoice No. Date Buyer’s order no. & date Other reference(s) Consignee Buyer Country of origin of Country of goods Final destination Pre-carriage by Place of Receipt by Pre-carrier Vessel/Flight Port of lading No. Port of discharge Place of delivery Marks & No.s/ No. and kind of Pkgs. Description Quality Remarks containers no. of goods Signature & date
  • 157.
    157 SPECIMEN OF CERTIFICATE OF ORIGIN Exporter NAME OF THE CHAMBER OF COMMERCE Consignee Pre-carriage by Place of receipt of Pre- Carrier Vessel Port of loading Port of discharge Final destination No. and kind of packages : Gross weight (kg) Description of goods Measurement Certification : Declaration by Exporter : It is hereby certified that this declaration was made before We hereby declared that the above mentioned goods were me and that to the best of my knowledge and believe the produced in the Indian Union and are shipped to above mentioned goods are of Indian origin. Name of the authorized Signatory Place and date of issue Place & date of issue Signature Secretary Signature
  • 158.
    158 SPECIMEN OF BILL OF LADING Shipper B/L NO. Consignee NAME AND LOGO OF SHIPPING LINE Notify Party Local Vessel From Ocean Vessel Port of Lading Port of Discharge Final Destination (if on carriage) Marks & Numbers No. & Kind of Packages; Gross weight(kg) Measurement Description of goods Freight details, charges, etc Shipped on board in apparent good order…………… Freight Payable at Place & date of time No. of Original B/L Signature Applicable only when document used as through Bill of Lading
  • 159.
    159 SPECIMEN OF EXPORT QUOTATION WORKSHEET
  • 160.
  • 161.
    161 SPECIMEN OF COMMERCIAL INVOICE 1. EXPORTER 2. CONSIGNEE INTERMEDIATE CONSIGNEE 3. FORWARDING AGENT 4. COMMERCIAL INVOICE NO. 5. CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER NO. 6. B/L, AWB NO. a. COUNTRY OF ORIGIN b. DATE OF EXPORT c. TERMS OF PAYMENT d. EXPORT REFERENCES e. AIR/OCEAN PORT OF f. EMBARKATION g. EXPORTING
  • 162.
    162 h. CARRIER/ROUTE i. PACKAGES j. QUANTITY k. NET WEIGHT/GROSS WEIGHT l. DESCRIPTION OF MERCHANDISE UNIT m. PRICE/TOTAL VALUE n. PACKAGE MARKS o. MISC. CHARGES p. CERTIFICATIONS
  • 163.
    163 SAMPLE OF INSURANCE CERTIFICATE
  • 164.